Sie sind auf Seite 1von 1804

Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

7302 Intelligent Services Access


Manager
7330 Intelligent Services Access
Manager FTTN
7360 Intelligent Services Access
Manager FX
Release 5.6.01

Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD


100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA

Issue: 14

June 2017

Nokia — Proprietary and confidential


Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

Nokia is a registered trademark of Nokia Corporation. Other products and company


names mentioned herein may be trademarks or tradenames of their respective
owners.
The information presented is subject to change without notice. No responsibility is
assumed for inaccuracies contained herein.
© 2014-2017 Nokia.
Contains proprietary/trade secret information which is the property of Nokia and must
not be made available to, or copied or used by anyone outside Nokia without its
written authorization. Not to be used or disclosed except in accordance with
applicable agreements.

2 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

Table of contents
1 Preface...........................................................................................67
1.1 Scope ........................................................................................................67
1.2 Audience....................................................................................................67
1.3 Required knowledge..................................................................................67
1.4 Product naming .........................................................................................67
1.5 Documents ................................................................................................67
1.6 Acronymns and initialisms .........................................................................67
1.7 Safety information......................................................................................68
1.8 Special information ....................................................................................68
1.9 Release notes............................................................................................68
2 Introduction...................................................................................69
2.1 Introduction................................................................................................69
2.2 How to use this document .........................................................................69
2.2.1 TOP layers.................................................................................................69
2.2.1.1 Non-trouble procedure (NTP) ....................................................................70
2.2.1.2 Detailed level procedure (DLP) .................................................................70
2.2.1.3 Routine task procedure (RTP)...................................................................70
2.2.1.4 Trouble analysis procedure (TAP).............................................................70
2.2.1.5 Training (TNG)...........................................................................................70
2.2.2 Step details................................................................................................71
2.2.3 Procedures with options or substeps.........................................................71
2.3 Configuration examples.............................................................................72
Index List (IXL)
3 Master task index list ...................................................................75
Non-Trouble Procedures (NTP)
4 NTP 1118 Monitor performance and view configuration ..........89
4.1 Purpose .....................................................................................................89
4.2 Procedure ..................................................................................................89
5 NTP 1119 Modify xDSL services .................................................91
5.1 Purpose .....................................................................................................91
5.2 Procedure ..................................................................................................91
6 NTP 1124 Maintain the system ....................................................93
6.1 Purpose .....................................................................................................93
6.2 Procedure ..................................................................................................93
7 NTP 1126 Manage system logging..............................................95
7.1 Purpose .....................................................................................................95
7.2 General......................................................................................................95
7.3 Procedure ..................................................................................................96
8 NTP 1130 Configure link related Ethernet OAM.........................97
8.1 Purpose .....................................................................................................97
8.2 Procedure ..................................................................................................97

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 3
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

9 NTP 1132 Configure connectivity fault management ................99


9.1 Purpose .....................................................................................................99
9.2 General......................................................................................................99
9.3 Prerequisites............................................................................................100
9.4 Procedure ................................................................................................100
10 NTP 1157 Configure an E1 line..................................................101
10.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................101
10.2 General....................................................................................................101
10.3 Hardware considerations.........................................................................101
10.4 Procedure ................................................................................................101
11 NTP 3100 Initial system configuration ......................................103
11.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................103
11.2 General....................................................................................................103
11.3 Security Considerations...........................................................................104
11.4 Procedure ................................................................................................105
12 NTP 3101 Execute script files....................................................107
12.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................107
12.2 Procedure ................................................................................................107
13 NTP 3103 Configure equipment ................................................109
13.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................109
13.2 General....................................................................................................109
13.3 Change the shelf mode ...........................................................................110
13.4 Procedure ................................................................................................110
14 NTP 3104 Configure a VLAN cross-connect without
MPLS at the network side ..........................................................111
14.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................111
14.1.1 Purpose of C-VLAN CC...........................................................................111
14.1.2 Purpose of S-VLAN CC ...........................................................................111
14.1.3 Purpose of S+C-VLAN CC ......................................................................112
14.2 Prerequisite .............................................................................................112
14.3 Procedure ................................................................................................112
15 NTP 3105 Configure an iBridge VLAN without MPLS at
the network side .........................................................................115
15.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................115
15.2 Prerequisite .............................................................................................115
15.3 Procedure ................................................................................................115
16 NTP 3108 Configure services ....................................................119
16.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................119
16.2 Procedure ................................................................................................119
17 NTP 3114 Perform equipment repairs.......................................127
17.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................127
17.2 Procedure ................................................................................................127
18 NTP 3115 Monitor alarms...........................................................129
18.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................129

4 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

18.2 Procedure ................................................................................................129


19 NTP 3116 Perform software management ................................131
19.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................131
19.2 Procedure ................................................................................................131
20 NTP 3117 Modify system parameters .......................................133
20.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................133
20.2 Procedure ................................................................................................133
21 NTP 3120 Troubleshooting the network ...................................135
21.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................135
21.2 Procedure ................................................................................................135
22 NTP 3127 Configure SHDSL ......................................................137
22.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................137
22.2 Procedure ................................................................................................137
23 NTP 3134 Configure a VPRN or IES ..........................................139
23.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................139
23.2 Procedure ................................................................................................140
24 NTP 3135 Configure an iBridge VLAN with MPLS at the
network side................................................................................141
24.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................141
24.2 Prerequisite .............................................................................................142
24.3 Procedure ................................................................................................142
25 NTP 3136 Configure a VLAN cross-connect using MPLS
at the network side .....................................................................147
25.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................147
25.1.1 Purpose of C-VLAN CC...........................................................................147
25.1.2 Purpose of S+C-VLAN CC ......................................................................148
25.1.3 Purpose of S-VLAN CC ...........................................................................149
25.2 Prerequisite .............................................................................................150
25.3 Procedure ................................................................................................150
26 NTP 3137 Configure PW redundancy .......................................153
26.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................153
26.2 Prerequisite .............................................................................................153
26.3 Procedure ................................................................................................154
27 NTP 3138 Configure full business bridging .............................155
27.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................155
27.2 Prerequisite .............................................................................................155
27.3 Procedure ................................................................................................155
28 NTP 3139 Manage and monitor EPON alarms..........................157
28.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................157
28.2 Procedure ................................................................................................157
29 NTP 3140 Monitor performance of EPON system....................159
29.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................159
29.2 General....................................................................................................159
29.3 Procedure ................................................................................................159

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 5
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

30 NTP 3141 Configure IGMP and multicast for an EPON


ONT ..............................................................................................161
30.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................161
30.2 General....................................................................................................161
30.3 Configuration considerations ...................................................................161
30.3.1 Configuring in the control or IGMP snooping mode.................................161
30.3.2 Configuring in the flooding mode.............................................................162
30.4 Prerequisites............................................................................................163
30.5 Procedure ................................................................................................163
31 NTP 3142 Download, activate, and commit ONT software .....165
31.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................165
31.2 General....................................................................................................165
31.3 Configuration considerations ...................................................................166
31.3.1 Software version names for China EPON ...............................................166
31.3.2 Software version names for MSO EPON ................................................167
31.3.3 Software download failures .....................................................................167
31.4 Prerequisites............................................................................................168
31.5 Procedure ................................................................................................168
32 NTP 3143 Configure a VoIP service for EPON .........................169
32.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................169
32.2 General....................................................................................................169
32.3 Prerequisites............................................................................................169
32.4 Procedure ................................................................................................170
33 NTP 3144 Configure an APIPE service .....................................171
33.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................171
33.2 General....................................................................................................171
33.3 Procedure ................................................................................................173
34 NTP 3145 Download and install an application on the AI
platform .......................................................................................175
34.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................175
34.2 Procedure ................................................................................................175
35 NTP 3146 Manage DPoE links to OAM (EPON) ........................177
35.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................177
35.2 General....................................................................................................177
35.3 Procedure ................................................................................................177
36 NTP 3147 Configure DPoE .........................................................179
36.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................179
36.2 General....................................................................................................179
36.2.1 References ..............................................................................................179
36.3 Procedure ................................................................................................179
37 NTP 3148 Configure a GPON uplink .........................................183
37.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................183
37.2 General....................................................................................................183
37.3 Procedure ................................................................................................183

6 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

38 NTP 3150 Configure NG-PON2 ..................................................187


38.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................187
38.2 General....................................................................................................187
38.3 Configuration guidelines ..........................................................................189
38.4 Procedure ................................................................................................189
39 NTP 3152 Modify system scaling mode....................................191
39.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................191
39.2 General....................................................................................................191
39.3 Prerequisites............................................................................................191
39.4 Procedure ................................................................................................191
40 NTP 3154 Configure zero touch provisioning ..........................193
40.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................193
40.2 General....................................................................................................193
40.3 Prerequisites............................................................................................193
40.4 Hardware considerations.........................................................................193
40.5 References ..............................................................................................193
40.6 Procedure ................................................................................................194
41 NTP 3155 Manage PON upstream bandwidth utilization ........195
41.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................195
41.2 General....................................................................................................195
41.3 Prerequisites............................................................................................195
41.4 Hardware considerations.........................................................................195
41.5 References ..............................................................................................195
41.6 Procedure ................................................................................................196
42 NTP 3156 Configure XGS-PON ..................................................197
42.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................197
42.2 General....................................................................................................197
42.3 Configuration Guidelines .........................................................................198
42.4 Procedure ................................................................................................198
43 NTP 3159 Configure an interface port ......................................199
43.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................199
43.2 General....................................................................................................199
43.3 Procedure ................................................................................................199
44 NTP 3160 Configure a dynamic VLAN assignment in PoL .....201
44.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................201
44.2 General....................................................................................................201
44.2.1 Dynamic VLAN assignment.....................................................................201
44.2.2 802.1x MAC-based authentication ..........................................................201
44.3 Configuration considerations ...................................................................202
44.4 User level.................................................................................................202
44.5 Prerequisites............................................................................................202
44.6 Hardware considerations.........................................................................202
44.7 References ..............................................................................................202
44.8 Procedure ................................................................................................203

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 7
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

Detailed Level Procedures (DLP)


45 DLP 1100 Set up a local CLI or TL1 session ............................217
45.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................217
45.2 Procedure ................................................................................................217
46 DLP 1117 Configure a VLAN on the LT for C-VLAN
network cross-connect ..............................................................219
46.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................219
46.2 Reserved or default system VLAN identifiers ..........................................219
46.3 References ..............................................................................................220
46.4 Procedure ................................................................................................220
47 DLP 1118 Configure a network VLAN on the LT for S-
VLAN cross-connect ..................................................................223
47.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................223
47.2 Reserved or default system VLAN identifiers ..........................................224
47.3 References ..............................................................................................224
47.4 Procedure ................................................................................................224
48 DLP 1120 Configure a network VLAN on the LT for C-
iBridge .........................................................................................227
48.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................227
48.2 Reserved or default system VLAN identifiers ..........................................227
48.3 References ..............................................................................................228
48.4 Procedure ................................................................................................228
49 DLP 1129 Create xDSL profiles .................................................231
49.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................231
49.2 General....................................................................................................231
49.3 Procedure ................................................................................................232
50 DLP 1130 Configure xDSL bonding ..........................................243
50.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................243
50.1.1 Bonding services .....................................................................................243
50.1.2 Bonding levels .........................................................................................244
50.2 Configuration considerations ...................................................................245
50.3 References ..............................................................................................245
50.4 Prerequisites............................................................................................245
50.5 Procedure ................................................................................................246
51 DLP 1134 Configure QoS ...........................................................251
51.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................251
51.2 Procedure ................................................................................................251
52 DLP 1145 Configure 802.1x........................................................263
52.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................263
52.2 Configuration considerations ...................................................................263
52.3 Procedure ................................................................................................263
53 DLP 1146 Configure PPPoE relay on LT...................................265
53.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................265
53.2 Behavior of the line ID .............................................................................265

8 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

53.3 Access loop encapsulation ......................................................................265


53.4 Prerequisite .............................................................................................266
53.5 Procedure ................................................................................................266
54 DLP 1152 Reboot the system ....................................................269
54.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................269
54.2 Procedure ................................................................................................269
55 DLP 1159 Manage OSWP ...........................................................271
55.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................271
55.2 Prerequisite .............................................................................................271
55.3 Procedure ................................................................................................271
56 DLP 1163 Modifying xDSL profiles ...........................................275
56.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................275
56.2 Prerequisite .............................................................................................275
56.3 Procedure ................................................................................................275
57 DLP 1170 Configure SSH and SFTP..........................................279
57.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................279
57.2 General....................................................................................................279
57.3 Procedure ................................................................................................279
58 DLP 1173 Switch a user from ADSL to VDSL and vice
versa ............................................................................................283
58.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................283
58.2 Procedure ................................................................................................283
59 DLP 1174 Create an xDSL IPoA user and add this user to
a VLAN for C-VLAN cross-connect ...........................................285
59.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................285
59.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................285
59.3 Procedure ................................................................................................286
60 DLP 1187 Configure global VLAN parameters .........................289
60.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................289
60.2 Procedure ................................................................................................289
61 DLP 1188 Configure custom PSD points..................................291
61.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................291
61.2 Procedure ................................................................................................292
62 DLP 1189 Configure VDSL2 virtual noise values.....................299
62.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................299
62.2 Procedure ................................................................................................299
63 DLP 1201 Configure protocol tracing .......................................301
63.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................301
63.2 Procedure ................................................................................................301
64 DLP 1202 Configure QoS threshold crossing alerts ...............303
64.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................303
64.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................303
64.3 Procedure ................................................................................................303

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 9
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

65 DLP 1203 Configure general security settings ........................305


65.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................305
65.2 Procedure ................................................................................................305
66 DLP 1205 Configure link related Ethernet OAM.......................309
66.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................309
66.2 Link Related Ethernet OAM Configuration Parameters...........................309
66.3 Prerequisites............................................................................................310
66.4 Procedure ................................................................................................310
67 DLP 1206 Configure an xDSL DPBO profile .............................313
67.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................313
67.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................313
67.3 Procedure ................................................................................................313
68 DLP 1207 Modify an xDSL DPBO profile ..................................317
68.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................317
68.2 Prerequisite .............................................................................................317
68.3 Procedure ................................................................................................317
69 DLP 1208 Configure xDSL power back off ...............................319
69.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................319
69.2 Prerequisite .............................................................................................319
69.3 Procedure ................................................................................................319
70 DLP 1215 Configure the impulse noise sensor on an
xDSL line .....................................................................................321
70.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................321
70.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................321
70.3 Procedure ................................................................................................321
71 DLP 1217 Configure the xDSL overrule data ...........................325
71.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................325
71.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................325
71.3 Procedure ................................................................................................326
72 DLP 1221 Manage troubleshooting counters on LT ................329
72.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................329
72.2 Procedure ................................................................................................329
73 DLP 1225 Configure the p-bit counter on a VLAN port ...........333
73.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................333
73.2 Prerequisite .............................................................................................333
73.3 Procedure ................................................................................................334
74 DLP 1232 Create an xDSL IPoA user and add this user to
a VLAN for iBridge......................................................................335
74.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................335
74.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................335
74.3 Procedure ................................................................................................336
75 DLP 1257 Configure a line with an xDSL RTX profile..............339
75.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................339
75.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................339

10 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

75.3 Procedure ................................................................................................339


76 DLP 1258 Modify an xDSL RTX profile .....................................343
76.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................343
76.2 Prerequisite .............................................................................................343
76.3 Procedure ................................................................................................343
77 DLP 1291 Configure a VDSL2 vectoring control entity
profile and associate it to a board ............................................347
77.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................347
77.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................347
77.3 Procedure ................................................................................................347
78 DLP 1292 Modify a Vectoring Control Entity profile................351
78.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................351
78.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................351
78.3 Procedure ................................................................................................351
79 DLP 1295 Configure a line with an xDSL vectoring profile.....353
79.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................353
79.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................353
79.3 Procedure ................................................................................................354
80 DLP 1296 Modify an xDSL vectoring profile ............................357
80.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................357
80.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................357
80.3 Procedure ................................................................................................357
81 DLP 1297 Delete an xDSL vectoring profile .............................361
81.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................361
81.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................361
81.3 Procedure ................................................................................................361
82 DLP 1298 Monitor xDSL vectoring lines...................................363
82.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................363
82.2 General....................................................................................................363
82.3 Procedure ................................................................................................364
83 DLP 1330 Initiate a connectivity fault management test .........367
83.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................367
83.2 General....................................................................................................367
83.3 Prerequisite .............................................................................................367
83.4 Procedure ................................................................................................367
84 DLP 1336 Configure fallback for xDSL vectoring ....................371
84.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................371
84.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................371
84.3 Procedure ................................................................................................372
85 DLP 1347 Configure a priority regeneration profile ................375
85.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................375
85.2 Procedure ................................................................................................375

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 11
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

86 DLP 1358 Configure a bonding group with a group RTX


profile...........................................................................................379
86.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................379
86.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................379
86.3 Procedure ................................................................................................379
87 DLP 1380 Configure fallback for xDSL bonding vectoring .....383
87.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................383
87.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................383
87.3 Procedure ................................................................................................384
88 DLP 1386 Configure xDSL SOS profiles...................................385
88.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................385
88.2 General....................................................................................................385
88.3 References ..............................................................................................385
88.4 Prerequisites............................................................................................385
88.5 Procedure ................................................................................................386
89 DLP 1404 Configure an xDSL legacy UPBO profile.................389
89.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................389
89.2 General....................................................................................................389
89.3 References ..............................................................................................389
89.4 Prerequisites............................................................................................389
89.5 Procedure ................................................................................................389
90 DLP 1419 Configure an E1 line interface..................................393
90.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................393
90.2 References ..............................................................................................393
90.3 Hardware considerations.........................................................................393
90.4 Prerequisites............................................................................................393
90.5 Procedure ................................................................................................393
91 DLP 1420 Configure multi-framing and CRC on an E1 line ....395
91.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................395
91.2 General....................................................................................................395
91.3 References ..............................................................................................395
91.4 Hardware considerations.........................................................................395
91.5 Prerequisites............................................................................................396
91.6 Procedure ................................................................................................396
92 DLP 1421 Configure operator login retry policy ......................397
92.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................397
92.2 General....................................................................................................397
92.3 References ..............................................................................................397
92.4 Prerequisites............................................................................................397
92.5 Procedure ................................................................................................398
93 DLP 3101 Create operator profiles and instances ...................401
93.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................401
93.2 Operator Profile Rules .............................................................................401
93.3 Password Rules.......................................................................................401
93.4 Procedure ................................................................................................402

12 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

94 DLP 3103 Configure system parameters..................................405


94.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................405
94.2 Procedure ................................................................................................405
95 DLP 3105 Configure link aggregation usage ...........................411
95.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................411
95.2 General....................................................................................................411
95.3 Prerequisite .............................................................................................412
95.4 Procedure ................................................................................................412
96 DLP 3107 Manage OSPF ............................................................415
96.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................415
96.2 Procedure ................................................................................................415
97 DLP 3108 Manage RIP ................................................................417
97.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................417
97.2 Limitations ...............................................................................................417
97.3 Procedure ................................................................................................417
98 DLP 3109 Configure SNMP and trap management ..................419
98.1 General....................................................................................................419
98.1.1 SNMP ......................................................................................................419
98.1.2 Trap management ...................................................................................419
98.2 Security Considerations...........................................................................420
98.3 Procedure ................................................................................................420
99 DLP 3110 Manage alarms...........................................................427
99.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................427
99.2 Prerequisite .............................................................................................427
99.3 Procedure ................................................................................................428
100 DLP 3111 Plan, re-plan, and unplan equipment.......................431
100.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................431
100.2 General....................................................................................................431
100.3 NTIO Board .............................................................................................433
100.4 LT boards ................................................................................................434
100.5 SB-REM: dual hosting .............................................................................435
100.5.1 Example...................................................................................................435
100.6 DPoE considerations ...............................................................................435
100.7 Prerequisite .............................................................................................436
100.8 Procedure ................................................................................................436
101 DLP 3112 Lock and unlock equipment .....................................447
101.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................447
101.2 Procedure ................................................................................................447
102 DLP 3113 Configure the equipment ..........................................449
102.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................449
102.2 Procedure ................................................................................................449
103 DLP 3114 Configure NT redundancy ........................................453
103.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................453
103.2 Procedure ................................................................................................454

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 13
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

104 DLP 3119 Configure a VLAN on the LT for S+C-VLAN


cross-connect .............................................................................457
104.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................457
104.2 Reserved or Default System VLAN Identifiers.........................................457
104.3 Procedure ................................................................................................458
105 DLP 3124 Create an xDSL/native Ethernet user and add
this user to a VLAN on the LT ...................................................461
105.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................461
105.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................462
105.3 Procedure ................................................................................................462
106 DLP 3132 Configure filtering on the NT ....................................469
106.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................469
106.1.1 L2 (MAC) filters........................................................................................469
106.1.2 L3 IPv4 filters...........................................................................................470
106.1.3 L3 IPv6 filters...........................................................................................470
106.1.4 CPU filters ...............................................................................................471
106.2 Procedure ................................................................................................472
107 DLP 3136 Configure the multicast service in the system .......475
107.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................475
107.2 Procedure ................................................................................................475
108 DLP 3137 Configure a multicast v-VPLS ..................................479
108.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................479
108.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................479
108.3 Procedure ................................................................................................479
109 DLP 3138 Configure a multicast channel .................................481
109.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................481
109.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................481
109.3 Procedure ................................................................................................482
110 DLP 3140 Configure DHCP relay agent in router mode ..........487
110.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................487
110.2 Prerequisite .............................................................................................487
110.3 Procedure ................................................................................................488
111 DLP 3142 Configure the security domain.................................491
111.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................491
111.2 Procedure ................................................................................................491
112 DLP 3144 Configure RADIUS .....................................................493
112.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................493
112.2 Procedure ................................................................................................493
113 DLP 3147 Configure PPPoX cross-connect .............................499
113.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................499
113.1.1 Note for the maximum number of PPP cross-connections on a port.......499
113.2 PPPoX: additional configuration details...................................................500
113.2.1 PVID ........................................................................................................500
113.2.2 QoS .........................................................................................................500

14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

113.3 Prerequisites............................................................................................500
113.4 Procedure ................................................................................................501
114 DLP 3151 Shut down and restart the NT ..................................509
114.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................509
114.2 Location of the flash disk on the NT board ..............................................509
114.3 Procedure ................................................................................................510
115 DLP 3153 Shut down and restart individual equipment..........513
115.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................513
115.2 Procedure ................................................................................................513
116 DLP 3154 Create a snapshot alarm table .................................515
116.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................515
116.2 General....................................................................................................515
116.3 Procedure ................................................................................................516
117 DLP 3155 Monitor alarms...........................................................519
117.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................519
117.2 General....................................................................................................519
117.3 Procedure ................................................................................................519
118 DLP 3157 Manage the IHub database .......................................523
118.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................523
118.2 Procedure ................................................................................................523
119 DLP 3164 Ping another host ......................................................525
119.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................525
119.2 Procedure ................................................................................................525
120 DLP 3165 Perform a traceroute action......................................527
120.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................527
120.2 Procedure ................................................................................................527
121 DLP 3167 Script files ..................................................................529
121.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................529
121.2 Sub-domains ...........................................................................................529
121.3 Procedure ................................................................................................530
122 DLP 3171 Enable EMS management.........................................533
122.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................533
122.2 Procedure ................................................................................................533
123 DLP 3172 Create a default operator profile ..............................537
123.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................537
123.2 General....................................................................................................537
123.2.1 Configuration Considerations ..................................................................537
123.3 Procedure ................................................................................................539
124 DLP 3176 Configure performance monitoring .........................543
124.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................543
124.2 Procedure ................................................................................................543
125 DLP 3177 Configure SFP downlink ports .................................553
125.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................553

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 15
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

125.2 General....................................................................................................553
125.3 Prerequisite .............................................................................................554
125.4 Procedure ................................................................................................554
126 DLP 3179 Configure system logging ........................................557
126.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................557
126.2 General....................................................................................................557
126.3 Procedure ................................................................................................560
127 DLP 3180 Configure static MAC addresses .............................563
127.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................563
127.2 Prerequisite .............................................................................................563
127.3 Procedure ................................................................................................563
128 DLP 3181 Configure operator authentication using
RADIUS ........................................................................................565
128.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................565
128.2 Configuration considerations ...................................................................565
128.3 Prerequisites............................................................................................565
128.4 Procedure ................................................................................................566
129 DLP 3182 Configure SHDSL ......................................................567
129.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................567
129.2 Prerequisite .............................................................................................567
129.3 Procedure ................................................................................................568
130 DLP 3183 Configure IMA on SHDSL spans ..............................575
130.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................575
130.2 Prerequisite .............................................................................................575
130.3 Procedure ................................................................................................575
131 DLP 3190 Configure threshold crossing alerts........................577
131.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................577
131.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................577
131.3 Procedure ................................................................................................578
132 DLP 3195 Configure general bridge parameters .....................581
132.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................581
132.2 Procedure ................................................................................................581
133 DLP 3196 Configure voice SIP...................................................583
133.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................583
133.2 General....................................................................................................583
133.2.1 Forwarding deployment models ..............................................................583
133.2.2 SIP deployment models...........................................................................583
133.2.3 Digitmap configuration policy...................................................................586
133.2.4 Policy rules ..............................................................................................587
133.2.5 Digitmap-patterns/digitmap-regular-expression examples ......................588
133.2.6 Digit collection timers...............................................................................589
133.2.7 Multiple VSG and SIP service profiles.....................................................589
133.3 Configuration considerations ...................................................................592
133.3.1 Best practice to configure a digitmap rule ...............................................592
133.3.2 Digitmap configuration example ..............................................................592

16 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

133.3.3 SIP ISDN PRA manipulation rules...........................................................593


133.4 Prerequisites............................................................................................594
133.5 Procedure ................................................................................................594
134 DLP 3197 View port configuration and operational data
on LT ............................................................................................623
134.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................623
134.2 Procedure ................................................................................................623
135 DLP 3198 Configure the multicast service on a user port ......625
135.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................625
135.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................625
135.3 Procedure ................................................................................................626
136 DLP 3199 Configure QoS on the IHub ......................................629
136.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................629
136.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................629
136.3 Procedure ................................................................................................629
137 DLP 3200 Configure Spanning Tree on the IHub .....................635
137.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................635
137.2 Prerequisite .............................................................................................635
137.3 Procedure ................................................................................................636
138 DLP 3209 Configure vMAC ........................................................639
138.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................639
138.2 Prerequisite .............................................................................................639
138.3 Procedure ................................................................................................640
139 DLP 3210 View the status of various system parameters ......643
139.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................643
139.2 Procedure ................................................................................................643
140 DLP 3211 Configure SFP uplink ports ......................................645
140.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................645
140.2 Prerequisite .............................................................................................645
140.3 General....................................................................................................645
140.4 Procedure ................................................................................................646
141 DLP 3212 Create an IP user/subnet ..........................................649
141.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................649
141.2 Prerequisite .............................................................................................649
141.3 Procedure ................................................................................................649
142 DLP 3213 Enable OAM counters ...............................................653
142.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................653
142.2 Prerequisite .............................................................................................653
142.3 Procedure ................................................................................................653
143 DLP 3214 Configure connectivity fault management ..............655
143.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................655
143.2 General....................................................................................................655
143.3 Configuration considerations ...................................................................657
143.4 Hardware considerations.........................................................................658

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 17
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

143.5 Conditions................................................................................................658
143.6 Prerequisites............................................................................................660
143.7 References ..............................................................................................661
143.8 Procedure ................................................................................................661
144 DLP 3216 Configure voice Megaco ...........................................677
144.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................677
144.2 Forwarding deployment models ..............................................................677
144.3 Termination ID .........................................................................................677
144.3.1 Legacy flat termination ID........................................................................678
144.3.2 Improved flat termination ID ....................................................................679
144.3.3 Legacy hierarchical termination ID ..........................................................679
144.3.4 Improved hierarchical termination ID.......................................................680
144.4 Hierarchical POTS termination ID format ................................................681
144.5 Hierarchical ISDN termination ID format .................................................682
144.6 Message identifier (MID) .........................................................................682
144.7 Prerequisite .............................................................................................683
144.8 Procedure ................................................................................................689
145 DLP 3219 Forced NT switchover ...............................................705
145.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................705
145.2 Procedure ................................................................................................705
146 DLP 3220 Manage the CDE profile ............................................707
146.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................707
146.2 Prerequisite .............................................................................................707
146.3 Procedure ................................................................................................707
147 DLP 3223 Configure IHub port mirroring..................................709
147.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................709
147.2 Procedure ................................................................................................709
148 DLP 3224 Change shelf mode ...................................................711
148.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................711
148.2 Prerequisite .............................................................................................711
148.3 Procedure ................................................................................................712
149 DLP 3226 Manage IS-IS ..............................................................715
149.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................715
149.2 Procedure ................................................................................................715
150 DLP 3227 Create a customer .....................................................717
150.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................717
150.2 Prerequisite .............................................................................................717
150.3 Procedure ................................................................................................717
151 DLP 3228 Create and update a VPRN or an IES service .........719
151.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................719
151.2 Prerequisite .............................................................................................719
151.3 Procedure ................................................................................................720
152 DLP 3229 Configure an IP interface and SAP on a VPRN or
an IES...........................................................................................723
152.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................723

18 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

152.2 Prerequisite .............................................................................................723


152.3 Procedure ................................................................................................724
153 DLP 3230 Configure v-VPLS ......................................................727
153.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................727
153.2 Procedure ................................................................................................727
154 DLP 3231 Manage the ports on the LT, NT/NTIO .....................731
154.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................731
154.2 General....................................................................................................731
154.3 Procedure ................................................................................................732
155 DLP 3233 Configure an SAP on a v-VPLS ................................735
155.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................735
155.2 Prerequisite .............................................................................................735
155.3 Procedure ................................................................................................736
156 DLP 3234 Configure a VLAN and IP address for ISAM
management access...................................................................739
156.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................739
156.2 References ..............................................................................................740
156.3 Procedure ................................................................................................740
157 DLP 3235 Configure a security access policy to NT OBC
on IHub ........................................................................................743
157.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................743
157.1.1 A dedicated external management v-VPLS.............................................743
157.1.2 No dedicated external management v-VPLS ..........................................744
157.1.3 General CPU filter configuration..............................................................745
157.2 Restricting User Side Access to DPoE vCM ...........................................747
157.3 Procedure ................................................................................................748
158 DLP 3236 Configure the enhanced system clock
synchronization ..........................................................................759
158.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................759
158.1.1 Two external NTR sources ......................................................................759
158.1.2 SSMOut ...................................................................................................760
158.1.3 Hybrid SyncE...........................................................................................761
158.1.4 Time of Day .............................................................................................761
158.1.5 Factory defaults .......................................................................................761
158.1.6 Quality level .............................................................................................762
158.2 Configuration Considerations ..................................................................763
158.3 Procedure ................................................................................................764
159 DLP 3237 Manage BGP ..............................................................783
159.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................783
159.2 Procedure ................................................................................................783
160 DLP 3238 Configure the internal bidirectional speed for
the NT-LT link..............................................................................785
160.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................785
160.2 Procedure ................................................................................................786

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 19
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

161 DLP 3239 Manage LDP ...............................................................787


161.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................787
161.2 Limitations ...............................................................................................787
161.3 Procedure ................................................................................................787
162 DLP 3240 Configure VPLS .........................................................789
162.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................789
162.2 Procedure ................................................................................................789
163 DLP 3241 Configure an EPIPE...................................................795
163.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................795
163.2 Procedure ................................................................................................795
164 DLP 3242 Configure SDP ...........................................................797
164.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................797
164.2 Procedure ................................................................................................797
165 DLP 3243 Configure an SAP on a VPLS ...................................801
165.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................801
165.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................801
165.3 Procedure ................................................................................................802
166 DLP 3244 Configure an SAP on an EPIPE ................................805
166.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................805
166.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................805
166.3 Procedure ................................................................................................806
167 DLP 3245 Configure an SDP binding on a VPLS .....................807
167.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................807
167.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................807
167.3 Procedure ................................................................................................808
168 DLP 3246 Configure an SDP binding on an EPIPE ..................811
168.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................811
168.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................811
168.3 Procedure ................................................................................................812
169 DLP 3247 Configure a static LSP ..............................................815
169.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................815
169.2 Procedure ................................................................................................815
170 DLP 3248 Configure an endpoint on a VPLS ...........................819
170.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................819
170.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................819
170.3 Procedure ................................................................................................820
171 DLP 3249 Associate an SDP binding with an endpoint of
a VPLS .........................................................................................821
171.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................821
171.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................821
171.3 Procedure ................................................................................................822
172 DLP 3250 Configure an IP interface on top of a VPLS ............823
172.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................823
172.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................823

20 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

172.3 Procedure ................................................................................................823


173 DLP 3251 Configure an IP interface on the base router..........825
173.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................825
173.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................825
173.3 Procedure ................................................................................................826
174 DLP 3252 Configure a multicast VPLS .....................................829
174.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................829
174.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................829
174.3 Procedure ................................................................................................829
175 DLP 3253 Configure the third-party equipment
management port on the 7356 FD REM ....................................831
175.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................831
175.2 Procedure ................................................................................................832
176 DLP 3254 Configure L3 multicasting ........................................835
176.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................835
176.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................835
176.3 Procedure ................................................................................................835
177 DLP 3255 Configure a port on an Ethernet LT .........................839
177.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................839
177.2 Prerequisite .............................................................................................840
177.3 Procedure ................................................................................................840
178 DLP 3259 Create ONT profiles...................................................845
178.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................845
178.2 General....................................................................................................845
178.3 Procedure ................................................................................................846
179 DLP 3260 Configure GPON ........................................................849
179.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................849
179.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................849
179.3 Procedure ................................................................................................850
180 DLP 3261 Configure an ONT .....................................................853
180.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................853
180.2 General....................................................................................................853
180.3 Configuration considerations ...................................................................853
180.4 References ..............................................................................................854
180.5 Prerequisites............................................................................................854
180.6 Procedure ................................................................................................855
181 DLP 3262 Create a GPON xDSL user ........................................861
181.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................861
181.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................861
181.3 Procedure ................................................................................................862
182 DLP 3263 Create a GPON Ethernet user...................................867
182.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................867
182.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................867
182.3 Procedure ................................................................................................868

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 21
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

183 DLP 3264 Create a GPON CES pseudowire service ................871


183.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................871
183.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................871
183.3 Procedure ................................................................................................872
184 DLP 3265 Create a GPON VoIP service ....................................877
184.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................877
184.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................877
184.3 Procedure ................................................................................................878
185 DLP 3266 Create a GPON video service ...................................891
185.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................891
185.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................891
185.3 Procedure ................................................................................................891
186 DLP 3267 GPON performance monitoring ...............................893
186.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................893
186.2 General....................................................................................................893
186.3 Procedure ................................................................................................894
187 DLP 3268 GPON port mirroring .................................................907
187.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................907
187.2 Procedure ................................................................................................907
188 DLP 3269 Configure virtual noise values for ONT VDSL2 ......909
188.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................909
188.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................909
188.3 Procedure ................................................................................................909
189 DLP 3270 Configure spanning tree on the NELT-B LT............913
189.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................913
189.2 Prerequisite .............................................................................................913
189.3 Procedure ................................................................................................914
190 DLP 3271 Configure link aggregation on the NELT-B LT .......917
190.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................917
190.2 General....................................................................................................917
190.3 Prerequisite .............................................................................................918
190.4 Procedure ................................................................................................918
191 DLP 3272 Configure VDSL2 DPBO parameters for ONT
VDSL2 ..........................................................................................921
191.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................921
191.2 Procedure ................................................................................................921
192 DLP 3273 External packet forwarding ......................................923
192.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................923
192.2 General....................................................................................................923
192.2.1 Characteristics.........................................................................................923
192.3 Restrictions..............................................................................................924
192.4 Subtending ISAM.....................................................................................924
192.5 Prerequisites............................................................................................924
192.6 Procedure ................................................................................................925

22 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

193 DLP 3274 Create a GPON virtual Ethernet interface point


(VEIP) ...........................................................................................927
193.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................927
193.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................927
193.3 Procedure ................................................................................................927
194 DLP 3275 Create a GPON VoIP service using an IP host........929
194.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................929
194.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................929
194.3 Procedure ................................................................................................930
195 DLP 3276 Manage PON troubleshooting counters on the
LT .................................................................................................945
195.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................945
195.2 Procedure ................................................................................................945
196 DLP 3279 Create a multicast VLAN translation entry..............947
196.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................947
196.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................947
196.3 Procedure ................................................................................................947
197 DLP 3280 Configure a network VLAN on the LT for S+C-
iBridge .........................................................................................949
197.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................949
197.2 Procedure ................................................................................................951
198 DLP 3281 Configure VEIP-style VoIP service...........................953
198.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................953
198.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................953
198.3 Procedure ................................................................................................953
199 DLP 3282 Configure the fairness SLA on the NELT-B LT .......955
199.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................955
199.2 Prerequisite .............................................................................................956
199.3 Procedure ................................................................................................956
200 DLP 3283 Troubleshooting congestion on the NELT-B LT.....957
200.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................957
200.2 Procedure ................................................................................................958
201 DLP 3284 Enable the hairpinning feature for voice
services .......................................................................................961
201.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................961
201.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................961
201.3 Procedure ................................................................................................961
202 DLP 3285 Configure SNTP proxy on a VLAN ...........................963
202.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................963
202.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................963
202.3 Procedure ................................................................................................963
203 DLP 3286 Configure upstream queue at the ONT....................965
203.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................965
203.2 Procedure ................................................................................................965

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 23
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

204 DLP 3287 Configure a VLAN on the LT for S-iBridge ..............967


204.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................967
204.2 Procedure ................................................................................................968
205 DLP 3288 Configure an S+C-iBridge on the PON LT...............969
205.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................969
205.2 Prerequisite .............................................................................................969
205.3 Procedure ................................................................................................970
206 DLP 3289 Configure downstream remote queue at the
ONT ..............................................................................................973
206.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................973
206.2 Procedure ................................................................................................973
207 DLP 3290 Configure VLAN port level upstream queues on
GPON UNI ....................................................................................975
207.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................975
207.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................975
207.3 Procedure ................................................................................................975
208 DLP 3293 Delete a vectoring control entity profile ..................977
208.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................977
208.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................977
208.3 Procedure ................................................................................................977
209 DLP 3294 Configure or modify the mapping between the
VP board and the SLV LT boards..............................................981
209.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................981
209.2 Prerequisites............................................................................................981
209.3 Procedure ................................................................................................982
210 DLP 3299 Set and view notification codes for alarm and
event conditions .........................................................................985
210.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................985
211 DLP 3300 Set RSSI thresholds for EPON alarm
conditions....................................................................................987
211.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................987
211.2 General....................................................................................................987
211.3 Configuration considerations ...................................................................987
211.4 Prerequisites............................................................................................988
211.5 Procedure ................................................................................................989
212 DLP 3301 Monitor current EPON alarms ..................................991
212.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................991
212.2 General....................................................................................................991
213 DLP 3302 Download software to an ONT in planned
mode (EPON)...............................................................................993
213.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................993
213.2 General....................................................................................................993
213.2.1 References ..............................................................................................993
213.3 Configuration considerations ...................................................................993

24 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

213.3.1 Upgrading the ONT software in planned mode .......................................993


213.3.2 Hardware considerations.........................................................................994
213.3.3 Restrictions..............................................................................................994
213.4 Prerequisites............................................................................................994
213.5 Procedure ................................................................................................995
214 DLP 3303 Download software to an ONT in automatic
mode (EPON)...............................................................................997
214.1 Purpose ...................................................................................................997
214.2 General....................................................................................................997
214.2.1 References ..............................................................................................997
214.3 Configuration considerations ...................................................................997
214.3.1 Hardware considerations.........................................................................997
214.3.2 Restrictions..............................................................................................998
214.4 Prerequisites............................................................................................998
214.5 Procedure ................................................................................................998
215 DLP 3304 Download software to an ONT in manual mode
(EPON) .......................................................................................1001
215.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1001
215.2 General..................................................................................................1001
215.2.1 References ............................................................................................1001
215.3 Configuration considerations .................................................................1001
215.3.1 Hardware considerations.......................................................................1001
215.3.2 Restrictions............................................................................................1002
215.4 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1002
215.5 Procedure ..............................................................................................1002
216 DLP 3305 Maintain the ONT software version control
table ...........................................................................................1007
216.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1007
216.2 General..................................................................................................1007
216.2.1 References ............................................................................................1007
216.3 Configuration considerations .................................................................1007
216.3.1 File system on flash disk .......................................................................1008
216.3.2 Hardware considerations.......................................................................1008
216.3.3 Restrictions............................................................................................1009
216.4 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1009
216.5 Procedure ..............................................................................................1009
217 DLP 3306 Retrieve ONT software download status...............1013
217.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1013
217.2 Procedure ..............................................................................................1013
218 DLP 3307 Configure traffic profiles for ONT UNIs .................1015
218.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1015
218.2 General..................................................................................................1015
218.3 Configuration considerations .................................................................1015
218.4 Procedure ..............................................................................................1016
219 DLP 3308 Retrieve default queue profile ................................1019
219.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1019

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 25
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

219.2 General..................................................................................................1019
219.3 Configuration considerations .................................................................1019
219.3.1 Restrictions............................................................................................1019
219.4 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1019
219.5 Procedure ..............................................................................................1019
220 DLP 3309 Configure an EPON .................................................1021
220.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1021
220.2 General..................................................................................................1021
220.3 Configuration considerations .................................................................1021
220.3.1 Authentication modes ............................................................................1021
220.4 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1022
220.5 Procedure ..............................................................................................1023
221 DLP 3310 Configure an ONT for an EPON system ................1025
221.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1025
221.2 General..................................................................................................1025
221.3 Configuration considerations .................................................................1025
221.3.1 Configuring an ONT for IGMP ...............................................................1026
221.3.2 Configuring the ONT for software downloading.....................................1026
221.3.3 Configuring the ONU ID method............................................................1026
221.3.4 Configuring the ONT for authentication .................................................1027
221.3.5 Hardware considerations.......................................................................1027
221.3.6 Restrictions............................................................................................1027
221.4 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1028
221.5 Procedure ..............................................................................................1028
222 DLP 3311 Modify ONT management channels.......................1033
222.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1033
222.2 General..................................................................................................1033
222.3 Configuration considerations .................................................................1033
222.3.1 Hardware considerations.......................................................................1033
222.3.2 Restrictions............................................................................................1033
222.4 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1034
222.5 Procedure ..............................................................................................1034
223 DLP 3312 Modify the LLID for an ONT ....................................1037
223.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1037
223.2 General..................................................................................................1037
223.3 Configuration considerations .................................................................1037
223.3.1 Enabling triple churning .........................................................................1037
223.3.2 Specifying the priority queue profile ......................................................1037
223.3.3 Hardware considerations.......................................................................1038
223.3.4 Restrictions............................................................................................1038
223.4 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1038
223.5 Procedure ..............................................................................................1038
224 DLP 3313 Configure an Ethernet UNI......................................1041
224.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1041
224.2 General..................................................................................................1041
224.3 Configuration considerations .................................................................1041
224.3.1 Relationships with other entities ............................................................1042

26 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

224.3.2 Hardware considerations.......................................................................1043


224.3.3 Restrictions............................................................................................1043
224.4 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1044
224.5 Procedure ..............................................................................................1045
225 DLP 3314 Configure an ONT Ethernet UNI for VLAN
trunk, translation, or aggregation forwarding........................1049
225.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1049
225.2 General..................................................................................................1049
225.3 Configuration considerations .................................................................1049
225.3.1 Hardware considerations.......................................................................1049
225.3.2 Restrictions............................................................................................1050
225.4 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1050
225.5 Procedure ..............................................................................................1050
226 DLP 3315 Configure multicast VLANs for an ONT
Ethernet UNI ..............................................................................1053
226.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1053
226.2 General..................................................................................................1053
226.3 Configuration considerations .................................................................1053
226.3.1 Hardware considerations.......................................................................1053
226.3.2 Restrictions............................................................................................1053
226.4 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1054
226.5 Procedure ..............................................................................................1054
227 DLP 3316 Apply traffic filter to ONT Ethernet UNI .................1057
227.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1057
227.2 General..................................................................................................1057
227.3 Configuration considerations .................................................................1057
227.3.1 Relationships with other entities ............................................................1057
227.3.2 Hardware considerations.......................................................................1058
227.3.3 Restrictions............................................................................................1058
227.4 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1058
227.5 Procedure ..............................................................................................1059
228 DLP 3317 Configure a VoIP common table for an EPON
ONT ............................................................................................1061
228.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1061
228.2 General..................................................................................................1061
228.3 Configuration considerations .................................................................1061
228.3.1 Restrictions............................................................................................1062
228.4 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1062
228.5 Procedure ..............................................................................................1062
229 DLP 3318 Configure a digit map profile for a SIP user
agent ..........................................................................................1065
229.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1065
229.2 General..................................................................................................1065
229.3 Configuration considerations .................................................................1065
229.3.1 Restrictions............................................................................................1065
229.4 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1065

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 27
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

229.5 Procedure ..............................................................................................1066


230 DLP 3319 Configure the VoIP SIP user agent for EPON
ONTs ..........................................................................................1069
230.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1069
230.2 General..................................................................................................1069
230.3 Configuration considerations .................................................................1070
230.4 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1070
230.5 Procedure ..............................................................................................1071
231 DLP 3320 Configure VoIP H.248 media gateway table for
EPON ONTs ...............................................................................1073
231.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1073
231.2 General..................................................................................................1073
231.3 Configuration considerations .................................................................1073
231.3.1 Restrictions............................................................................................1073
231.4 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1074
231.5 Procedure ..............................................................................................1074
232 DLP 3321 Configure VoIP POTS line for EPON ONTs ...........1077
232.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1077
232.2 General..................................................................................................1077
232.3 Configuration considerations .................................................................1077
232.3.1 Restrictions............................................................................................1078
232.4 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1078
232.5 Procedure ..............................................................................................1078
233 DLP 3322 Retrieve voice operation information for EPON
ONTs ..........................................................................................1081
233.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1081
233.2 General..................................................................................................1081
234 DLP 3323 Enable and retrieve EPON PM counters................1083
234.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1083
234.2 General..................................................................................................1083
234.3 Configuration considerations .................................................................1083
234.3.1 PM Counters..........................................................................................1084
234.4 Procedure ..............................................................................................1084
235 DLP 3324 Report optical status between EPON OLT and
EPON ONT .................................................................................1087
235.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1087
235.2 General..................................................................................................1087
235.3 Configuration considerations .................................................................1087
235.3.1 Hardware considerations.......................................................................1087
235.4 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1088
235.5 Procedure ..............................................................................................1088
236 DLP 3325 Configure PON port protection ..............................1089
236.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1089
236.2 General..................................................................................................1089
236.3 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1090

28 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

236.4 Procedure ..............................................................................................1090


237 DLP 3326 Create a GPON HPNA service ................................1093
237.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1093
237.2 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1093
237.3 Procedure ..............................................................................................1093
238 DLP 3327 Create a TR-069 management server ....................1095
238.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1095
238.2 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1095
238.3 Procedure ..............................................................................................1095
239 DLP 3328 Create a GPON SNMP service ................................1099
239.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1099
239.2 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1099
239.3 Procedure ..............................................................................................1100
240 DLP 3329 Configure an APIPE service ...................................1103
240.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1103
240.2 Prerequisite ...........................................................................................1103
240.3 Procedure ..............................................................................................1104
241 DLP 3331 Create a multicast PON VLAN translation entry ...1109
241.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1109
241.2 Configuration considerations .................................................................1109
241.2.1 Hardware considerations.......................................................................1109
241.2.2 Restrictions............................................................................................1109
241.3 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1109
241.4 Procedure ..............................................................................................1110
242 DLP 3332 Set RSSI thresholds on NT, NTIO, and LT PON
SFP interfaces...........................................................................1111
242.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1111
242.2 General..................................................................................................1111
242.3 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1111
242.4 Procedure ..............................................................................................1112
243 DLP 3333 Retrieve SFP/XFP RSSI configuration data...........1117
243.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1117
243.2 General..................................................................................................1117
243.3 Procedure ..............................................................................................1117
244 DLP 3334 Enable an application intelligence platform on
the ISAM ....................................................................................1119
244.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1119
244.2 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1119
244.3 Procedure ..............................................................................................1119
245 DLP 3335 Download and install an application on the AI
platform .....................................................................................1121
245.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1121
245.2 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1121
245.3 Procedure ..............................................................................................1121

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 29
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

246 DLP 3337 Configure the BCMP client (EPON)........................1125


246.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1125
246.2 General..................................................................................................1125
246.3 Procedure ..............................................................................................1125
247 DLP 3338 Configure RMS global parameters (EPON) ...........1127
247.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1127
247.2 General..................................................................................................1127
247.3 Configuration considerations .................................................................1127
247.4 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1127
247.5 Procedure ..............................................................................................1128
248 DLP 3339 Configure dot1q Ethertype per v-VPLS .................1129
248.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1129
248.2 General..................................................................................................1129
248.3 Restrictions............................................................................................1129
248.4 Procedure ..............................................................................................1129
249 DLP 3341 Perform a PPPoE emulation test on a UNI port ....1133
249.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1133
249.2 Procedure ..............................................................................................1133
250 DLP 3342 Configure E1/T1/DS1 service with 2E1/T1 SFP .....1135
250.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1135
250.2 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1135
250.3 Procedure ..............................................................................................1136
251 DLP 3343 Configure E1 service diagnostics using 2E1
SFP.............................................................................................1139
251.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1139
251.2 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1139
251.3 Procedure ..............................................................................................1140
252 DLP 3344 Configure a DPoE service using CTC, TK, or
DPoE links to OAM (EPON)......................................................1143
252.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1143
252.2 General..................................................................................................1143
252.3 Configuration considerations .................................................................1143
252.3.1 PB encapsulation mode without TPID translation .................................1144
252.3.2 PB transport mode.................................................................................1144
252.3.3 PB transport without TPID translation ...................................................1145
252.3.4 IP HSD mode.........................................................................................1146
252.4 Configuration scenarios.........................................................................1146
252.4.1 PB encapsulation mode configuration scenario ....................................1146
252.4.2 PB transport mode configuration scenario ............................................1147
252.4.3 IP HSD mode configuration scenario ....................................................1147
252.5 Procedures ............................................................................................1147
253 DLP 3345 Display current alarm statistics using DPoE
links to OAM (EPON) ................................................................1155
253.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1155
253.2 General..................................................................................................1155

30 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

253.3 Configuration considerations .................................................................1155


253.4 Procedure ..............................................................................................1155
254 DLP 3346 Enable VP-LT auto-discovery for system level
vectoring....................................................................................1157
254.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1157
254.2 General..................................................................................................1157
254.3 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1157
254.4 Procedure ..............................................................................................1158
255 DLP 3348 Disable VP-LT auto-discovery for single host
system level vectoring .............................................................1161
255.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1161
255.2 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1161
255.3 Procedure ..............................................................................................1161
256 DLP 3349 Troubleshooting counters on the REM
expansion link...........................................................................1163
256.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1163
256.2 Procedure ..............................................................................................1163
257 DLP 3350 Switch users from VDSL2 non-vectored to
VDSL2 vectored ........................................................................1165
257.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1165
257.2 Procedure ..............................................................................................1165
258 DLP 3351 Create a native Ethernet/NNI user and add this
user to a VLAN on the LT .........................................................1167
258.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1167
258.2 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1168
258.3 Procedure ..............................................................................................1168
259 DLP 3353 Configure DPoE ISAM management access .........1173
259.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1173
259.2 General..................................................................................................1173
259.2.1 Model 1..................................................................................................1173
259.2.2 Model 2..................................................................................................1174
259.2.3 References ............................................................................................1175
259.3 Configuration considerations .................................................................1175
259.3.1 Hardware considerations.......................................................................1175
259.3.2 Restrictions............................................................................................1176
259.4 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1176
259.5 Procedure ..............................................................................................1177
260 DLP 3354 Configure DPoE general parameters.....................1185
260.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1185
260.2 General..................................................................................................1185
260.2.1 References ............................................................................................1185
260.3 Configuration considerations .................................................................1185
260.3.1 Hardware considerations.......................................................................1185
260.3.2 Restrictions............................................................................................1186
260.4 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1186

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 31
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

260.5 Procedure ..............................................................................................1186


261 DLP 3355 Configure a DPoE MEF service ..............................1189
261.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1189
261.2 General..................................................................................................1189
261.2.1 References ............................................................................................1189
261.3 Configuration considerations .................................................................1189
261.3.1 Hardware considerations.......................................................................1190
261.3.2 Restrictions............................................................................................1190
261.4 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1190
261.5 Procedure ..............................................................................................1190
262 DLP 3356 Configure a DPoE IP (HSD) service .......................1193
262.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1193
262.2 General..................................................................................................1193
262.2.1 References ............................................................................................1193
262.3 Configuration considerations .................................................................1194
262.3.1 Hardware considerations.......................................................................1194
262.3.2 Restrictions............................................................................................1194
262.4 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1194
262.5 Procedure ..............................................................................................1194
263 DLP 3357 GPON ONT loop detection ......................................1199
263.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1199
263.2 Procedure ..............................................................................................1199
264 DLP 3359 Configure a static cable modem service ...............1201
264.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1201
264.2 General..................................................................................................1201
264.2.1 References ............................................................................................1203
264.3 Configuration considerations .................................................................1204
264.3.1 Hardware considerations.......................................................................1204
264.3.2 Restrictions............................................................................................1204
264.4 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1204
264.5 Procedure ..............................................................................................1204
265 DLP 3360 Configure DPoE authentication parameters .........1209
265.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1209
265.2 General..................................................................................................1209
265.2.1 References ............................................................................................1209
265.3 Configuration considerations .................................................................1209
265.3.1 Hardware considerations.......................................................................1209
265.3.2 Restrictions............................................................................................1210
265.4 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1210
265.5 Procedure ..............................................................................................1210
266 DLP 3361 Ping from an ONT for VoIP .....................................1213
266.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1213
266.2 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1213
266.3 Procedure ..............................................................................................1214
267 DLP 3362 Create a GPON MoCA service ................................1215
267.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1215

32 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

267.2 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1215
267.3 Procedure ..............................................................................................1215
268 DLP 3363 Configure IP(HSD) serving group selection per
SVLAN........................................................................................1217
268.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1217
268.2 General..................................................................................................1217
268.2.1 References ............................................................................................1218
268.3 Configuration considerations .................................................................1219
268.3.1 Hardware considerations.......................................................................1219
268.3.2 Restrictions............................................................................................1219
268.4 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1219
268.5 Procedure ..............................................................................................1220
269 DLP 3364 Configure IP(HSD) ARP downstream flooding .....1225
269.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1225
269.2 General..................................................................................................1225
269.2.1 References ............................................................................................1225
269.3 Configuration considerations .................................................................1225
269.3.1 Hardware considerations.......................................................................1226
269.3.2 Restrictions............................................................................................1226
269.4 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1226
269.5 Procedure ..............................................................................................1226
270 DLP 3365 Controlling broadcast and secure forwarding
on an iBridge and Vlan CC.......................................................1227
270.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1227
270.2 General..................................................................................................1227
270.3 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1228
270.4 Procedure ..............................................................................................1229
271 DLP 3366 Configure DPoE system SNMP, CMTS event
and trap and management .......................................................1235
271.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1235
271.2 General..................................................................................................1235
271.2.1 References ............................................................................................1236
271.3 Configuration considerations .................................................................1236
271.3.1 Hardware considerations.......................................................................1236
271.3.2 Restrictions............................................................................................1236
271.4 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1236
271.5 Procedure ..............................................................................................1237
272 DLP 3367 Configure DPoE system vCM SNMP, trap and
event management ...................................................................1243
272.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1243
272.2 General..................................................................................................1243
272.2.1 References ............................................................................................1243
272.3 Configuration considerations .................................................................1243
272.3.1 Hardware considerations.......................................................................1243
272.3.2 Restrictions............................................................................................1244
272.4 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1244

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 33
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

272.5 Procedure ..............................................................................................1244


273 DLP 3369 Manage P-bit troubleshooting counters on the
LT ...............................................................................................1249
273.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1249
273.2 References ............................................................................................1249
273.3 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1249
273.4 Procedure ..............................................................................................1249
274 DLP 3372 Configure a DPoE DHCPv6 service .......................1251
274.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1251
274.1.1 References ............................................................................................1251
274.2 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1251
274.3 Procedure ..............................................................................................1251
275 DLP 3373 Configure QoS for MEF service over DPoE
network ......................................................................................1255
275.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1255
275.2 General..................................................................................................1255
275.2.1 References ............................................................................................1257
275.3 Hardware Considerations ......................................................................1257
275.4 Restrictions............................................................................................1257
275.5 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1257
275.6 Procedure ..............................................................................................1257
276 DLP 3374 Configure an E-Line service over DPoE
network ......................................................................................1259
276.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1259
276.2 General..................................................................................................1259
276.2.1 References ............................................................................................1261
276.3 Configuration Considerations ................................................................1261
276.4 Hardware Considerations ......................................................................1261
276.5 Restrictions............................................................................................1261
276.6 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1261
276.7 Procedure ..............................................................................................1262
277 DLP 3375 Configure an E-LAN service over DPoE
network ......................................................................................1265
277.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1265
277.2 General..................................................................................................1265
277.2.1 References ............................................................................................1267
277.3 Configuration Considerations ................................................................1267
277.4 Hardware Considerations ......................................................................1267
277.5 Restrictions............................................................................................1267
277.6 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1267
277.7 Procedure ..............................................................................................1267
278 DLP 3376 Upgrade an E-LAN service over DPoE network ...1271
278.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1271
278.2 General..................................................................................................1271
278.2.1 References ............................................................................................1272
278.3 Configuration Considerations ................................................................1272

34 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

278.4 Hardware Considerations ......................................................................1272


278.5 Restrictions............................................................................................1272
278.6 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1272
278.7 Procedure ..............................................................................................1273
279 DLP 3381 Configure a channel group and a subchannel
group in the OLT.......................................................................1275
279.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1275
279.2 General..................................................................................................1275
279.2.1 References ............................................................................................1276
279.3 Procedure ..............................................................................................1276
280 DLP 3382 Configure a channel pair ........................................1277
280.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1277
280.2 General..................................................................................................1277
280.2.1 References ............................................................................................1280
280.3 Procedure ..............................................................................................1280
281 DLP 3383 Allocate a channel pair to a channel group and
a subchannel group..................................................................1283
281.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1283
281.2 General..................................................................................................1283
281.2.1 References ............................................................................................1283
281.3 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1283
281.4 Procedure ..............................................................................................1284
282 DLP 3384 Configure L2 DHCP relay........................................1285
282.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1285
282.2 Behavior of the line ID ...........................................................................1285
282.3 Behavior of the relay ID .........................................................................1285
282.4 Behavior of the access loop encapsulation ...........................................1286
282.5 Prerequisite ...........................................................................................1286
282.6 Procedure ..............................................................................................1286
283 DLP 3385 Configure TACACs+ ................................................1289
283.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1289
283.2 General..................................................................................................1289
283.3 Prerequisite ...........................................................................................1289
283.4 References ............................................................................................1289
283.5 Procedure ..............................................................................................1290
284 DLP 3387 Configure NG-PON2 performance monitoring......1293
284.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1293
284.2 General..................................................................................................1293
284.3 Procedure ..............................................................................................1293
285 DLP 3400 Configure GPON VDSL2 custom PSD shape ........1299
285.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1299
285.2 General..................................................................................................1299
285.3 Configuration considerations .................................................................1299
285.4 Hardware Considerations ......................................................................1299
285.5 References ............................................................................................1299
285.6 Restrictions............................................................................................1299

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 35
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

285.7 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1300
285.8 Procedure ..............................................................................................1300
286 DLP 3391 Configure GPON/NG-PON2 uplink connectivity
fault management .....................................................................1303
286.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1303
286.2 General..................................................................................................1303
286.3 Configuration considerations .................................................................1307
286.4 Hardware considerations.......................................................................1308
286.5 References ............................................................................................1309
286.6 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1309
286.7 Procedure ..............................................................................................1309
287 DLP 3401 Configure DPoE turbo mode ..................................1325
287.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1325
287.2 General..................................................................................................1325
287.3 Configuration considerations .................................................................1325
287.4 Hardware Considerations ......................................................................1325
287.5 References ............................................................................................1326
287.6 Restrictions............................................................................................1326
287.7 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1326
287.8 Procedure ..............................................................................................1326
288 DLP 3402 Configure system scaling mode ............................1329
288.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1329
288.2 General..................................................................................................1329
288.3 References ............................................................................................1329
288.4 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1329
288.5 Procedure ..............................................................................................1330
289 DLP 3404 Configure VLAN TPID..............................................1331
289.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1331
289.2 General..................................................................................................1331
289.3 References ............................................................................................1331
289.4 Restrictions............................................................................................1331
289.5 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1331
289.6 Procedure ..............................................................................................1332
290 DLP 3405 Configure DPoE lease query ..................................1333
290.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1333
290.2 General..................................................................................................1333
290.3 References ............................................................................................1333
290.4 Configuration considerations .................................................................1333
290.5 Hardware considerations.......................................................................1333
290.6 Restrictions............................................................................................1334
290.7 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1334
290.8 Procedure ..............................................................................................1334
291 DLP 3408 Configure L2 DHCPv6 relay ....................................1337
291.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1337
291.2 Prerequisite ...........................................................................................1337
291.3 Procedure ..............................................................................................1337

36 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

292 DLP 3410 Configure ONT system parameters .......................1339


292.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1339
292.2 General..................................................................................................1339
292.3 References ............................................................................................1339
292.4 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1339
292.5 Procedure ..............................................................................................1339
293 DLP 3411 Configure a NAPT service ......................................1341
293.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1341
293.2 General..................................................................................................1341
293.3 References ............................................................................................1341
293.4 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1341
293.5 Procedure ..............................................................................................1342
294 DLP 3412 Enable or disable zero touch provisioning ...........1343
294.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1343
294.2 General..................................................................................................1343
294.3 Hardware considerations.......................................................................1343
294.4 References ............................................................................................1344
294.5 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1344
294.6 Procedure ..............................................................................................1344
295 DLP 3413 Configure maximum ranging ONT number ...........1345
295.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1345
295.2 General..................................................................................................1345
295.3 Hardware considerations.......................................................................1345
295.4 References ............................................................................................1345
295.5 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1345
295.6 Procedure ..............................................................................................1345
296 DLP 3414 Configure maximum TCONTS per frame...............1347
296.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1347
296.2 General..................................................................................................1347
296.3 Hardware considerations.......................................................................1347
296.4 References ............................................................................................1347
296.5 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1347
296.6 Procedure ..............................................................................................1347
297 DLP 3415 Clear alarm of ranging number mismatch ............1349
297.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1349
297.2 General..................................................................................................1349
297.3 Hardware considerations.......................................................................1349
297.4 References ............................................................................................1349
297.5 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1349
297.6 Procedure ..............................................................................................1349
298 DLP 3416 Review trap and log bandwidth per
PON/channel-pair changes ......................................................1351
298.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1351
298.2 General..................................................................................................1351
298.3 Hardware considerations.......................................................................1351
298.4 References ............................................................................................1351

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 37
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

298.5 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1351
298.6 Procedure ..............................................................................................1352
299 DLP 3417 Display QoS interface bandwidth ..........................1353
299.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1353
299.2 General..................................................................................................1353
299.3 Hardware considerations.......................................................................1353
299.4 References ............................................................................................1353
299.5 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1353
299.6 Procedure ..............................................................................................1354
300 DLP 3418 Manage the LSA SIP server ....................................1355
300.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1355
300.2 General..................................................................................................1355
300.2.1 Emergency call service..........................................................................1357
300.3 Configuration considerations .................................................................1357
300.4 Prerequisite ...........................................................................................1358
300.5 Procedure ..............................................................................................1359
301 DLP 3424 Configure an IPDR service .....................................1363
301.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1363
301.2 General..................................................................................................1363
301.3 Configuration considerations .................................................................1363
301.4 References ............................................................................................1363
301.5 Prerequisite ...........................................................................................1363
301.6 Procedure ..............................................................................................1364
302 DLP 3425 Configure a shared SIP termination subscriber
line..............................................................................................1365
302.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1365
302.2 General..................................................................................................1365
302.3 Restrictions............................................................................................1365
302.4 References ............................................................................................1366
302.5 Prerequisite ...........................................................................................1366
302.6 Configuration considerations .................................................................1366
302.7 Procedure ..............................................................................................1367
303 DLP 3426 Configure a DPoE multicast service......................1369
303.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1369
303.2 References ............................................................................................1369
303.3 Prerequisite ...........................................................................................1369
303.4 Procedure ..............................................................................................1369
304 DLP 3428 Configure a DPoE platform for MEF service
auto-provision...........................................................................1373
304.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1373
304.2 General..................................................................................................1373
304.3 Configuration considerations .................................................................1374
304.4 References ............................................................................................1374
304.5 Prerequisite ...........................................................................................1374
304.6 Procedure ..............................................................................................1374

38 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

305 DLP 3430 Configure a port on a VDSL LT ..............................1377


305.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1377
305.2 Prerequisite ...........................................................................................1378
305.3 Procedure ..............................................................................................1378
306 DLP 3431 Configure RADIUS server in Linux ........................1379
306.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1379
306.2 General..................................................................................................1379
306.3 Configuration considerations .................................................................1379
306.4 References ............................................................................................1379
306.5 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1379
306.6 Procedure ..............................................................................................1380
307 DLP 3432 Configure a shared subscriber line for 2 H.248
POTS terminations ...................................................................1381
307.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1381
307.2 General..................................................................................................1381
307.2.1 Termination ID .......................................................................................1382
307.3 Restrictions............................................................................................1383
307.4 References ............................................................................................1383
307.5 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1384
307.6 Procedure ..............................................................................................1384
Routine Task Procedure (RTP)
308 RTP 1103 Retrieve board temperature....................................1389
308.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1389
308.2 Procedure ..............................................................................................1389
309 RTP 3100 Backup the configuration .......................................1391
309.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1391
309.2 General..................................................................................................1391
309.3 Prerequisite ...........................................................................................1392
309.4 Procedure ..............................................................................................1393
310 RTP 3101 Restore the configuration .......................................1395
310.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1395
310.2 Procedure ..............................................................................................1395
311 RTP 3102 Retrieve remote inventory ......................................1397
311.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1397
311.2 Procedure ..............................................................................................1397
312 RTP 3104 Backup the IHub and DPoE database....................1399
312.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1399
312.2 General..................................................................................................1399
312.3 References ............................................................................................1400
312.4 Prerequisite ...........................................................................................1400
312.5 Procedure ..............................................................................................1400
313 RTP 3105 Restore the IHub and DPoE database ...................1403
313.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1403
313.2 General..................................................................................................1403

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 39
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

313.3 References ............................................................................................1404


313.4 Prerequisite ...........................................................................................1404
313.5 Procedure ..............................................................................................1404
314 RTP 3106 Backup an MSO DPoE configuration in CLI text
format file ..................................................................................1407
314.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1407
314.2 General..................................................................................................1407
314.3 References ............................................................................................1408
314.4 Prerequisite ...........................................................................................1408
314.5 Procedure ..............................................................................................1409
315 RTP 3107 Restore an MSO DPoE configuration in CLI text
format file ..................................................................................1411
315.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1411
315.2 General..................................................................................................1411
315.3 References ............................................................................................1412
315.4 Prerequisite ...........................................................................................1412
315.5 Procedure ..............................................................................................1412
316 RTP 3108 Detect DPoE rogue ONUs .......................................1415
316.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1415
316.2 General..................................................................................................1415
316.3 References ............................................................................................1416
316.4 Prerequisite ...........................................................................................1416
316.5 Hardware considerations.......................................................................1416
316.6 Procedure ..............................................................................................1416
Trouble Analysis Procedure (TAP)
317 TAP 1101 F5 loopback test ......................................................1421
317.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1421
317.2 Procedure ..............................................................................................1421
318 TAP 1103 Single ended line testing ........................................1423
318.1 General Description...............................................................................1423
319 TAP 1105 Dual-ended line testing ...........................................1425
319.1 General Description...............................................................................1425
319.2 Purpose .................................................................................................1425
319.3 Procedure ..............................................................................................1425
320 TAP 1107 MELT.........................................................................1427
320.1 Introduction............................................................................................1427
320.1.1 Foreign DC voltage................................................................................1427
320.1.2 Foreign AC voltage................................................................................1428
320.1.3 Insulating resistance..............................................................................1428
320.1.4 Capacitance...........................................................................................1429
320.1.5 Cable pair identification .........................................................................1429
320.1.6 Conductance .........................................................................................1429
320.1.7 Susceptance..........................................................................................1430
320.1.8 Hazardous voltage.................................................................................1430
320.1.9 Zener resistance....................................................................................1430

40 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

320.1.10 Zener voltage.........................................................................................1430


320.1.11 Electronic ringer detection (ETSI signature)..........................................1431
320.1.12 Receiver off-hook detection...................................................................1431
320.1.13 Passive test terminator (PPA) detection................................................1431
320.1.14 End device with significant self-capacitance detection..........................1433
320.1.15 Galvanic signature detection .................................................................1433
320.2 MELT .....................................................................................................1434
320.2.1 MELT network architecture....................................................................1435
320.2.2 Supported MELT tests...........................................................................1435
320.2.3 MELT test results reporting ...................................................................1436
320.2.4 Validity bitmap .......................................................................................1438
320.2.5 Busy port table.......................................................................................1439
320.2.6 Vendor info table ...................................................................................1439
320.2.7 Exception textual description.................................................................1439
320.2.8 Newly introduced MELT test (sub-)types / features...............................1440
320.2.9 Group test option ...................................................................................1442
320.2.10 Multiple electric tests allowed within the same MELT test session .......1446
320.2.11 Unit definition.........................................................................................1446
320.2.12 Susceptance..........................................................................................1447
320.2.13 Hazardous voltage.................................................................................1447
320.2.14 ROH detection .......................................................................................1447
320.2.15 Zener resistance and zener voltage ......................................................1448
320.2.16 Selftest and reset...................................................................................1448
320.2.17 Cable pair identification .........................................................................1448
320.2.18 Busy port - busy reason.........................................................................1449
320.2.19 MELT test elapse time...........................................................................1450
320.2.20 Session management............................................................................1450
320.2.21 Session provisioning..............................................................................1454
320.2.22 Parameter provisioning..........................................................................1459
320.2.23 Line provisioning....................................................................................1462
320.2.24 Line status report...................................................................................1463
320.2.25 MELT report...........................................................................................1468
320.2.26 Show busy port information ...................................................................1472
320.2.27 Show vendor information.......................................................................1473
320.2.28 Subscriber line management.................................................................1473
320.2.29 MELT test conditions .............................................................................1473
320.3 MELT procedures ..................................................................................1474
320.3.1 Legacy group test ..................................................................................1474
320.3.2 Legacy group test with extended reporting............................................1475
320.3.3 MELT collective group test ....................................................................1477
320.3.4 Foreign_AC_voltage test .......................................................................1478
320.3.5 Foreign_DC_voltage test.......................................................................1479
320.3.6 Resistance test ......................................................................................1480
320.3.7 Capacitance test....................................................................................1481
320.3.8 Cable pair identification test ..................................................................1482
320.3.9 ETSI signature test ................................................................................1483
320.3.10 Conductance test...................................................................................1484
320.3.11 Susceptance test ...................................................................................1485
320.3.12 Hazardous voltage test..........................................................................1486

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 41
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

320.3.13 Galvanic signature detection .................................................................1487


320.3.14 End device capacitance detection .........................................................1488
320.3.15 PPA detection........................................................................................1489
320.3.16 ROH detection .......................................................................................1490
320.3.17 Zener resistance and voltage ................................................................1491
320.3.18 Selftest...................................................................................................1492
320.3.19 Reset .....................................................................................................1492
320.3.20 MELT collective group test + hazardous test ........................................1492
320.4 Additional procedures............................................................................1495
320.4.1 Show busy port information ...................................................................1495
320.4.2 Show vendor information.......................................................................1495
321 TAP 1112 Enable/disable EFM OAM remote loopback..........1497
321.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1497
321.2 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1497
321.3 References ............................................................................................1497
321.4 Procedure ..............................................................................................1497
322 TAP 3102 Equipment repair .....................................................1499
322.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1499
322.2 Procedure ..............................................................................................1499
323 TAP 3104 Fault isolation and troubleshooting ......................1501
323.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1501
324 TAP 3108 Integrated NBLT for MEGACO termination ...........1503
324.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1503
324.2 Contents ................................................................................................1503
324.3 The access node model ........................................................................1503
324.4 The line model .......................................................................................1504
324.5 The Phone Model ..................................................................................1505
324.6 Two-ports versus three-ports network measurements ..........................1506
324.7 H.248 BASED ISAM-V ACCESS NODE: General ................................1507
324.8 Session Management............................................................................1514
324.9 Session Provisioning .............................................................................1515
324.10 Parameter Provisioning .........................................................................1522
324.11 Line Provisioning ...................................................................................1527
324.12 Line Status Report.................................................................................1528
324.13 NBLT Report..........................................................................................1530
324.14 Subscriber Line Management................................................................1539
324.15 NBLT conditions ....................................................................................1541
324.15.1 Prior to R4.3 (for information only) ........................................................1541
324.15.2 Not provisioned Subscriber port conditions ...........................................1542
324.15.3 Provisioned subscriber port conditions..................................................1542
324.15.4 Feeding current test...............................................................................1544
324.15.5 Feeding Voltage test..............................................................................1544
324.15.6 Feeding DC Voltage / DC Current Test (72 line voice LT board
only).......................................................................................................1544
324.15.7 Feeding DC Voltage / DC Current Test (48 lines voice LT board
(NPOT-A) only)......................................................................................1545
324.15.8 NBLT Execution pre-conditions .............................................................1546

42 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

324.16 Applicability NBLT type versus Voice LT board.....................................1547


324.17 System limitations..................................................................................1548
324.17.1 Capacitive unbalance ............................................................................1549
324.17.2 Insulating resistance..............................................................................1549
324.17.3 Effect of on-board components .............................................................1549
324.17.4 NBLT types that can be terminated by the operator..............................1550
324.17.5 M-socket ................................................................................................1550
324.17.6 Cable pair Identification Test (72/48 lines (NPOT-B / NPOT-C)
voice LT board only) ..............................................................................1551
324.17.7 Cable pair Identification Test .................................................................1552
324.17.8 Dial Tone Delay (All voice LT boards) ...................................................1553
324.18 NBLT procedures ..................................................................................1553
324.18.1 Group Test.............................................................................................1553
324.18.2 Feeded_AC_Voltage Test .....................................................................1554
324.18.3 Foreign_AC_Voltage Test .....................................................................1555
324.18.4 Feeded_DC_Voltage Test .....................................................................1557
324.18.5 Foreign_DC_Voltage Test .....................................................................1558
324.18.6 Feeding_Current Test............................................................................1559
324.18.7 Resistance Test.....................................................................................1560
324.18.8 Capacitance Test...................................................................................1562
324.18.9 Impedance Test.....................................................................................1563
324.18.10 Low Capacitance Phone Test................................................................1564
324.18.11 Dial Tone Delay Test .............................................................................1565
324.18.12 MSocket Detection Test ........................................................................1566
324.18.13 AC Current Test.....................................................................................1567
324.18.14 DC Current Test ....................................................................................1569
324.18.15 Noise Level Test....................................................................................1570
324.18.16 Howler Tone Test ..................................................................................1571
324.18.17 Status Monitoring Test...........................................................................1572
324.18.18 Cable Pair Identification Test.................................................................1574
324.18.19 Line Reverse Sub Test ..........................................................................1575
324.18.20 Private Meter Pulse Test .......................................................................1576
324.18.21 Ring Subscriber Subtest........................................................................1578
324.18.22 DP DTMF Signal Sub test .....................................................................1579
324.18.23 User Loop Sub test................................................................................1581
324.18.24 ISDN Loop Back test .............................................................................1582
325 TAP 3109 Integrated NBLT for SIP termination .....................1585
325.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1585
325.2 Contents ................................................................................................1585
325.3 The central office model ........................................................................1586
325.4 The line model .......................................................................................1586
325.5 The phone model...................................................................................1587
325.6 Two-ports versus three-ports network measurements ..........................1588
325.7 NBLT session ........................................................................................1590
325.8 NBLT type applicability ..........................................................................1590
325.9 Unit definition.........................................................................................1593
325.10 Group test..............................................................................................1594
325.11 Busy-overwrite behaviour ......................................................................1595
325.12 Dial tone delay test ................................................................................1596

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 43
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

325.13 NBLT parameters ..................................................................................1596


325.14 Common status text...............................................................................1598
325.15 Remaining search tone time..................................................................1598
325.16 Test completed time stamp ...................................................................1598
325.17 Validity flag ............................................................................................1598
325.18 NBLT output ..........................................................................................1599
325.19 Port conditions under which NBLT can run ...........................................1605
325.20 The reservation of a subscriber line for NBLT .......................................1608
325.20.1 TestAccessState....................................................................................1608
325.20.2 BusyOverwrite .......................................................................................1609
325.20.3 AccessOnTimeout .................................................................................1609
325.21 NBLT session configuration...................................................................1610
325.22 NBLT parameter configuration ..............................................................1615
325.23 NBLT line configuration .........................................................................1617
325.24 NBLT status...........................................................................................1617
325.25 NBLT result............................................................................................1617
325.26 Busy port status.....................................................................................1617
325.27 Vendor information ................................................................................1618
326 TAP 3110 Enable or disable OTDR for PON ...........................1619
326.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1619
326.2 General..................................................................................................1619
326.3 Configuration considerations .................................................................1619
326.3.1 File path.................................................................................................1620
326.3.2 File format..............................................................................................1620
326.4 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1622
326.5 Procedure ..............................................................................................1623
327 TAP 3111 GPON Rogue ONT ...................................................1625
327.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1625
327.2 General..................................................................................................1625
327.3 Procedure ..............................................................................................1626
328 TAP 3113 EPON Rogue ONT....................................................1629
328.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1629
328.2 General..................................................................................................1629
328.3 Procedure ..............................................................................................1629
329 TAP 3114 Initiate and release GPON CES UNI loopback ......1631
329.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1631
329.2 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1631
329.3 Procedure ..............................................................................................1631
330 TAP 3115 Detect Alien ONTs ...................................................1633
330.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1633
330.2 General..................................................................................................1633
330.3 References ............................................................................................1634
330.4 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1634
330.5 Procedure ..............................................................................................1634
331 TAP 3116 Configure GPON PON range mode ........................1635
331.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1635

44 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

331.2 General..................................................................................................1635
331.3 References ............................................................................................1635
331.4 Prerequisites..........................................................................................1635
331.5 Procedure ..............................................................................................1636
Training (TNG)
332 TNG 1105 Overall software packages.....................................1639
332.1 Introduction............................................................................................1639
332.2 Downloading a New OSWP...................................................................1639
332.3 Re-downloading a new OSWP ..............................................................1640
332.4 Aborting an OSWP ................................................................................1640
332.5 Activating a Non-active OSWP..............................................................1641
332.6 Committing an OSWP ...........................................................................1641
333 TNG 1107 xDSL parameters.....................................................1643
333.1 Introduction............................................................................................1643
333.2 Failure correlation / priorities .................................................................1644
333.3 xDSL service profile configuration parameters......................................1645
333.3.1 Rate adaptive mode ..............................................................................1646
333.3.2 Profile name and scope.........................................................................1647
333.3.3 L0 bit rate configuration .........................................................................1648
333.3.4 Low power bit rate configuration............................................................1650
333.3.5 Maximum interleaving delay ..................................................................1650
333.3.6 Minimum impulse noise protection ........................................................1650
333.3.7 Erasure detection ..................................................................................1651
333.3.8 SRA maximum delay variation ..............................................................1651
333.4 xDSL spectrum profile parameters ........................................................1651
333.4.1 Operating modes ...................................................................................1653
333.4.2 Noise margin parameters ......................................................................1655
333.4.3 Carrier masking .....................................................................................1657
333.4.4 RFI bands ..............................................................................................1657
333.4.5 Power management ..............................................................................1659
333.4.6 Dynamic rate adaptation........................................................................1660
333.4.7 Artificial noise PSD DS ..........................................................................1661
333.4.8 Modem features.....................................................................................1661
333.4.9 VDSL band plan ....................................................................................1662
333.4.10 Optional band usage .............................................................................1662
333.4.11 Optional band start frequency ...............................................................1663
333.4.12 Optional band end frequency ................................................................1663
333.4.13 ADSL band usage .................................................................................1663
333.4.14 ADSL band end frequency ....................................................................1664
333.4.15 Maximum nominal Power Spectral Density ...........................................1664
333.4.16 Maximum nominal aggregate transmit power........................................1665
333.4.17 Selectable PSD shape...........................................................................1666
333.4.18 Custom DS/US PSD shape ...................................................................1672
333.4.19 Power backoff mode and policing..........................................................1673
333.4.20 Maximum aggregate receive power ......................................................1674
333.4.21 Receive PSD Shape Upstream .............................................................1674
333.4.22 Customized RX PSD Shape Upstream .................................................1675
333.4.23 G.Hs Tones Tx Power Control...............................................................1675

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 45
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

333.4.24 Per tone set G.Hs Tones Tx Power Control (A43/B43/A43c/V43) ........1675
333.4.25 Per tone set G.Hs Tones Tx Power Level A43/B43/A43c/V43..............1676
333.4.26 Maximum number of bands ...................................................................1676
333.4.27 Maximum frequency ..............................................................................1677
333.4.28 A and B Parameters for US PBO PSD ..................................................1677
333.4.29 US PBO electrical length .......................................................................1677
333.4.30 Virtual Noise PSD Shape US/DS ..........................................................1677
333.4.31 Virtual Noise SNRM mode US/DS.........................................................1678
333.4.32 FEXT Parameters for US PBO PSD......................................................1678
333.5 xDSL RTX profile configuration parameters ..........................................1679
333.5.1 RTX Mode Downstream ........................................................................1679
333.5.2 RTX Mode Upstream.............................................................................1679
333.5.3 RTX Minimum Expected Throughput Downstream ...............................1679
333.5.4 RTX Minimum Expected Throughput Upstream....................................1679
333.5.5 RTX Planned Expected Throughput Downstream.................................1679
333.5.6 RTX Planned Expected Throughput Upstream .....................................1680
333.5.7 RTX Maximum Expected Throughput Downstream ..............................1680
333.5.8 RTX Maximum Expected Throughput Upstream...................................1680
333.5.9 RTX Maximum Net Data Rate Downstream..........................................1680
333.5.10 RTX Maximum Net Data Rate Upstream ..............................................1680
333.5.11 RTX Minimum Delay Downstream ........................................................1680
333.5.12 RTX Minimum Delay Upstream .............................................................1681
333.5.13 RTX Maximum Delay Downstream .......................................................1681
333.5.14 RTX Maximum Delay Upstream ............................................................1681
333.5.15 RTX Minimum Impulse Noise Protection SHINE Downstream..............1681
333.5.16 RTX Minimum Impulse Noise Protection SHINE Upstream ..................1681
333.5.17 RTX Minimum Impulse Noise Protection REIN Downstream ................1682
333.5.18 RTX Minimum Impulse Noise Protection REIN Upstream.....................1682
333.5.19 RTX REIN Inter-arrival Time Downstream ............................................1682
333.5.20 RTX REIN Inter-arrival Time Upstream .................................................1682
333.5.21 RTX SHINE Ratio Downstream.............................................................1682
333.5.22 RTX SHINE Ratio Upstream .................................................................1683
333.5.23 RTX Leftr Threshold Downstream .........................................................1683
333.5.24 RTX Leftr Threshold Upstream..............................................................1683
333.6 xDSL DPBO profile configuration parameters .......................................1683
333.6.1 DPBO Electrical Length.........................................................................1683
333.6.2 DPBO Assumed Exchange PSD Mask .................................................1683
333.6.3 DPBO Cable Model Parameters “ABC”.................................................1684
333.6.4 DPBO Minimum and Maximum Frequency ...........................................1684
333.6.5 DPBO Minimum Usable Signal level .....................................................1684
333.6.6 DPBO Custom PSD Mask Downstream................................................1685
333.6.7 Extra DPBO Maximum Usable Frequency Control................................1685
333.6.8 Extra DPBO Offset ................................................................................1686
333.6.9 Extra DPBO Remote Side Electrical Length..........................................1686
333.7 xDSL line overrule record configuration parameters .............................1686
333.7.1 Maximum Bit rate (channel related).......................................................1686
333.7.2 Maximum Interleaving Delay (channel related) .....................................1687
333.7.3 Minimum Impulse Noise Protection (channel related) ...........................1687
333.7.4 Target Noise Margin ..............................................................................1687

46 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

333.7.5 Maximum Nominal PSD Level...............................................................1687


333.7.6 Carrier Mask ..........................................................................................1688
333.7.7 Noise PSD .............................................................................................1688
333.7.8 RTX Mode Downstream ........................................................................1689
333.7.9 RTX Mode Upstream.............................................................................1689
333.7.10 RTX Maximum Net Data Rate Downstream..........................................1689
333.7.11 RTX Maximum Net Data Rate Upstream ..............................................1689
333.7.12 RTX Maximum Expected Throughput Downstream ..............................1690
333.7.13 RTX Maximum Expected Throughput Upstream...................................1690
333.7.14 RTX Minimum Impulse Noise Protection against SHINE
Downstream ..........................................................................................1690
333.7.15 RTX Minimum Impulse Noise Protection against SHINE Upstream......1690
333.7.16 RTX Minimum Impulse Noise Protection against REIN Downstream ...1691
333.7.17 RTX Minimum Impulse Noise Protection against REIN Upstream ........1691
333.7.18 RTX Minimum Delay Downstream ........................................................1691
333.7.19 RTX Minimum Delay Upstream .............................................................1691
333.7.20 RTX Maximum Delay Downstream .......................................................1691
333.7.21 RTX Maximum Delay Upstream ............................................................1692
333.7.22 RTX SHINE Ratio Downstream.............................................................1692
333.7.23 RTX SHINE Ratio Upstream .................................................................1692
333.7.24 RTX Leftr Threshold Downstream .........................................................1692
333.7.25 RTX Leftr Threshold Upstream..............................................................1692
333.8 xDSL line status parameters .................................................................1693
333.8.1 Actual line bit rate ..................................................................................1694
333.8.2 Attainable line bit rate ............................................................................1694
333.8.3 Loop attenuation....................................................................................1694
333.8.4 Signal attenuation..................................................................................1695
333.8.5 SNR margin ...........................................................................................1695
333.8.6 Actual aggregate output power..............................................................1695
333.8.7 Carrier load............................................................................................1695
333.8.8 Carrier SNR ...........................................................................................1696
333.8.9 Quiet line noise......................................................................................1696
333.8.10 Channel transfer function ......................................................................1696
333.8.11 Complex channel transfer function ........................................................1696
333.8.12 Code violation count ..............................................................................1696
333.9 xDSL line operational data retrieval.......................................................1697
334 TNG 1108 SHDSL parameters..................................................1701
334.1 Introduction............................................................................................1701
334.2 Configurable lines..................................................................................1701
334.3 Supported span operation configuration parameters ............................1702
334.3.1 Operating Modes ...................................................................................1703
334.3.2 Spectral Profile ......................................................................................1703
334.3.3 Wire Mode .............................................................................................1704
334.3.4 Support Management from STU-R........................................................1704
334.3.5 Regional Setting ....................................................................................1705
334.3.6 Minimum and Maximum Data Rate .......................................................1705
334.3.7 Worst Case Downstream Target Noise Margin .....................................1707
334.3.8 Current Case Downstream Target Noise Margin ..................................1708
334.3.9 Worst Case Upstream Target Noise Margin..........................................1709

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 47
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

334.3.10 Current Case Upstream Target Noise Margin .......................................1710


334.3.11 Line Probe Enable .................................................................................1711
334.3.12 TC-PAM modulation selection ...............................................................1712
334.3.13 EFM handshake selection .....................................................................1712
334.3.14 Cross-talk Cancellation..........................................................................1713
334.3.15 Bonding Rate Control Mode ..................................................................1713
334.3.16 Minimum Requested Data Link 1 ..........................................................1714
334.3.17 Maximum Requested Data Link 1 .........................................................1714
334.3.18 Minimum Requested Data Link 2 ..........................................................1714
334.3.19 Maximum Requested Data Link 2 .........................................................1715
334.3.20 Minimum Requested Data Link 3 ..........................................................1715
334.3.21 Maximum Requested Data Link 3 .........................................................1716
334.3.22 Minimum Requested Data Link 4 ..........................................................1716
334.3.23 Maximum Requested Data Link 4 .........................................................1717
334.3.24 TC-PAM Selection Link 1 ......................................................................1717
334.3.25 TC-PAM Selection Link 2 ......................................................................1718
334.3.26 TC-PAM Selection Link 3 ......................................................................1718
334.3.27 TC-PAM Selection Link 4 ......................................................................1719
334.4 Supported unit operation configuration parameters ..............................1719
334.4.1 Loop Attenuation Threshold ..................................................................1719
334.4.2 SNR Margin Threshold ..........................................................................1720
334.4.3 Loopback Timeout .................................................................................1720
334.5 Supported segment termination operation configuration parameters....1720
334.5.1 Loopback Configuration.........................................................................1721
334.5.2 Power Backoff Mode .............................................................................1721
334.5.3 Soft Restart............................................................................................1721
334.6 Supported span operational data parameters .......................................1722
334.6.1 Span State.............................................................................................1722
334.6.2 Detected Units .......................................................................................1722
334.6.3 Inventoried Units....................................................................................1723
334.6.4 Configured Units....................................................................................1724
334.6.5 Span Status ...........................................................................................1725
334.6.6 Wire Pair Assignment ............................................................................1725
334.7 Supported unit operational data parameters .........................................1726
334.7.1 Unit DC Powering ..................................................................................1727
334.8 Supported segment termination operational data parameters ..............1727
334.8.1 Segment Termination Status .................................................................1727
334.8.2 Loopback State......................................................................................1728
334.8.3 SNR Margin ...........................................................................................1728
334.8.4 Loop Attenuation ...................................................................................1729
334.8.5 Power Backoff Level..............................................................................1729
334.8.6 Tip Ring Reversal ..................................................................................1730
334.8.7 Power Backoff Status ............................................................................1730
334.8.8 Current data rate ...................................................................................1731
334.8.9 Activation state ......................................................................................1731
334.8.10 Activation failure ....................................................................................1732
335 TNG 1116 Link related Ethernet OAM (EFM OAM).................1733
335.1 Introduction............................................................................................1733
335.2 General Description...............................................................................1733

48 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

335.3 Link Related Ethernet OAM Configuration Parameters.........................1734


336 TNG 1119 vMAC ........................................................................1735
336.1 Introduction............................................................................................1735
336.2 Features ................................................................................................1735
336.3 vMAC support........................................................................................1736
336.4 vMAC address format............................................................................1737
336.5 vMAC downstream filter ........................................................................1738
336.6 Restrictions and limitations....................................................................1739
337 TNG 1120 VLAN translation .....................................................1741
337.1 Introduction............................................................................................1741
337.2 Translate a user S-VLAN into a network S-VLAN .................................1741
337.3 Translate a user C-VLAN into a network C-VLAN.................................1742
337.4 Translate a user C-VLAN into an S+C network VLAN ..........................1742
338 TNG 1121 xDSL bonding..........................................................1745
338.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1745
338.2 Overview of xDSL bonding ....................................................................1745
338.3 ATM bonding and PTM bonding............................................................1745
338.3.1 ATM bonding .........................................................................................1745
338.3.2 PTM bonding .........................................................................................1746
338.4 Bonding levels .......................................................................................1746
338.4.1 Odd-even pair bonding ..........................................................................1747
338.4.2 LT-level bonding ....................................................................................1747
338.4.3 System-level bonding ............................................................................1747
338.5 xDSL bonding implementation...............................................................1747
338.5.1 Initialization............................................................................................1747
338.5.2 Redundancy ..........................................................................................1748
338.5.3 Line recovery with single line bonding...................................................1748
338.5.4 Bonding fallback in case of vectoring ....................................................1749
338.6 Configuring xDSL bonding.....................................................................1749
338.6.1 Dynamic Line Management...................................................................1750
338.7 xDSL bonding alarms ............................................................................1751
338.8 Examples of xDSL bonding ...................................................................1751
339 TNG 1124 Planned hardware resources .................................1753
339.1 Introduction............................................................................................1753
339.2 Procedure ..............................................................................................1753
340 TNG 3101 GPON QoS configuration .......................................1755
340.1 Introduction............................................................................................1755
340.1.1 The GPON QoS Management Model....................................................1755
340.2 Upstream Qos Handling ........................................................................1756
340.3 Upstream QoS at the GPON LT/ONT Subsystem.................................1757
340.3.1 Classification and Marking.....................................................................1757
340.3.2 Bandwidth Policing (and Filtering) .........................................................1758
340.3.3 Queue Mapping and Scheduling ...........................................................1759
340.3.4 Upstream Bandwidth Shaping ...............................................................1761
340.4 Upstream QoS at the NT Subsystem ....................................................1762
340.4.1 Classification into Flow Classes ............................................................1762
340.4.2 Bandwidth Policing ................................................................................1762

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 49
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

340.4.3 Queue Mapping and Scheduling ...........................................................1763


340.4.4 Bandwidth Shaping................................................................................1763
340.5 Downstream QoS Handling ...................................................................1764
340.6 Downstream QoS at the NT Subsystem................................................1764
340.7 Downstream QoS at the GPON LT/ONT Subsystem ............................1764
341 TNG 3104 DHCP relay agent configuration ............................1767
341.1 General Description...............................................................................1767
341.1.1 IP Address Allocation Mechanisms .......................................................1767
341.1.2 DHCP Option 82....................................................................................1768
341.2 DHCP Relay Parameters.......................................................................1768
341.3 Conditions and Restrictions...................................................................1768
342 TNG 3106 Specifying 7330 ISAM FTTN expansion units
using the CLI .............................................................................1769
342.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1769
342.2 Rack and shelf IDs ................................................................................1769
342.2.1 Rack and shelf assignments..................................................................1769
342.2.2 Boards with downlink ports....................................................................1770
342.2.3 Configurable rack and shelf ID assignments .........................................1770
342.2.4 SFP port mapping..................................................................................1770
342.3 Specifying expansion units using CLI....................................................1771
342.3.1 Slot and port identification .....................................................................1772
342.3.2 Example CLI configuration commands..................................................1773
343 TNG 3115 Slot Numbering Schemes.......................................1775
343.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1775
343.2 Terminology...........................................................................................1775
343.3 Translation Table...................................................................................1775
343.3.1 7302 ISAM FD Equipment.....................................................................1775
343.3.2 7330 ISAM FTTN FD Equipment...........................................................1776
343.3.3 7360 ISAM FX-16 Equipment................................................................1777
343.3.4 7360 ISAM FX-12 Equipment................................................................1778
343.3.5 7360 ISAM FX-8 Equipment..................................................................1778
343.3.6 7360 ISAM FX-4 Equipment..................................................................1779
344 TNG 3122 Cross-DSLAM level vectoring................................1781
344.1 Introduction............................................................................................1781
344.2 Configuration example...........................................................................1781
345 TNG 3123 ONT mapping file ....................................................1791
345.1 Introduction............................................................................................1791
345.1.1 Layout of the ONT Mapping File............................................................1791
Appendix (A)
346 Configuration example values.................................................1795
346.1 Purpose .................................................................................................1795
346.2 Equipment .............................................................................................1795
346.3 xDSL profiles .........................................................................................1796
346.4 VLANs ...................................................................................................1797
346.5 Lines ......................................................................................................1798
346.5.1 VDSL .....................................................................................................1798

50 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

346.5.2 ADSL .....................................................................................................1798


346.5.3 Bonding .................................................................................................1798
346.5.4 SHDSL...................................................................................................1798
346.6 Ports ......................................................................................................1799
346.7 SDP .......................................................................................................1799
346.8 Services.................................................................................................1799
346.8.1 VPRN.....................................................................................................1799
346.8.2 VPLS .....................................................................................................1799
346.8.3 IES.........................................................................................................1800
346.8.4 EPIPE ....................................................................................................1800

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 51
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

52 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

List of figures
11 NTP 3100 Initial system configuration ......................................103
Figure 1 Management Topology............................................................................103
14 NTP 3104 Configure a VLAN cross-connect without
MPLS at the network side ..........................................................111
Figure 2 Configure a VLAN Cross-connect on an IHub-based ISAM ....................113
15 NTP 3105 Configure an iBridge VLAN without MPLS at
the network side .........................................................................115
Figure 3 Configure an iBridge................................................................................116
16 NTP 3108 Configure services ....................................................119
Figure 4 Configure Multicast in L2 mode ...............................................................121
Figure 5 Configure Multicast in L3 mode ...............................................................122
23 NTP 3134 Configure a VPRN or IES ..........................................139
Figure 6 VPRN/IES services with "port fanout" by v-VPLS services .....................139
24 NTP 3135 Configure an iBridge VLAN with MPLS at the
network side................................................................................141
Figure 7 iBridge VLAN with MPLS.........................................................................142
Figure 8 Configure an iBridge VLAN with MPLs....................................................143
25 NTP 3136 Configure a VLAN cross-connect using MPLS
at the network side .....................................................................147
Figure 9 C-VLAN CC using MPLS.........................................................................148
Figure 10 S+C VLAN using MPLS...........................................................................149
Figure 11 S VLAN using MPLS ...............................................................................149
Figure 12 Configure an VLAN cross-connect with MPLS ........................................150
26 NTP 3137 Configure PW redundancy .......................................153
Figure 13 Pseudo-wire redundancy.........................................................................153
Figure 14 Configure PW redundancy ......................................................................154
27 NTP 3138 Configure full business bridging .............................155
Figure 15 Full business bridging..............................................................................155
30 NTP 3141 Configure IGMP and multicast for an EPON
ONT ..............................................................................................161
Figure 16 7360 ISAM FX multicast with EPON ONT in IGMP control mode ...........162
Figure 17 7360 ISAM FX multicast with EPON ONT in IGMP snooping mode .......162
31 NTP 3142 Download, activate, and commit ONT software .....165
Figure 18 ONT Software download process............................................................166
33 NTP 3144 Configure an APIPE service .....................................171
Figure 19 ATMoPWE3 Network...............................................................................172
38 NTP 3150 Configure NG-PON2 ..................................................187
Figure 20 NG-PON2 basic concepts .......................................................................189

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 53
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

46 DLP 1117 Configure a VLAN on the LT for C-VLAN


network cross-connect ..............................................................219
Figure 21 Configure a VLAN on the LT for C-VLAN cross-connect.........................219
47 DLP 1118 Configure a network VLAN on the LT for S-
VLAN cross-connect ..................................................................223
Figure 22 Configure a network VLAN on the LT for S-VLAN cross-connect ...........223
48 DLP 1120 Configure a network VLAN on the LT for C-
iBridge .........................................................................................227
Figure 23 Configure a VLAN on the LT for C-iBridge ..............................................227
59 DLP 1174 Create an xDSL IPoA user and add this user to
a VLAN for C-VLAN cross-connect ...........................................285
Figure 24 Create an xDSL IPoA user and add this user to a VLAN for C-
VLAN cross-connect................................................................................285
74 DLP 1232 Create an xDSL IPoA user and add this user to
a VLAN for iBridge......................................................................335
Figure 25 Create an xDSL IPoA user and add this user to a VLAN for iBridge.......335
95 DLP 3105 Configure link aggregation usage ...........................411
Figure 26 Configure LAG on the IHub .....................................................................411
104 DLP 3119 Configure a VLAN on the LT for S+C-VLAN
cross-connect .............................................................................457
Figure 27 Configure a VLAN on the LT for S+C-VLAN cross-connect ....................457
105 DLP 3124 Create an xDSL/native Ethernet user and add
this user to a VLAN on the LT ...................................................461
Figure 28 Create an xDSL/native Ethernet user and add this user to a VLAN
on the LT .................................................................................................461
114 DLP 3151 Shut down and restart the NT ..................................509
Figure 29 Location of the flash disk on the NT board ..............................................510
143 DLP 3214 Configure connectivity fault management ..............655
Figure 30 Scheme of AIS upstream and downstream messages............................656
Figure 31 Upstream AIS scenarios from the RG to the BNG ..................................657
Figure 32 Downstream AIS scenarios from the BNG to the RG..............................657
151 DLP 3228 Create and update a VPRN or an IES service .........719
Figure 33 Create a VPRN or an IES service ...........................................................719
152 DLP 3229 Configure an IP interface and SAP on a VPRN or
an IES...........................................................................................723
Figure 34 Create an IP interface on VPRN or IES...................................................723
153 DLP 3230 Configure v-VPLS ......................................................727
Figure 35 Configure v-VPLS on the IHub ................................................................727
154 DLP 3231 Manage the ports on the LT, NT/NTIO .....................731
Figure 36 Manage the ports on the NT....................................................................731

54 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

155 DLP 3233 Configure an SAP on a v-VPLS ................................735


Figure 37 Configure v-VPLS SAPs on Regular and Residential Ports on the
IHub .........................................................................................................735
156 DLP 3234 Configure a VLAN and IP address for ISAM
management access...................................................................739
Figure 38 Configure external management v-VPLS on the IHub ............................739
157 DLP 3235 Configure a security access policy to NT OBC
on IHub ........................................................................................743
Figure 39 Security policy using dedicated external management v-VPLS ..............744
Figure 40 Security policy without dedicated external management v-VPLS ...........745
162 DLP 3240 Configure VPLS .........................................................789
Figure 41 Configure VPLS on the IHub ...................................................................789
163 DLP 3241 Configure an EPIPE...................................................795
Figure 42 Configure EPIPE on the IHub..................................................................795
164 DLP 3242 Configure SDP ...........................................................797
Figure 43 Configure SDP on the IHub .....................................................................797
165 DLP 3243 Configure an SAP on a VPLS ...................................801
Figure 44 Configure an SAP for VPLS on the IHub.................................................801
166 DLP 3244 Configure an SAP on an EPIPE ................................805
Figure 45 Configure an SAP for EPIPE on the IHub ...............................................805
167 DLP 3245 Configure an SDP binding on a VPLS .....................807
Figure 46 Configure an SDP binding on a VPLS.....................................................807
168 DLP 3246 Configure an SDP binding on an EPIPE ..................811
Figure 47 Configure an SDP binding on an EPIPE .................................................811
169 DLP 3247 Configure a static LSP ..............................................815
Figure 48 Configure a static LSP.............................................................................815
170 DLP 3248 Configure an endpoint on a VPLS ...........................819
Figure 49 Configure an endpoint on a VPLS ...........................................................819
171 DLP 3249 Associate an SDP binding with an endpoint of
a VPLS .........................................................................................821
Figure 50 Associate an SDP binding to an endpoint of a VPLS ..............................821
173 DLP 3251 Configure an IP interface on the base router..........825
Figure 51 Create an IP interface on the base router ...............................................825
177 DLP 3255 Configure a port on an Ethernet LT .........................839
Figure 52 Ethernet LT port types .............................................................................840
181 DLP 3262 Create a GPON xDSL user ........................................861
Figure 53 Create a GPON xDSL user .....................................................................861
197 DLP 3280 Configure a network VLAN on the LT for S+C-
iBridge .........................................................................................949
Figure 54 Configure a VLAN on the LT for S+C-VLAN iBridge ...............................950

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 55
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

200 DLP 3283 Troubleshooting congestion on the NELT-B LT.....957


Figure 55 .................................................................................................................958
204 DLP 3287 Configure a VLAN on the LT for S-iBridge ..............967
Figure 56 Configure a VLAN on the LT for S-VLAN iBridge ....................................967
205 DLP 3288 Configure an S+C-iBridge on the PON LT...............969
Figure 57 Configure a VLAN on the LT for S+C-VLAN iBridge ...............................969
224 DLP 3313 Configure an Ethernet UNI......................................1041
Figure 58 Ethernet UNI configuration and relationship to other entities ................1043
227 DLP 3316 Apply traffic filter to ONT Ethernet UNI .................1057
Figure 59 Traffic filter entity relationships ..............................................................1058
236 DLP 3325 Configure PON port protection ..............................1089
Figure 60 PON port protection...............................................................................1089
240 DLP 3329 Configure an APIPE service ...................................1103
Figure 61 APIPE service forwarding model ...........................................................1103
258 DLP 3351 Create a native Ethernet/NNI user and add this
user to a VLAN on the LT .........................................................1167
Figure 62 Create an native Ethernet user and add this user to a VLAN on the
LT ..........................................................................................................1167
259 DLP 3353 Configure DPoE ISAM management access .........1173
Figure 63 NT access ports legacy access configuration (Model 1) .......................1174
Figure 64 NT network port configuration (Model 2) ...............................................1174
264 DLP 3359 Configure a static cable modem service ...............1201
Figure 65 Objects Relations ..................................................................................1202
Figure 66 Static CM service configuration flow......................................................1203
268 DLP 3363 Configure IP(HSD) serving group selection per
SVLAN........................................................................................1217
Figure 67 DEMARC management in the IP forwarding model ..............................1217
Figure 68 DEMARC management in the bridging model.......................................1218
Figure 69 Management model for multiple serving groups....................................1218
270 DLP 3365 Controlling broadcast and secure forwarding
on an iBridge and Vlan CC.......................................................1227
Figure 70 S+C Forwarding Cascaded model in ISAM (IACM-LT view) .................1227
Figure 71 Handling of Broadcast Traffic in ISAM...................................................1228
Figure 72 Controlling downstream Broadcast cases .............................................1230
Figure 73 Controlling Secure Forwarding cases....................................................1232
275 DLP 3373 Configure QoS for MEF service over DPoE
network ......................................................................................1255
Figure 74 Upstream MEF QoS Parameter Election Policy ....................................1256
276 DLP 3374 Configure an E-Line service over DPoE
network ......................................................................................1259
Figure 75 Configuration Model of an E-Line Service over EMAN..........................1259

56 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

Figure 76 Configuration Model of an E-Line Service over an MPLS/IP


Network .................................................................................................1260
Figure 77 E-Line Service using an Ethernet Cross Connection ............................1260
Figure 78 Configuration Example of an E-Line Service over a DPoE Network .....1263
277 DLP 3375 Configure an E-LAN service over DPoE
network ......................................................................................1265
Figure 79 Configuration Model of an RFC 4762 VPLS Service.............................1265
Figure 80 VPLS Encodings Precedence ...............................................................1266
Figure 81 Configuration Model of RFC 6074 LDP VPLS or 4761 BGP VPLS
Service...................................................................................................1266
Figure 82 Configuration Example of an E-LAN Service over a DPoE Network .....1269
278 DLP 3376 Upgrade an E-LAN service over DPoE network ...1271
Figure 83 VPLS Common Configuration Upgrading Policy ...................................1271
286 DLP 3391 Configure GPON/NG-PON2 uplink connectivity
fault management .....................................................................1303
Figure 84 Example configuration of GPON LT uplink CFM ...................................1304
Figure 85 Example configuration of NG-PON2 CFM.............................................1305
Figure 86 GPON CFM system management.........................................................1306
Figure 87 Service connectivity verification within ISAM NT uplink to the LT .........1307
305 DLP 3430 Configure a port on a VDSL LT ..............................1377
Figure 88 VDSL LT port types ...............................................................................1377
320 TAP 1107 MELT.........................................................................1427
Figure 89 Zener resistance and voltage ................................................................1430
Figure 90 ETSI signature circuit ............................................................................1431
Figure 91 Reference circuit for the “receiver off-hook” (ROH) status of an end
device ....................................................................................................1431
Figure 92 TLTG1 ...................................................................................................1432
Figure 93 TLTG2 ...................................................................................................1432
Figure 94 Passive test terminator (PPA) ...............................................................1433
Figure 95 Galvanic signature detection .................................................................1433
Figure 96 Legacy group test: example test result..................................................1475
Figure 97 Legacy group test with extended reporting: example test result ...........1476
Figure 98 MELT collective group test: example test result ....................................1478
Figure 99 Foreign_AC_voltage test: example test result.......................................1479
Figure 100 Foreign_DC_voltage test: example test result.......................................1480
Figure 101 Resistance test: example test result......................................................1481
Figure 102 Capacitance test: example test result....................................................1482
Figure 103 Cable pair identification test: example test result ..................................1483
Figure 104 ETSI signature test: example test result................................................1484
Figure 105 Conductance test: example test result ..................................................1485
Figure 106 Succeptance test: example test result...................................................1486
Figure 107 Hazardous voltage test: example test result..........................................1487
Figure 108 Galvanic signature detection test: example test result ..........................1488
Figure 109 End device capacitance detection test: example test result ..................1489
Figure 110 PPA detection test: example test result.................................................1490
Figure 111 ROH detection test: example test result ................................................1491
Figure 112 MELT collective group test + hazardous test: example test result ........1493

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 57
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

Figure 113 Show busy port: example command output ..........................................1495


Figure 114 Show vendor Information: example command output ...........................1496
324 TAP 3108 Integrated NBLT for MEGACO termination ...........1503
Figure 115 Access node model ...............................................................................1504
Figure 116 Line model .............................................................................................1504
Figure 117 Phone model .........................................................................................1505
Figure 118 Components ..........................................................................................1506
Figure 119 Two-port measurement .........................................................................1551
Figure 120 Example Test Result .............................................................................1554
Figure 121 Example test result ................................................................................1555
Figure 122 Example test result ................................................................................1556
Figure 123 Example test result ................................................................................1558
Figure 124 Example test result ................................................................................1559
Figure 125 Example test result ................................................................................1560
Figure 126 Example test result ................................................................................1561
Figure 127 Example test result ................................................................................1563
Figure 128 Example test result ................................................................................1564
Figure 129 Example test result ................................................................................1565
Figure 130 Example test result ................................................................................1566
Figure 131 Example test result ................................................................................1567
Figure 132 Example test result ................................................................................1569
Figure 133 Example test result ................................................................................1570
Figure 134 Example test result ................................................................................1571
Figure 135 Example test result ................................................................................1572
Figure 136 Example test result ................................................................................1574
Figure 137 Example test result ................................................................................1575
Figure 138 Example test result ................................................................................1576
Figure 139 Example test result ................................................................................1577
Figure 140 Example test result ................................................................................1579
Figure 141 Example test result ................................................................................1581
Figure 142 Example test result ................................................................................1582
Figure 143 Example test result ................................................................................1583
325 TAP 3109 Integrated NBLT for SIP termination .....................1585
Figure 144 Central office model...............................................................................1586
Figure 145 Line model .............................................................................................1587
Figure 146 Phone model .........................................................................................1588
Figure 147 Components ..........................................................................................1589
326 TAP 3110 Enable or disable OTDR for PON ...........................1619
Figure 148 File format for raw and calibration measurements ................................1621
Figure 149 File format for summed measurements.................................................1622
329 TAP 3114 Initiate and release GPON CES UNI loopback ......1631
Figure 150 Loopbacks at the ONT...........................................................................1631
333 TNG 1107 xDSL parameters.....................................................1643
Figure 151 Noise margin parameters ......................................................................1655
Figure 152 Upshift/Downshift noise margins ...........................................................1660
Figure 153 ADSL2+ PSD Masks for Cabinet deployment .......................................1668
Figure 154 PSD reference for US PBO ...................................................................1677

58 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

335 TNG 1116 Link related Ethernet OAM (EFM OAM).................1733


Figure 155 Typical Link Related Ethernet OAM Configuration ................................1733
336 TNG 1119 vMAC ........................................................................1735
Figure 156 Packet flow ............................................................................................1736
340 TNG 3101 GPON QoS configuration .......................................1755
Figure 157 GPON LT/ONT combined to single entity in management model .........1756
Figure 158 Upstream QoS overview........................................................................1757
Figure 159 Upstream Classification and Marking at the ONT UNI ..........................1757
Figure 160 Upstream Policing Implementation Framework.....................................1759
Figure 161 Upstream Traffic mapping into Traffic Classes (TC) and further on
into UNI queues.....................................................................................1760
Figure 162 Upstream traffic mapping into queues and TC layer parameters ..........1761
Figure 163 T-CONT bandwidth parameters and DBA action radius........................1761
Figure 164 NT egress port scheduler configuration.................................................1763
Figure 165 Downstream QoS overview ...................................................................1764
Figure 166 Downstream UNI queue configuration for scheduling and rate
limiting ...................................................................................................1765
Figure 167 Downstream hierarchical scheduling and rate limiting ..........................1766
341 TNG 3104 DHCP relay agent configuration ............................1767
Figure 168 Typical DHCP Configuration..................................................................1767
344 TNG 3122 Cross-DSLAM level vectoring................................1781
Figure 169 Cross-DSLAM configuration example ...................................................1782

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 59
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

60 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

List of tables
3 Master task index list ...................................................................75
Table 1 Non-Trouble Procedures (NTPs)...............................................................75
Table 2 Detailed Level Procedures (DLP) ..............................................................76
Table 3 Routine Task Procedure (RTP) .................................................................84
Table 4 Trouble Analysis Procedure (TAP) ............................................................84
Table 5 Training (TNG)...........................................................................................85
11 NTP 3100 Initial system configuration ......................................103
Table 6 System Managers....................................................................................103
13 NTP 3103 Configure equipment ................................................109
Table 7 Configure plug-in units.............................................................................109
31 NTP 3142 Download, activate, and commit ONT software .....165
Table 8 Software download failure alarms ...........................................................167
37 NTP 3148 Configure a GPON uplink .........................................183
Table 9 Procedures for configuring the GPON uplink ..........................................183
49 DLP 1129 Create xDSL profiles .................................................231
Table 10 xDSL profiles ...........................................................................................231
66 DLP 1205 Configure link related Ethernet OAM.......................309
Table 11 Link Related Ethernet OAM parameter descriptions ...............................309
91 DLP 1420 Configure multi-framing and CRC on an E1 line ....395
Table 12 Multi-framing and CRC configuration modes...........................................395
100 DLP 3111 Plan, re-plan, and unplan equipment.......................431
Table 13 Re-planning compatibility ........................................................................432
123 DLP 3172 Create a default operator profile ..............................537
Table 14 show equipment slot nt-b.........................................................................537
125 DLP 3177 Configure SFP downlink ports .................................553
Table 15 Faceplate numbers for SFP downlink ports.............................................553
126 DLP 3179 Configure system logging ........................................557
Table 16 Message type and log severity parameters.............................................558
140 DLP 3211 Configure SFP uplink ports ......................................645
Table 17 Faceplate numbers for SFP uplink ports .................................................645
154 DLP 3231 Manage the ports on the LT, NT/NTIO .....................731
Table 18 List of MAU Types ...................................................................................733
158 DLP 3236 Configure the enhanced system clock
synchronization ..........................................................................759
Table 19 NTR Clock sources..................................................................................760
Table 20 Default Quality Levels..............................................................................762
Table 21 Hierarchy of quality levels for ETSI .........................................................762
Table 22 Hierarchy of quality levels for ANSI .........................................................762

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 61
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

177 DLP 3255 Configure a port on an Ethernet LT .........................839


Table 23 List of MAU types ....................................................................................842
178 DLP 3259 Create ONT profiles...................................................845
Table 24 xDSL profiles ...........................................................................................845
180 DLP 3261 Configure an ONT .....................................................853
Table 25 Applicable XGS-PON planned ONU upstream rate versus
channel speed values..............................................................................854
211 DLP 3300 Set RSSI thresholds for EPON alarm
conditions....................................................................................987
Table 26 EPON ONT alarm conditions at a PON interface ....................................987
Table 27 EPON ONT alarm conditions at an ONT interface ..................................988
216 DLP 3305 Maintain the ONT software version control
table ...........................................................................................1007
Table 28 ONT software version control table .......................................................1008
Table 29 Directory structure of NT file system for ONT software .........................1008
221 DLP 3310 Configure an ONT for an EPON system ................1025
Table 30 EONT system capacity ..........................................................................1025
224 DLP 3313 Configure an Ethernet UNI......................................1041
Table 31 EPON Ethernet UNI system capacity ....................................................1042
272 DLP 3367 Configure DPoE system vCM SNMP, trap and
event management ...................................................................1243
Table 32 TLV-53...................................................................................................1245
Table 33 TLV-38...................................................................................................1245
Table 34 SNMP v1/v2c NMAccess mode:............................................................1246
Table 35 SNMPv1/v2/v3 Coexistence mode: .......................................................1246
280 DLP 3382 Configure a channel pair ........................................1277
Table 36 Standard channels definition as per G.989.2 and G.9807.
1 specifications ......................................................................................1277
Table 37 Definition of 10 default wavelength profiles ...........................................1278
294 DLP 3412 Enable or disable zero touch provisioning ...........1343
Table 38 Zero touch provisioning LED behavior and notification states...............1343
308 RTP 1103 Retrieve board temperature....................................1389
Table 39 Temperature information .......................................................................1389
311 RTP 3102 Retrieve remote inventory ......................................1397
Table 40 RI information ........................................................................................1397
320 TAP 1107 MELT.........................................................................1427
Table 41 Supported MELT Tests..........................................................................1427
Table 42 Wire combinations .................................................................................1436
Table 43 Reported results ....................................................................................1437
Table 44 Test unit definition .................................................................................1446
Table 45 Test type parameter requirements ........................................................1461
Table 46 Result values for the several MELT types .............................................1470
Table 47 Execution pre-conditions .......................................................................1474

62 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

Table 48 Group MELT test results example when force-measure parameter


enabled..................................................................................................1494
Table 49 Collective MELT test results example when force-
measure parameter is enabled..............................................................1494
324 TAP 3108 Integrated NBLT for MEGACO termination ...........1503
Table 50 4/Q.543..................................................................................................1512
Table 51 Allowed Type-High / Type Low parameter combinations ......................1519
Table 52 Test type parameter requirements ........................................................1524
Table 53 Default threshold values ........................................................................1526
Table 54 Result values .........................................................................................1533
Table 55 Overview................................................................................................1541
Table 56 Overview................................................................................................1542
Table 57 Feeding DC Voltage / DC Current Test .................................................1544
Table 58 Feeding DC Voltage / DC Current Test .................................................1545
Table 59 Feeding DC Voltage / DC Current Test .................................................1545
Table 60 Conditions for NBLT ..............................................................................1546
Table 61 Integrated NBLT to voice LT board Mapping.........................................1547
325 TAP 3109 Integrated NBLT for SIP termination .....................1585
Table 62 Integrated NBLT to voice LT board mapping.........................................1591
Table 63 Test unit definition .................................................................................1593
Table 64 Required NBLT parameters...................................................................1596
Table 65 NBLT output ..........................................................................................1599
Table 66 Overview of NBLT type port conditions .................................................1606
Table 67 Overview of ISDN PRA loopback type port conditions ..........................1607
Table 68 Line test management time per session................................................1611
Table 69 Line test time per NBLT.........................................................................1611
Table 70 NBLT type classification ........................................................................1614
Table 71 Threshold object applicability ................................................................1616
Table 72 Status values .........................................................................................1617
333 TNG 1107 xDSL parameters.....................................................1643
Table 73 xDSL service profile configuration parameters......................................1645
Table 74 xDSL spectrum profile configuration parameters ..................................1651
Table 75 NSC subcarrier values...........................................................................1657
Table 76 International amateur radio bands (HAM bands)...................................1658
Table 77 Constraints ............................................................................................1664
Table 78 Maximum value of MaxNomATP (non-overlapped operating
modes)...................................................................................................1666
Table 79 ADSL2+ PSD masks for Cabinet deployment .......................................1668
Table 80 VDSL1 DS/US PSD Shapes..................................................................1669
Table 81 VDSL2 DS/US PSD Shapes..................................................................1671
Table 82 VDSL1, VDSL2 RX US PSD Shapes ....................................................1674
Table 83 xDSL line status parameters and diagnostic modes .............................1693
Table 84 Multi-ADSL Operational Data over XDSL API. ......................................1697
Table 85 Line Current Initialization States............................................................1699
334 TNG 1108 SHDSL parameters..................................................1701
Table 86 Operating Modes ...................................................................................1703
Table 87 Spectral Profile ......................................................................................1704

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 63
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

Table 88 Wire Mode .............................................................................................1704


Table 89 Support Management from STU-R........................................................1705
Table 90 Regional Setting ....................................................................................1705
Table 91 Minimum Requested Data Rate ............................................................1706
Table 92 Maximum Bitrate....................................................................................1707
Table 93 Worst Case Downstream Target Noise Margin .....................................1708
Table 94 Current Case Downstream Target Noise Margin ..................................1709
Table 95 Worst Case Upstream Target Noise Margin..........................................1710
Table 96 Current Case Upstream Target Noise Margin .......................................1711
Table 97 Line Probe Enable .................................................................................1712
Table 98 TC-PAM modulation selection ...............................................................1712
Table 99 EFM handshake selection .....................................................................1712
Table 100 Cross-Talk Cancellation ........................................................................1713
Table 101 Bonding Rate Control Mode ..................................................................1713
Table 102 Minimum Requested Data Link 1 ..........................................................1714
Table 103 Maximum Requested Data Link 1 .........................................................1714
Table 104 Minimum Requested Data Link 2 ..........................................................1715
Table 105 Maximum Requested Data Link 2 .........................................................1715
Table 106 Minimum Requested Data Link 3 ..........................................................1716
Table 107 Maximum Requested Data Link 3 .........................................................1716
Table 108 Minimum Requested Data Link 4 ..........................................................1717
Table 109 Maximum Requested Data Link 4 .........................................................1717
Table 110 TC-PAM Selection Link 1 ......................................................................1718
Table 111 TC-PAM Selection Link 2 ......................................................................1718
Table 112 TC-PAM Selection Link 3 ......................................................................1718
Table 113 TC-PAM Selection Link 4 ......................................................................1719
Table 114 Loop Attenuation Threshold ..................................................................1719
Table 115 SNR Margin Threshold ..........................................................................1720
Table 116 Loopback Timeout .................................................................................1720
Table 117 Loopback Configuration.........................................................................1721
Table 118 Power Backoff Mode .............................................................................1721
Table 119 Soft Restart............................................................................................1722
Table 120 Span State.............................................................................................1722
Table 121 Detected Units .......................................................................................1723
Table 122 Inventoried Units....................................................................................1723
Table 123 Configured Units....................................................................................1724
Table 124 Span Status ...........................................................................................1725
Table 125 Wire Pair Assignment ............................................................................1726
Table 126 Unit DC Powering ..................................................................................1727
Table 127 Segment Termination Status .................................................................1727
Table 128 Loopback State......................................................................................1728
Table 129 SNR Margin ...........................................................................................1729
Table 130 Loop Attenuation ...................................................................................1729
Table 131 Power Backoff Level..............................................................................1729
Table 132 Tip Ring Reversal ..................................................................................1730
Table 133 Power Backoff Status ............................................................................1730
Table 134 Current data rate ...................................................................................1731
Table 135 Activation state ......................................................................................1731
Table 136 Activation failure ....................................................................................1732

64 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

335 TNG 1116 Link related Ethernet OAM (EFM OAM).................1733


Table 137 Link Related Ethernet OAM parameter descriptions .............................1734
336 TNG 1119 vMAC ........................................................................1735
Table 138 DSL/Eth vMAC format for data traffic forwarding ..................................1737
Table 139 xPON vMAC format for data traffic forwarding ......................................1738
338 TNG 1121 xDSL bonding..........................................................1745
Table 140 Bonding group configuration methods...................................................1750
Table 141 xDSL bonding alarms ............................................................................1751
341 TNG 3104 DHCP relay agent configuration ............................1767
Table 142 DHCP parameter descriptions...............................................................1768
342 TNG 3106 Specifying 7330 ISAM FTTN expansion units
using the CLI .............................................................................1769
Table 143 Available SFP ports ...............................................................................1771
Table 144 SB-REM LT slot designations for CLI....................................................1772
343 TNG 3115 Slot Numbering Schemes.......................................1775
Table 145 Translation Table for NFXS-A ...............................................................1776
Table 146 Translation Table for NFXS-B ...............................................................1776
Table 147 Translation Table for NFXS-D ...............................................................1777
Table 148 Translation Table for NFXS-G ...............................................................1778
Table 149 Translation Table for NFXS-E ...............................................................1779
Table 150 Translation Table for NFXS-F................................................................1779
345 TNG 3123 ONT mapping file ....................................................1791
Table 151 Sample ONT Mapping File ....................................................................1791
346 Configuration example values.................................................1795
Table 152 Equipment used in Config#1 .................................................................1795
Table 153 Equipment used in Config#2 .................................................................1796
Table 154 Equipment used in Config#4 .................................................................1796
Table 155 xDSL profiles .........................................................................................1797
Table 156 VLANs ...................................................................................................1797
Table 157 VDSL lines.............................................................................................1798
Table 158 ADSL lines.............................................................................................1798
Table 159 SDPs .....................................................................................................1799
Table 160 VPRN Services......................................................................................1799
Table 161 VPLS Services.......................................................................................1799
Table 162 IES Services ..........................................................................................1800
Table 163 EPIPE Services .....................................................................................1801

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 65
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

66 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD Preface
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

1 Preface
This preface provides general information about the documentation set for the
7302 Intelligent Services Access Manager (7302 ISAM), the 7330 Intelligent
Services Access Manager Fiber to the Node (7330 ISAM FTTN) and the 7360
Intelligent Services Access Manager (7360 ISAM FX).

1.1 Scope
This documentation set provides information about safety, features and functionality,
ordering, hardware installation and maintenance, CLI and TL1 commands, and
software upgrade and migration procedures for the current release.

1.2 Audience
This documentation set is intended for planners, administrators, operators, and
maintenance personnel involved in installing, upgrading, or maintaining the 7302
ISAM, the 7330 ISAM FTTN or the 7360 ISAM FX.

1.3 Required knowledge


Readers must be familiar with general telecommunications principles.

1.4 Product naming


When the term “ISAM” is used alone, the 7302 ISAM, the 7330 ISAM FTTN and the
7360 ISAM FX are meant. If a feature is valid for only one of the products, the
applicability will be explicitly stated.

1.5 Documents
Refer to the Product Information document for your product to see a list of all relevant
customer documents and their part numbers.

1.6 Acronymns and initialisms


The expansions and optional descriptions of most acronyms and initialisms appear
in the glossary which is included in the Glossary document.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 67
Preface Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

1.7 Safety information


For safety information, see the Safety Manual for your product.

1.8 Special information


The following are examples of how special information is presented in this document.

Danger — Danger indicates that the described activity or


situation may result in serious personal injury or death; for
example, high voltage or electric shock hazards.

Warning — Warning indicates that the described activity or


situation may, or will, cause equipment damage or serious
performance problems.

Caution — Caution indicates that the described activity or


situation may, or will, cause service interruption.

Note — A note provides information that is, or may be, of


special interest.

1.9 Release notes


Be sure to refer to the release notes (such as the Customer Release Notes or Priority
Package Release Note) issued for software loads of your product before you install
or use the product. The release notes provide important information about the
software load.

68 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD Introduction
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

2 Introduction
2.1 Introduction

2.2 How to use this document

2.3 Configuration examples

2.1 Introduction
This document provides instructions on CLI operation and maintenance tasks and
procedures for the Nokia 7302 ISAM, the 7330 ISAM FTTN and the 7360 ISAM.
These tasks and procedures are identical for the 7302 ISAM, the 7330 ISAM FTTN
and the 7360 ISAM unless specified otherwise.
Throughout the document, the 7302 ISAM, the 7330 ISAM FTTN and the 7360 ISAM
will be referred to as the Network Element (NE).
See the CLI Commands for FD 100/320Gbps NT and FX NT document for more
detailed information about the CLI command syntax.

2.2 How to use this document


This document follows the task-oriented practice (TOP). The TOP method is a
documentation system that uses different types of layers, or documents, to describe
the installation, operations, and maintenance of telecommunications equipment and
software. Most layers in the TOP system provide step-by-step instructions for the
completion of a specific task or procedure.
A TOP document is structured so that experienced and less experienced users can
effectively use the material to perform work assignments. Less experienced users
can refer to detailed procedures to complete a task. Experienced users can bypass
detailed procedures and use only the level of information that they need.

2.2.1 TOP layers


TOP documentation is constructed in layers, which provide the user with easy
access to any point within the task description. This guide may contain any of the
following layers:
• Non-Trouble Procedure (NTP)
• Detailed Level Procedure (DLP)
• Routine Task Procedure (RTP)

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 69
Introduction Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

• Trouble Analysis Procedure (TAP)


• Training (TNG)

2.2.1.1 Non-trouble procedure (NTP)


An NTP describes how to perform a task, such as how to save a system after it has
been installed, turn up a system for service, or maintain a system according to a
maintenance plan. NTPs are made up of steps that often refer to DLPs or TNGs.
Less experienced users, or experienced users who need more information, can go
to the DLPs for detailed procedural and safety information, and TNGs for supporting
information. If users go to the referenced DLP or TNG, they must return to the NTP
to continue the procedure.

2.2.1.2 Detailed level procedure (DLP)


A DLP contains detailed steps that describe how to perform a task. In addition to
step-by-step information, a DLP contains any tables or illustrations that may be
required to perform the task.
DLPs are typically referenced from an NTP, always referenced from the IXL, and
sometimes referenced from other DLPs. When a DLP is referenced from another
layer, users must return to the layer at which the DLP was referenced to continue the
procedure.

2.2.1.3 Routine task procedure (RTP)


An RTP describes how to perform a routine maintenance task.

2.2.1.4 Trouble analysis procedure (TAP)


A TAP describes how to identify and clear trouble in the system. TAPs are made up
of step-by-step instructions. For less experienced users, or experienced users who
need more information, some tasks provide a reference to a DLP or TNG. If users go
to the referenced DLP or TNG, they must return to the TAP to continue the
procedure.

2.2.1.5 Training (TNG)


A TNG contains supplementary information about a task or procedure. A TNG might
refer to a DLP or other document. If users go to the referenced document, they need
to return to the TNG to read the remaining information.

70 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD Introduction
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

2.2.2 Step details


NTPs, DLPs, RTPs and TAPs use procedural steps and decision steps. Procedural
steps provide instructions, and decision steps provide a go-to choice.
Procedural steps may contain notations that refer to additional information such as
tables, figures, examples and other TOP layers. For example, a step in an NTP might
refer to a DLP.
Key information required to complete a step is shown at the beginning of the step.
More detailed information, which can be accessed according to experience level, is
provided at the end of the step, as shown in the example below:
“Reconnect the power feeds; see DLP 106.”
The completion of a specific task or procedure is indicated as follows:
“STOP. This procedure is complete.”

2.2.3 Procedures with options or substeps


When there are options in a procedure, they are identified by letters. When there are
required substeps in a procedure, they are identified by Roman numerals.

Procedure 1 Example of options in a procedure


At step 1, you can choose option a or b. At step 2, you must do what the step indicates.

1 This step offers two options. You must choose one of the following:

a This is one option.

b This is another option.

2 You must perform this step.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 71
Introduction Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

Procedure 2 Example of required substeps in a procedure


At step 1, you must perform a series of substeps within a step. At step 2, you must do what the
step indicates.

1 This step has a series of substeps that you must perform to complete the step. You must
perform the following substeps:

i This is the first substep.

ii This is the second substep.

iii This is the third substep.

2 You must perform this step.

2.3 Configuration examples


Configuration examples are provided in the DLPs.
Different rack configurations are used in the examples. These are indicated with
Config#1, and Config#2.
Appendix 346 “Configuration example values” gives an overview of the different
configurations and values used in the DLP configuration examples.

72 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD Index List (IXL)
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

Index List (IXL)


3 Master task index list

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 73
Index List (IXL) Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

74 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD Master task index list
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

3 Master task index list


Table 1 lists the detailed level procedures and corresponding NTP (chapter) numbers described
in this guide.

Table 1 Non-Trouble Procedures (NTPs)

Title NTP chapter

NTP 1118 Monitor performance and view configuration NTP 4

NTP 1119 Modify xDSL services NTP 5

NTP 1124 Maintain the system NTP 6

NTP 1126 Manage system logging NTP 7

NTP 1130 Configure link related Ethernet OAM NTP 8

NTP 1132 Configure connectivity fault management NTP 9

NTP 1157 Configure an E1 line NTP 10

NTP 3100 Initial system configuration NTP 11

NTP 3101 Execute script files NTP 12

NTP 3103 Configure equipment NTP 13

NTP 3104 Configure a VLAN cross-connect without MPLS at the network side NTP 14

NTP 3105 Configure an iBridge VLAN without MPLS at the network side NTP 15

NTP 3108 Configure services NTP 16


NTP 3114 Perform equipment repairs NTP 17

NTP 3115 Monitor alarms NTP 18

NTP 3116 Perform software management NTP 19


NTP 3117 Modify system parameters NTP 20

NTP 3120 Troubleshooting the network NTP 21

NTP 3127 Configure SHDSL NTP 22

NTP 3134 Configure a VPRN or IES NTP 23

NTP 3135 Configure an iBridge VLAN with MPLS at the network side NTP 24

NTP 3136 Configure a VLAN cross-connect using MPLS at the network side NTP 25

NTP 3137 Configure PW redundancy NTP 26

NTP 3138 Configure full business bridging NTP 27

NTP 3139 Manage and monitor EPON alarms NTP 28


NTP 3140 Monitor performance of EPON system NTP 29

NTP 3141 Configure IGMP and multicast for an EPON ONT NTP 30

NTP 3142 Download, activate, and commit ONT software NTP 31

(1 of 2)

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 75
Master task index list Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

Title NTP chapter


NTP 3143 Configure a VoIP service for EPON NTP 32

NTP 3144 Configure an APIPE service NTP 33

NTP 3145 Download and install an application on the AI platform NTP 34


NTP 3146 Manage DPoE links to OAM (EPON) NTP 35

NTP 3147 Configure DPoE NTP 36

NTP 3148 Configure a GPON uplink NTP 37

NTP 3150 Configure NG-PON2 NTP 38

NTP 3152 Modify system scaling mode NTP 39

NTP 3154 Configure zero touch provisioning NTP 40

NTP 3155 Manage PON upstream bandwidth utilization NTP 41

NTP 3156 Configure XGS-PON DLP 42

NTP 3159 Configure an interface port DLP 43

NTP 3160 Configure a dynamic VLAN assignment in PoL DLP 44

(2 of 2)

Table 2 lists the detailed level procedures and corresponding DLP (chapter) numbers described
in this guide.

Table 2 Detailed Level Procedures (DLP)

Title DLP chapter

DLP 1100 Set up a local CLI or TL1 session DLP 45


DLP 1117 Configure a VLAN on the LT for C-VLAN network cross-connect DLP 46

DLP 1118 Configure a network VLAN on the LT for S-VLAN cross-connect DLP 47

DLP 1120 Configure a network VLAN on the LT for C-iBridge DLP 48


DLP 1129 Create xDSL profiles DLP 49

DLP 1130 Configure xDSL bonding DLP 50

DLP 1134 Configure QoS DLP 51

DLP 1145 Configure 802.1x DLP 52

DLP 1146 Configure PPPoE relay on LT DLP 53

DLP 1152 Reboot the system DLP 54


DLP 1159 Manage OSWP DLP 55

DLP 1163 Modifying xDSL profiles DLP 56

DLP 1170 Configure SSH and SFTP DLP 57

DLP 1173 Switch a user from ADSL to VDSL and vice versa DLP 58

DLP 1174 Create an xDSL IPoA user and add this user to a VLAN for C-VLAN cross-connect DLP 59

(1 of 9)

76 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD Master task index list
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

Title DLP chapter


DLP 1187 Configure global VLAN parameters DLP 60

DLP 1188 Configure custom PSD points DLP 61

DLP 1189 Configure VDSL2 virtual noise values DLP 62


DLP 1201 Configure protocol tracing DLP 63

DLP 1202 Configure QoS threshold crossing alerts DLP 64

DLP 1203 Configure general security settings DLP 65

DLP 1205 Configure link related Ethernet OAM DLP 66

DLP 1206 Configure an xDSL DPBO profile DLP 67

DLP 1207 Modify an xDSL DPBO profile DLP 68

DLP 1208 Configure xDSL power back off DLP 69

DLP 1215 Configure the impulse noise sensor on an xDSL line DLP 70

DLP 1217 Configure the xDSL overrule data DLP 71

DLP 1221 Manage troubleshooting counters on LT DLP 72


DLP 1225 Configure the p-bit counter on a VLAN port DLP 73

DLP 1232 Create an xDSL IPoA user and add this user to a VLAN for iBridge DLP 74

DLP 1257 Configure a line with an xDSL RTX profile DLP 75

DLP 1258 Modify an xDSL RTX profile DLP 76

DLP 1291 Configure a VDSL2 vectoring control entity profile and associate it to a board DLP 77

DLP 1292 Modify a Vectoring Control Entity profile DLP 78

DLP 1295 Configure a line with an xDSL vectoring profile DLP 79

DLP 1296 Modify an xDSL vectoring profile DLP 80

DLP 1297 Delete an xDSL vectoring profile DLP 81


DLP 1298 Monitor xDSL vectoring lines DLP 82

DLP 1330 Initiate a connectivity fault management test DLP 83

DLP 1336 Configure fallback for xDSL vectoring DLP 84

DLP 1347 Configure a priority regeneration profile DLP 85

DLP 1358 Configure a bonding group with a group RTX profile DLP 86

DLP 1380 Configure fallback for xDSL bonding vectoring DLP 87

DLP 1386 Configure xDSL SOS profiles DLP 88

DLP 1404 Configure an xDSL legacy UPBO profile DLP 89

DLP 1419 Configure an E1 line interface DLP 90

DLP 1420 Configure multi-framing and CRC on an E1 line DLP 91

DLP 1421 Configure operator login retry policy DLP 92

DLP 3101 Create operator profiles and instances DLP 93

DLP 3103 Configure system parameters DLP 94

(2 of 9)

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 77
Master task index list Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

Title DLP chapter


DLP 3105 Configure link aggregation usage DLP 95

DLP 3107 Manage OSPF DLP 96

DLP 3108 Manage RIP DLP 97


DLP 3109 Configure SNMP and trap management DLP 98

DLP 3110 Manage alarms DLP 99

DLP 3111 Plan, re-plan, and unplan equipment DLP 100

DLP 3112 Lock and unlock equipment DLP 101

DLP 3113 Configure the equipment DLP 102

DLP 3114 Configure NT redundancy DLP 103

DLP 3124 Create an xDSL/native Ethernet user and add this user to a VLAN on the LT DLP 105

DLP 3119 Configure a VLAN on the LT for S+C-VLAN cross-connect DLP 104

DLP 3132 Configure filtering on the NT DLP 106

DLP 3136 Configure the multicast service in the system DLP 107
DLP 3137 Configure a multicast v-VPLS DLP 108

DLP 3138 Configure a multicast channel DLP 109

DLP 3140 Configure DHCP relay agent in router mode DLP 110

DLP 3142 Configure the security domain DLP 111

DLP 3144 Configure RADIUS DLP 112

DLP 3147 Configure PPPoX cross-connect DLP 113

DLP 3151 Shut down and restart the NT DLP 114

DLP 3153 Shut down and restart individual equipment DLP 115

DLP 3154 Create a snapshot alarm table DLP 116


DLP 3155 Monitor alarms DLP 117

DLP 3157 Manage the IHub database DLP 118

DLP 3164 Ping another host DLP 119

DLP 3165 Perform a traceroute action DLP 120

DLP 3167 Script files DLP 121

DLP 3171 Enable EMS management DLP 122

DLP 3172 Create a default operator profile DLP 123

DLP 3176 Configure performance monitoring DLP 124

DLP 3177 Configure SFP downlink ports DLP 125

DLP 3179 Configure system logging DLP 126

DLP 3180 Configure static MAC addresses DLP 127

DLP 3181 Configure operator authentication using RADIUS DLP 128

DLP 3182 Configure SHDSL DLP 129

(3 of 9)

78 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD Master task index list
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

Title DLP chapter


DLP 3183 Configure IMA on SHDSL spans DLP 130

DLP 3190 Configure threshold crossing alerts DLP 131

DLP 3195 Configure general bridge parameters DLP 132


DLP 3196 Configure voice SIP DLP 133

DLP 3197 View port configuration and operational data on LT DLP 134

DLP 3198 Configure the multicast service on a user port DLP 135

DLP 3199 Configure QoS on the IHub DLP 136

DLP 3200 Configure Spanning Tree on the IHub DLP 137

DLP 3209 Configure vMAC DLP 138

DLP 3210 View the status of various system parameters DLP 139

DLP 3211 Configure SFP uplink ports DLP 140

DLP 3212 Create an IP user/subnet DLP 141

DLP 3213 Enable OAM counters DLP 142


DLP 3214 Configure connectivity fault management DLP 143

DLP 3216 Configure voice Megaco DLP 144

DLP 3219 Forced NT switchover DLP 145

DLP 3220 Manage the CDE profile DLP 146

DLP 3223 Configure IHub port mirroring DLP 147

DLP 3224 Change shelf mode DLP 148

DLP 3226 Manage IS-IS DLP 149

DLP 3227 Create a customer DLP 150

DLP 3228 Create and update a VPRN or an IES service DLP 151
DLP 3229 Configure an IP interface and SAP on a VPRN or an IES DLP 152

DLP 3230 Configure v-VPLS DLP 153

DLP 3231 Manage the ports on the LT, NT/NTIO DLP 154

DLP 3233 Configure an SAP on a v-VPLS DLP 155

DLP 3234 Configure a VLAN and IP address for ISAM management access DLP 156

DLP 3235 Configure a security access policy to NT OBC on IHub DLP 157

DLP 3236 Configure the enhanced system clock synchronization DLP 158

DLP 3237 Manage BGP DLP 159

DLP 3238 Configure the internal bidirectional speed for the NT-LT link DLP 160

DLP 3239 Manage LDP DLP 161

DLP 3240 Configure VPLS DLP 162

DLP 3241 Configure an EPIPE DLP 163

DLP 3242 Configure SDP DLP 164

(4 of 9)

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 79
Master task index list Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

Title DLP chapter


DLP 3243 Configure an SAP on a VPLS DLP 165

DLP 3244 Configure an SAP on an EPIPE DLP 166

DLP 3245 Configure an SDP binding on a VPLS DLP 167


DLP 3246 Configure an SDP binding on an EPIPE DLP 168

DLP 3247 Configure a static LSP DLP 169

DLP 3248 Configure an endpoint on a VPLS DLP 170

DLP 3249 Associate an SDP binding with an endpoint of a VPLS DLP 171

DLP 3250 Configure an IP interface on top of a VPLS DLP 172

DLP 3251 Configure an IP interface on the base router DLP 173

DLP 3252 Configure a multicast VPLS DLP 174

DLP 3253 Configure the third-party equipment management port on the 7356 FD REM DLP 175

DLP 3254 Configure L3 multicasting DLP 176

DLP 3255 Configure a port on an Ethernet LT DLP 177


DLP 3259 Create ONT profiles DLP 178

DLP 3260 Configure GPON DLP 179

DLP 3261 Configure an ONT DLP 180

DLP 3262 Create a GPON xDSL user DLP 181

DLP 3263 Create a GPON Ethernet user DLP 182

DLP 3264 Create a GPON CES pseudowire service DLP 183

DLP 3265 Create a GPON VoIP service DLP 184

DLP 3266 Create a GPON video service DLP 185

DLP 3267 GPON performance monitoring DLP 186


DLP 3268 GPON port mirroring DLP 187

DLP 3269 Configure virtual noise values for ONT VDSL2 DLP 188

DLP 3270 Configure spanning tree on the NELT-B LT DLP 189

DLP 3271 Configure link aggregation on the NELT-B LT DLP 190

DLP 3272 Configure VDSL2 DPBO parameters for ONT VDSL2 DLP 191

DLP 3273 External packet forwarding DLP 192

DLP 3274 Create a GPON virtual Ethernet interface point (VEIP) DLP 193

DLP 3275 Create a GPON VoIP service using an IP host DLP 194

DLP 3276 Manage PON troubleshooting counters on the LT DLP 195

DLP 3279 Create a multicast VLAN translation entry DLP 196

DLP 3280 Configure a network VLAN on the LT for S+C-iBridge DLP 197

DLP 3281 Configure VEIP-style VoIP service DLP 198

DLP 3282 Configure the fairness SLA on the NELT-B LT DLP 199

(5 of 9)

80 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD Master task index list
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

Title DLP chapter


DLP 3283 Troubleshooting congestion on the NELT-B LT DLP 200

DLP 3284 Enable the hairpinning feature for voice services DLP 201

DLP 3285 Configure SNTP proxy on a VLAN DLP 202


DLP 3286 Configure upstream queue at the ONT DLP 203

DLP 3287 Configure a VLAN on the LT for S-iBridge DLP 204

DLP 3288 Configure an S+C-iBridge on the PON LT DLP 205

DLP 3289 Configure downstream remote queue at the ONT DLP 206

DLP 3290 Configure VLAN port level upstream queues on GPON UNI DLP 207

DLP 3293 Delete a vectoring control entity profile DLP 208

DLP 3294 Configure or modify the mapping between the VP board and the SLV LT boards DLP 209

DLP 3299 Set and view notification codes for alarm and event conditions DLP 210

DLP 3300 Set RSSI thresholds for EPON alarm conditions DLP 211

DLP 3301 Monitor current EPON alarms DLP 212


DLP 3302 Download software to an ONT in planned mode (EPON) DLP 213

DLP 3303 Download software to an ONT in automatic mode (EPON) DLP 214

DLP 3304 Download software to an ONT in manual mode (EPON) DLP 215

DLP 3305 Maintain the ONT software version control table DLP 216

DLP 3306 Retrieve ONT software download status DLP 217

DLP 3307 Configure traffic profiles for ONT UNIs DLP 218

DLP 3308 Retrieve default queue profile DLP 219

DLP 3309 Configure an EPON DLP 220

DLP 3310 Configure an ONT for an EPON system DLP 221


DLP 3311 Modify ONT management channels DLP 222

DLP 3312 Modify the LLID for an ONT DLP 223

DLP 3313 Configure an Ethernet UNI DLP 224

DLP 3314 Configure an ONT Ethernet UNI for VLAN trunk, translation, or aggregation forwarding DLP 225

DLP 3315 Configure multicast VLANs for an ONT Ethernet UNI DLP 226

DLP 3316 Apply traffic filter to ONT Ethernet UNI DLP 227

DLP 3317 Configure a VoIP common table for an EPON ONT DLP 228

DLP 3318 Configure a digit map profile for a SIP user agent DLP 229

DLP 3319 Configure the VoIP SIP user agent for EPON ONTs DLP 230

DLP 3320 Configure VoIP H.248 media gateway table for EPON ONTs DLP 231

DLP 3321 Configure VoIP POTS line for EPON ONTs DLP 232

DLP 3322 Retrieve voice operation information for EPON ONTs DLP 233

DLP 3323 Enable and retrieve EPON PM counters DLP 234

(6 of 9)

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 81
Master task index list Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

Title DLP chapter


DLP 3324 Report optical status between EPON OLT and EPON ONT DLP 235

DLP 3325 Configure PON port protection DLP 236

DLP 3326 Create a GPON HPNA service DLP 237


DLP 3327 Create a TR-069 management server DLP 238

DLP 3328 Create a GPON SNMP service DLP 239

DLP 3329 Configure an APIPE service DLP 240

DLP 3331 Create a multicast PON VLAN translation entry DLP 241

DLP 3332 Set RSSI thresholds on NT, NTIO, and LT PON SFP interfaces DLP 242

DLP 3333 Retrieve SFP/XFP RSSI configuration data DLP 243

DLP 3334 Enable an application intelligence platform on the ISAM DLP 244

DLP 3335 Download and install an application on the AI platform DLP 245

DLP 3337 Configure the BCMP client (EPON) DLP 246

DLP 3338 Configure RMS global parameters (EPON) DLP 247


DLP 3339 Configure dot1q Ethertype per v-VPLS DLP 248

DLP 3341 Perform a PPPoE emulation test on a UNI port DLP 249

DLP 3342 Configure E1/T1/DS1 service with 2E1/T1 SFP DLP 250

DLP 3344 Configure a DPoE service using CTC, TK, or DPoE links to OAM (EPON) DLP 252

DLP 3345 Display current alarm statistics using DPoE links to OAM (EPON) DLP 253

DLP 3346 Enable VP-LT auto-discovery for system level vectoring DLP 254

DLP 3348 Disable VP-LT auto-discovery for single host system level vectoring DLP 255

DLP 3349 Troubleshooting counters on the REM expansion link DLP 256

DLP 3350 Switch users from VDSL2 non-vectored to VDSL2 vectored DLP 257
DLP 3351 Create a native Ethernet/NNI user and add this user to a VLAN on the LT DLP 258

DLP 3353 Configure DPoE ISAM management access DLP 259

DLP 3354 Configure DPoE general parameters DLP 260

DLP 3355 Configure a DPoE MEF service DLP 261

DLP 3356 Configure a DPoE IP (HSD) service DLP 262

DLP 3357 GPON ONT loop detection DLP 263

DLP 3359 Configure a static cable modem service DLP 264

DLP 3360 Configure DPoE authentication parameters DLP 265

DLP 3361 Ping from an ONT for VoIP DLP 266

DLP 3362 Create a GPON MoCA service DLP 267

DLP 3363 Configure IP(HSD) serving group selection per SVLAN DLP 268

DLP 3364 Configure IP(HSD) ARP downstream flooding DLP 269


DLP 3365 Controlling broadcast and secure forwarding on an iBridge and Vlan CC DLP 270

(7 of 9)

82 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD Master task index list
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

Title DLP chapter


DLP 3366 Configure DPoE system SNMP, CMTS event and trap and management DLP 271

DLP 3367 Configure DPoE system vCM SNMP, trap and event management DLP 272

DLP 3369 Manage P-bit troubleshooting counters on the LT DLP 273


DLP 3373 Configure QoS for MEF service over DPoE network DLP 275

DLP 3374 Configure an E-Line service over DPoE network DLP 276

DLP 3375 Configure an E-LAN service over DPoE network DLP 277

DLP 3376 Upgrade an E-LAN service over DPoE network DLP 278

DLP 3381 Configure a channel group and a subchannel group in the OLT DLP 279

DLP 3382 Configure a channel pair DLP 280

DLP 3383 Allocate a channel pair to a channel group and a subchannel group DLP 281

DLP 3384 Configure L2 DHCP relay DLP 282

DLP 3385 Configure TACACs+ DLP 283

DLP 3387 Configure NG-PON2 performance monitoring DLP 284


DLP 3391 Configure GPON/NG-PON2 uplink connectivity fault management DLP 286

DLP 3400 Configure GPON VDSL2 custom PSD shape DLP 285

DLP 3401 Configure DPoE turbo mode DLP 287

DLP 3402 Configure system scaling mode DLP 288

DLP 3404 Configure VLAN TPID DLP 289

DLP 3405 Configure DPoE lease query DLP 290

DLP 3408 Configure L2 DHCPv6 relay DLP 291

DLP 3410 Configure ONT system parameters DLP 292

DLP 3411 Configure a NAPT service DLP 293


DLP 3412 Enable or disable zero touch provisioning DLP 294

DLP 3413 Configure maximum ranging ONT number DLP 295

DLP 3414 Configure maximum TCONTS per frame DLP 296

DLP 3415 Clear alarm of ranging number mismatch DLP 297

DLP 3416 Review trap and log bandwidth per PON/channel-pair changes DLP 298

DLP 3417 Display QoS interface bandwidth DLP 299

DLP 3418 Manage the LSA SIP server DLP 300

DLP 3424 Configure an IPDR service DLP 301

DLP 3425 Configure a shared SIP termination subscriber line DLP 302

DLP 3426 Configure a DPoE multicast service DLP 303

DLP 3428 Configure a DPoE platform for MEF service auto-provision DLP 304

DLP 3430 Configure a port on a VDSL LT DLP 305


DLP 3431 Configure RADIUS server in Linux DLP 306

(8 of 9)

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 83
Master task index list Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

Title DLP chapter


DLP 3432 Configure a shared subscriber line for 2 H.248 POTS terminations DLP 307

(9 of 9)

Table 3 lists the routine task procedures and corresponding DLP (chapter) numbers described in
this guide.

Table 3 Routine Task Procedure (RTP)

Title RTP chapter

RTP 1103 Retrieve board temperature RTP 308

RTP 3100 Backup the configuration RTP 309

RTP 3101 Restore the configuration RTP 310


RTP 3102 Retrieve remote inventory RTP 311

RTP 3104 Backup the IHub and DPoE database RTP 312

RTP 3105 Restore the IHub and DPoE database RTP 313

RTP 3106 Backup an MSO DPoE configuration in CLI text format file RTP 314

RTP 3107 Restore an MSO DPoE configuration in CLI text format file RTP 315

RTP 3108 Detect DPoE rogue ONUs RTP 316

Table 4 lists the trouble analysis procedures and corresponding DLP (chapter) numbers described
in this guide.

Table 4 Trouble Analysis Procedure (TAP)

Title TAP chapter

TAP 1101 F5 loopback test TAP 317

TAP 1103 Single ended line testing TAP 318

TAP 1105 Dual-ended line testing TAP 319

TAP 1107 MELT TAP 320

TAP 1112 Enable/disable EFM OAM remote loopback TAP 321


TAP 3102 Equipment repair TAP 322

TAP 3104 Fault isolation and troubleshooting TAP 323

TAP 3108 Integrated NBLT for MEGACO termination TAP 324

TAP 3109 Integrated NBLT for SIP termination TAP 325

TAP 3110 Enable or disable OTDR for PON TAP 326

TAP 3111 GPON Rogue ONT TAP 327

TAP 3113 EPON Rogue ONT TAP 328

(1 of 2)

84 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD Master task index list
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

Title TAP chapter


TAP 3114 Initiate and release GPON CES UNI loopback TAP 329

TAP 3115 Detect Alien ONTs TAP 330

TAP 3116 Configure GPON PON range mode TAP 331

(2 of 2)

Table 5 lists the detailed level procedures and corresponding NTP (chapter) numbers described
in this guide.

Table 5 Training (TNG)

Title TNG chapter

TNG 1105 Overall software packages TNG 332


TNG 1107 xDSL parameters TNG 333

TNG 1108 SHDSL parameters TNG 334

TNG 1116 Link related Ethernet OAM (EFM OAM) TNG 335

TNG 1119 vMAC TNG 336

TNG 1120 VLAN translation TNG 337

TNG 1121 xDSL bonding TNG 338

TNG 1124 Planned hardware resources TNG 339


TNG 3101 GPON QoS configuration TNG 340

TNG 3104 DHCP relay agent configuration TNG 341

TNG 3106 Specifying 7330 ISAM FTTN expansion units using the CLI TNG 342
TNG 3115 Slot Numbering Schemes TNG 343

TNG 3122 Cross-DSLAM level vectoring TNG 344

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 85
Master task index list Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

86 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD Non-Trouble Procedures (NTP)
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

Non-Trouble Procedures (NTP)


4 NTP 1118 Monitor performance and view configuration

5 NTP 1119 Modify xDSL services

6 NTP 1124 Maintain the system

7 NTP 1126 Manage system logging

8 NTP 1130 Configure link related Ethernet OAM

9 NTP 1132 Configure connectivity fault management

10 NTP 1157 Configure an E1 line

11 NTP 3100 Initial system configuration

12 NTP 3101 Execute script files

13 NTP 3103 Configure equipment

14 NTP 3104 Configure a VLAN cross-connect without MPLS at the


network side

15 NTP 3105 Configure an iBridge VLAN without MPLS at the


network side

16 NTP 3108 Configure services

17 NTP 3114 Perform equipment repairs

18 NTP 3115 Monitor alarms

19 NTP 3116 Perform software management

20 NTP 3117 Modify system parameters

21 NTP 3120 Troubleshooting the network

22 NTP 3127 Configure SHDSL

23 NTP 3134 Configure a VPRN or IES

24 NTP 3135 Configure an iBridge VLAN with MPLS at the network


side

25 NTP 3136 Configure a VLAN cross-connect using MPLS at the

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 87
Non-Trouble Procedures (NTP) Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

network side

26 NTP 3137 Configure PW redundancy

27 NTP 3138 Configure full business bridging

28 NTP 3139 Manage and monitor EPON alarms

29 NTP 3140 Monitor performance of EPON system

30 NTP 3141 Configure IGMP and multicast for an EPON ONT

31 NTP 3142 Download, activate, and commit ONT software

32 NTP 3143 Configure a VoIP service for EPON

33 NTP 3144 Configure an APIPE service

34 NTP 3145 Download and install an application on the AI platform

35 NTP 3146 Manage DPoE links to OAM (EPON)

36 NTP 3147 Configure DPoE

37 NTP 3148 Configure a GPON uplink

38 NTP 3150 Configure NG-PON2

39 NTP 3152 Modify system scaling mode

40 NTP 3154 Configure zero touch provisioning

41 NTP 3155 Manage PON upstream bandwidth utilization

42 NTP 3156 Configure XGS-PON

43 NTP 3159 Configure an interface port

44 NTP 3160 Configure a dynamic VLAN assignment in PoL

88 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 1118 Monitor performance and view
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT configuration

4 NTP 1118 Monitor performance


and view configuration
4.1 Purpose
This procedure list the procedures that can be used for:

• Performance Monitoring (PM)


• viewing the configuration and operational data of a port

4.2 Procedure
The following tasks can be performed:

1 Configure the Threshold Crossing Alert (TCA); see DLP 131.

2 Enable the Operations and Maintenance (OAM) counters; see DLP 142.

3 Manage the troubleshooting counters on the LT; see DLP 72.

4 Manage P-bit troubleshooting counters on the LT; see DLP 273.

5 Manage the PON troubleshooting counters on the LT; see 195

6 View the PM counters; see DLP 124.

7 View the configuration and operational data of a port (xDSL or Ethernet); see DLP 134.

Note — This step is not applicable to 7362 ISAM DF.

8 View the status of different system parameters (system clock, memory usage on the NT and
CPU load on the NT); see DLP 139.

9 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 89
NTP 1118 Monitor performance and view Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
configuration 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

90 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 1119 Modify xDSL services
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

5 NTP 1119 Modify xDSL services


5.1 Purpose
This procedure provides the steps to adapt the following services on the NE:

• xDSL profiles
• switching a user from ADSL to VDSL

5.2 Procedure
You can perform the following tasks:

1 Modify an xDSL profile; see DLP 56.

2 Modify a DPBO profile; see DLP 68.

3 Modify an RTX profile; see DLP 76.

4 Modify a Vectoring Control Entity profile; see DLP 78.

5 Switch a user from ADSL to VDSL; see DLP 58.

6 Switch a user from non-vectored VDSL2 to vectored VDSL2; see DLP 257.

7 Configure a bonding fallback profile in case of vectoring failures, see DLP 87.

8 Configure an xDSL SOS profile; see DLP 88.

9 Configure an xDSL legacy UPBO profile; see DLP 89

10 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 91
NTP 1119 Modify xDSL services Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

92 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 1124 Maintain the system
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

6 NTP 1124 Maintain the system


6.1 Purpose
This NTP provides the steps for system maintenance of the NE.

6.2 Procedure
Perform this procedure to maintain the system:

1 Back up the system configuration; see RTP 309.

2 Restore the system configuration; see RTP 310.

3 Retrieve the remote inventory; see RTP 311.

4 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 93
NTP 1124 Maintain the system Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

94 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 1126 Manage system logging
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

7 NTP 1126 Manage system logging


7.1 Purpose
This NTP provides the steps to manage system logging (SYSLOG) for the NE.

7.2 General
System statistics logs are user configurable and you can create up to 64 system logs. System logs
can be saved locally to a remote server, or all active CLI terminals, or all active TL1 terminals.

You can perform the following three main tasks using CLI:

• enable and disable logging for all system logs


• create and configure up to 64 system logs
• monitor system logs

Using filters, you can determine which messages are sent to the system log file, as well as set the
severity level of the system log.

The following applies when using SYSLOG in an operational (E2E) environment:

• The NE supports SYSLOG according to RFC3164 (aka BSD SYSLOG).


• The SYSLOG application on the external server has to listen to UDP port 514. Everything that
comes in via this port should be considered as being a SYSLOG message. The NE sends out
its SYSLOG messages on this port.
• The severity of the various application messages is predefined. It is reported as follows:
• CLI operator commands: INFO
• Service Affecting alarm messages: EMERGENCY
• Authentication messages: ALERT
• Other CLI/TL1 messages (non-service affecting): INFO
• protocol tracing: DEBUG
• videoCDR reporting: NOTICE

Note — See DLP 63 for the configuration of protocol tracing.

See the CLI Command Guide for FD 100/320Gbps NT and FX NT document for more information
about CLI commands used to configure system logging.

See the System Description for FD 100/320Gbps NT and FX NT document for more information
about system and security statistics logging.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 95
NTP 1126 Manage system logging Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

7.3 Procedure
Use this procedure to manage system logging for the NE. See the references for detailed
procedures and safety information.

1 Enable and disable logging for all system logs; see DLP 126.

2 Create, configure, and monitor system logs; see DLP 126.

3 STOP. This procedure is complete.

96 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 1130 Configure link related Ethernet OAM
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

8 NTP 1130 Configure link related


Ethernet OAM
8.1 Purpose
This procedure provides the steps to configure Link Related Ethernet OAM (EFM OAM) on the NE
and view local and remote (CPE) EFM OAM configuration, statistics, and counters.

Note — For more information on Link Related Ethernet OAM, see


TNG 335.

8.2 Procedure
Proceed as follows to configure EFM OAM:

1 Configure EFM OAM; see DLP 66.

2 After configuration, perform the following actions:

a View Local and Remote (CPE) information; see DLP 66.

b View EFM OAM statistics; see DLP 66.

c Retrieve MAC counters; see DLP 66.

d Retrieve PME counters; see DLP 66.

3 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 97
NTP 1130 Configure link related Ethernet OAM Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

98 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14
Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 1132 Configure connectivity fault management
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

9 NTP 1132 Configure connectivity


fault management
9.1 Purpose
This NTP provides the steps for initiating tests and configuring Connectivity Fault Management
(CFM).

9.2 General
CFM (IEEE802.1ag and ITU-TY.1731) is an Ethernet OAM capability providing end-to-end fault
detection and isolation on Ethernet networks. IEEE 802.1ag defines generic CFM operation and
maintenance procedures such as loopback, link trace, and connectivity checks. ITY-TY.1731
defines the same procedures but extends functionality with performance monitoring such as frame
loss and delay measurement and alarm indication signal (AIS) for example.

CFM requires that bridge ports throughout the network be configured with software entities, called
“maintenance points” (MP). MPs process and respond to CFM messages sent on the dataplane.
By looking at the replies from these MPs, a network operator can isolate a fault to a specific link
or node. MPs are organized by maintenance domain (MD) and maintenance association (MA) on
a network.

You can configure MPs on the NE to process and respond to CFM messages sent from the edge
router or BNG. You cannot initiate CFM tests from the NE. To configure CFM in this case, you must
configure an MD, an MA, and you must configure a MEP, or you must configure the MA to
auto-create MIPs.

The ISAM supports network facing MEPs at UNI ports. Within these MEPs the ISAM responds to
downstream LBMs and LTMs. Within these MEPs the ISAM can initiate LBMs and LTMs in
upstream direction.

The ISAM supports MIPs on the UNI ports. In this case the ISAM responds to LBMs and LTMs
coming from the user network (see DSLF TR-101).

The ISAM supports MIPs and network facing MEPs at user ports. Within these MPs the ISAM
responds to LBMs and to LTMs coming from the network. The ISAM responds to LBM coming from
the user network (see DSLF TR-101).

The ISAM also supports MIPs on the CFM qualified NNI ports. In this case the ISAM responds to
LBMs/LTMs coming from the network, or subtended network.

The ISAM supports network facing MEPs on the LT board at its GE interface towards the NT
board. Within these MEPs the ISAM responds to LBMs and to LTMs.

You can also view CFM configuration data on the NE.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 99
NTP 1132 Configure connectivity fault management Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

9.3 Prerequisites
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled before CFM can be configured:

• You must have network management access or craft port access to the NE you want to
configure, and be familiar with the CLI.
• CFM must be supported on the access aggregation network.
• A VLAN must be configured.

9.4 Procedure
Use this procedure to initiate CFM tests, and configure CFM.

1 Configure CFM; see DLP 143.

2 Configure GPON/NG-PON2 CFM; see DLP 286.

3 Initiate a CFM test; see DLP 83.

4 STOP. This procedure is complete.

100 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 1157 Configure an E1 line
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

10 NTP 1157 Configure an E1 line


10.1 Purpose
This NTP provides the procedures to configure an E1 line.

10.2 General
The ISAM supports E1 interfaces by means of a dedicated E1 TDM pseudowire SFP. The E1
TDM SFP supports a dual channel to allow termination for up to two E1 TDM lines, with a data rate
of 2,048 Mbps per E1.

The E1 TDM SFP supports agnostic E1 operation modes only. The line interface supports framed
E1 for Loss Of Framing detection and CRC-4 checks. DSO grooming or fractional E1 is not
supported.

10.3 Hardware considerations


The NSLT-D card supports E1 line configuration for 17 to 24 lines.

10.4 Procedure
Use this procedure to configure an E1 line.

1 Configure an E1 line interface; see DLP 90.

2 Configure multi-framing and CRC for an E1 line; see DLP 91.

3 Configure performance monitoring; see DLP 124.

4 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 101


NTP 1157 Configure an E1 line Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

102 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3100 Initial system configuration
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

11 NTP 3100 Initial system


configuration
11.1 Purpose
This document describes the procedure to be used to perform the initial system configuration.

Note — For initial DPoE deployment and DPoE provisioning, see NTP
36 NTP 3147 Configure DPoE.

11.2 General
Figure 1 shows the management topology of the NE system.

Figure 1 Management Topology


EMS TL1 TL1 TL1 CLI CLI Debug
(e.g. AMS 5520) Gateway Terminal CT Terminal CT Terminal

SNMPv2
or UDP SSH Telnet RS232 SSH Telnet RS232 UDP
SNMPv3

SNMP TL1 CLI Debug


agent agent agent agent

ISAM

Table 6 lists the different types of system managers.

Table 6 System Managers

Manager type Description

EMS Remotely connected Element Management System based on SNMP

(1 of 2)

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 103


NTP 3100 Initial system configuration Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

Manager type Description


TL1 CT Local Craft Terminal using TL1 commands

CLI CT Local Craft Terminal using Command Line Interface (CLI) commands

CLI terminal Remotely connected terminal using CLI commands based over telnet or ssh
TL1 gateway Remotely connected gateways using TL1 commands over UDP

TL1 terminal Remotely connected terminal using TL1 commands based on ssh

(2 of 2)

ISAM supports an operator login retry policy, where login attempts, lockout duration, the number
of SSH or Telnet login sessions, and the expiry time for operators can now be configured. This
feature is only supported in CLI.

See the CLI Command Guide for FD 100/320Gbps NT and FX NT document for detailed
information about the CLI command syntax.

See the TL1 Commands and Messages for FD 100/320Gbps NT and FX NT document for detailed
information about the TL1 command syntax.

11.3 Security Considerations


The following must be taken into account with regard to system security:

• It is advised to close the remote debug access. By default, the access is not disabled.
• It is advised to use secure management channels (CLI/SSH, TL1/SSH, SNMPv3, SFTP). This
implies closing the insecure management channels.
• It is NOT advised to use insecure remote management channels: CLI/Telnet, TL1/UDP,
SNMPv1/2, or TFTP.
• If SNMPv1/2 is used anyway, it is advised not to use community string = public.
• It is advised to change the administrator password of TL1 and CLI (even if TL1 or CLI is not
used by the operator).
• It is advised to deactivate the remote TL1 management interface when no remote TL1 is used.
It is not possible to deactivate the local Craft Terminal TL1 access.
• For management plane traffic, specific security settings have to be configured to allow only the
traffic coming from the Element Management System (EMS) (such as 5520 AMS) to be routed
to the NT OBC:
• A specific security model has to be selected (with or without a dedicated external
management v-VPLS).
• CPU filters have to be configured to allow only IP packets coming from the EMS for the
management plane.

104 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3100 Initial system configuration
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

11.4 Procedure
Proceed as follows to perform an initial system configuration:

1 Set up a CLI session; see DLP 45.

2 Create and configure an Operator Profile; see DLP 93.

3 Create a default Operator Profile; see DLP 123.

4 Configure a VLAN and IP address for ISAM management access; see DLP 156.

5 Configure the security access policy to NT OBC on IHub; see DLP 157.

6 Configure SSH; see DLP 57.

7 Configure the general security settings; see DLP 65.

8 Configure the system parameters; see DLP 94.

9 Configure the enhanced system clock synchronization; see DLP 158.

10 Configure Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) and trap management; see DLP
98.

11 Enable the management of EMS; see DLP 122.

12 Configure the alarm management; see DLP 99.

13 Save the protected IHub database; see DLP 118.

14 Configure operator login retry policy; see DLP 92.

15 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 105


NTP 3100 Initial system configuration Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

106 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3101 Execute script files
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

12 NTP 3101 Execute script files


12.1 Purpose
A script file is a file containing CLI commands.

A script file must follow the same syntax rules as commands entered interactively. Only the tab
and the question mark lose their special meaning in a script, so command expansion and
single-line help are not available.

The script will be aborted if one of the commands in the script fails. A command may be preceded
by a minus '-' to prevent the script from being aborted in case of a semantic error; for example,
when you try to delete a node instance that does not exist.

By default, a command script does not interact with the user. The execution of the script will be
aborted if a command or filter requires interaction with the user. Interactivity can be enabled by
specifying the interactive option with the exec command.

Command scripts may not be nested.

Caution — When an NT switchover takes place during execution of the


script, the possibility exists that CLI commands will fail.

To recover from this situation the operator should delete the objects
which were created before.

Then, the CLI command (or script) must be re-executed.

12.2 Procedure
In order to use script files, you need to perform the following tasks:

1 Create and execute script files; see DLP 121.

2 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 107


NTP 3101 Execute script files Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

108 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3103 Configure equipment
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

13 NTP 3103 Configure equipment


13.1 Purpose
This procedure provides the steps to:

• plan, unplan, or replan the equipment


• configure the NCNC-F/H board mode, if such an NTIO board is present
• lock or unlock the equipment
• configure the internal bidirectional speed for the NT-LT link between the high-capacity NT and
the high-capacity LTs
• configure the SFP uplink ports and the SFP downlink ports

Some equipment-related items, such as the shelf, are auto-created at system startup and do not
need to be created. However, they can be modified.

13.2 General
The NE consists of a single shelf with plug-in units. You can perform the actions described in Table
7 to configure the equipment.

Table 7 Configure plug-in units

Action Description
Planning equipment Planning a piece of equipment is possible before and after the equipment is
physically present and detected by the system (at startup). The system verifies the
configuration parameters and checks if the required equipment is available.
Note: As long as equipment is not planned, it is impossible to offer service. Units
and other equipment are only available from an operation and maintenance point of
view.

Unplanning equipment If necessary, you can unplan any equipment. Unplanning, however, may be rejected
in case of hierarchical dependencies. For example, it is impossible to unplan a shelf
as long as one or more units in it are still planned.

Replanning equipment Replanning is done when changing the current equipment.

Locking and unlocking When necessary, you can lock any equipment, most often a unit, to put it out of
equipment service. Locking a unit renders it inactive. No traffic is generated or received by the
units. All alarms related to the unit are filtered except for the “board-missing”, “board
installation missing” and “board-type mismatch” alarms. However, the unit is not
removed from the configuration, and as soon as you unlock the unit, it will be
reloaded.
Similarly, you can power down the unit and restart it at a later time. In this case,
however, the unit will go through a complete startup cycle before traffic is possible.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 109


NTP 3103 Configure equipment Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

13.3 Change the shelf mode


When required, the shelf mode can be changed from NTIO_SUPPORTED (for shelves equipped
with an NTIO board (and a second NT board) to NTIO_UNSUPPORTED (for shelves where an
NTIO board is not required, in this case 2 extra LT slots are available) or NTB_UNSUPPORTED
(for shelves where an NTB board is not required, in this case one extra LT slot is available) and
vice versa.

Note — Changing the shelf mode results in an automatic restart of the


system.

13.4 Procedure
Proceed as follows to configure or modify the system equipment:

1 Plan, replan, or unplan equipment; see DLP 100.

2 Lock or unlock the equipment; see DLP 101.

3 Modify the configuration of the system equipment; see DLP 102.

4 If required, configure the internal bidirectional speed for the NT-LT link; see DLP 160.

5 If required, change the shelf mode; see DLP 148.

6 If required, change the NCNC-F/H mode; see DLP 100.

7 Configure SFP downlink ports; see DLP 125.

8 Configure SFP uplink ports; see DLP 140.

9 STOP. This procedure is complete.

110 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3104 Configure a VLAN cross-connect without
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT MPLS at the network side

14 NTP 3104 Configure a VLAN


cross-connect without MPLS at
the network side
14.1 Purpose
The NE supports several VLAN cross-connect models:

• Customer VLAN cross-connect or C-VLAN CC


• Service provider VLAN cross-connect or S-VLAN CC
• VLAN stacking or S+C-VLAN CC

Note — This document describes the configuration of a VLAN


cross-connect without MPLS. For the configuration of a VLAN
cross-connect with MLPS, see NTP 25.

14.1.1 Purpose of C-VLAN CC


This is the most straightforward VLAN cross-connect model where a single VLAN ID at the EMAN
side is associated with a given PVC at the user side. Any kind of traffic issued by the subscriber
is passed transparently towards the network using the selected VLAN ID.

Cross-connect VLANs can be enabled to be protocol aware for IGMP and 802.1x and to support
the configuration of DHCP Option 82 and PPPoE relay.

14.1.2 Purpose of S-VLAN CC


In this mode, the Service Provider VLAN (S-VLAN) ID at the EMAN side is associated with a single
subscriber interface at the user side. The C-VLANs carried within the S-VLAN are passed
transparently to the end user. This allows the end user to specify its own end-to-end connectivity,
while remaining transparent for the EMAN.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 111


NTP 3104 Configure a VLAN cross-connect without Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
MPLS at the network side 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

The NE acts as an S-VLAN aware bridge, with the restriction that only one subscriber interface
can be attached. Forwarding is only done based on the S-VLAN forwarding context. The
forwarding is transparent for the C-VLANs. Frames on the subscriber interface may or may not
have an S-VLAN tag. In case of an absent S-VLAN tag (that is for C-VLAN tagged and
untagged/priority tagged frames), the subscriber interface’s pre-configured S-VLAN ID will be
assigned.

Note 1 — NGLT boards support Tunnel cross-connect but not mapped


cross-connect.

Note 2 — In GPON, for an S-VLAN CC, the subscriber interface’s


pre-configured S-VLAN ID will be assigned on egress upstream.

14.1.3 Purpose of S+C-VLAN CC


The basic VLAN cross-connect mode suffers from the fact the that number of VLAN identifiers is
limited to 4K. Since the VLAN is a EMAN wide identifier, one ends up with a scalability issue: there
cannot be more than 4K end users connected to the whole EMAN. To solve this issue, two VLANs
are stacked and the cross-connection is then performed on the combination (S-VLAN, C-VLAN)
allowing to theoretically reach up to 16M end users.

The NE acts as a C-VLAN aware bridge, with the restriction that only one subscriber interface can
be attached. Frames on the subscriber interface may be C-VLAN tagged or untagged/priority
tagged. In case of C-VLAN tagged frames, a check will be performed on the received C-VLAN ID,
while the subscriber interface‘s pre-configured S-VLAN will be assigned. In case of
untagged/priority tagged frames, the subscriber interface’s pre-configured C-VLAN and S-VLAN
will be assigned.

14.2 Prerequisite
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled before a VLAN-CC of any type can be configured:

• The board must have been planned; see DLP 100.


• xDSL profiles must have been created; see DLP 49.

14.3 Procedure
Proceed as follows (see also Figure 2):

112 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3104 Configure a VLAN cross-connect without
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT MPLS at the network side

Figure 2 Configure a VLAN Cross-connect on an IHub-based ISAM

DLP 1117
(DLP 1118)
DLP 3233 DLP 3230 (DLP 3119) DLP 3124
DLP 3231 v-VPLS IHub DLP 3231 LT VLAN for DLP 1174
Regular SAPs v-VPLS Residential C-VLAN CC
Ports Ports

C 11
v-VPLS C-VLAN CC
VLAN CC
VLAN 11

Phy
S17 +C23
v-VPLS S+C-VLAN CC
VLAN CC
VLAN 17
LT
(No VLAN translation
shown on user side)
v-VPLS S17 +C29
VLAN 13 S+C-VLAN CC
VLAN CC
Phy
Phy LAG
S 13
v-VPLS S-VLAN CC
VLAN 19 VLAN CC
DLP 3105 LT
NT_IHUB
C-, S+C- or
ISAM_IHUB S-VLAN CC

1 Configure a VLAN on the LT for VLAN cross-connect. Do one of the following:

a For C-VLAN cross-connect; see DLP 46.

b For S-VLAN cross-connect; see DLP 47.

c For S+C-VLAN cross-connect; see DLP 104.

2 Configure VLAN TPID, see DLP 289.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 113


NTP 3104 Configure a VLAN cross-connect without Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
MPLS at the network side 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

3 Create a user and add him to a VLAN created in step 1. Do one of the following:

a Create an xDSL user and add him to a VLAN on the LT; see DLP 105.

b Create an xDSL IPoA user and add him to a VLAN on the LT (for C-VLAN
cross-connect): see DLP 59.

c Create a native Ethernet/NNI user and add him to a VLAN on the LT; see DLP 258.

Note 1 — For a Tunnel S-VLAN CC (TunVlan,0) on DSL, GPON and


Ethernet LTs, create an S-VLAN VLAN port (TunVlan,0) and use it as
PVID.

Note 2 — For a Tunnel S-VLAN CC (TunVlan,0) on EPON LT, create a


C-VLAN VLAN port (0,4097) and translate it to a network VLAN
(TunVlan,0) (“4097” has the semantics for “*”).

4 Configure regular ports and residential ports on the IHub; see DLP 154.

5 Optionally, configure LAG on the IHub; see DLP 95.

6 Configure v-VPLS on the IHub; see DLP 153.

• In case of C-VLAN CC, the VLAN ID is the ID of the C-VLAN


• In case of S-VLAN CC, the VLAN ID is the ID of the S-VLAN
• In case of S+C-VLAN CC, the VLAN ID is the ID of the S-VLAN

7 Configure an SAP on the IHub v-VPLS; see DLP 155.

8 Optionally, if in step 1 “secure forwarding” was enabled on the VLAN on the LT, create a static
IP user /subnet; see DLP 141.

9 Optionally, control broadcast and secure forwarding on a VLAN CC; see DLP 270.

10 STOP. This procedure is complete.

114 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3105 Configure an iBridge VLAN without MPLS
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT at the network side

15 NTP 3105 Configure an iBridge


VLAN without MPLS at the
network side
15.1 Purpose
The concept of a VLAN in intelligent bridging (iBridge) mode is that multiple NSPs are each
connected to the NE with a dedicated VLAN. The user ports are connected to the VLAN of their
corresponding NSP.

The NE supports three iBridge models:

• C-iBridge
• S+C-iBridge (with an extra tag attached upstream; only for PON LTs, xDSL L3 LTs and HiCap
VDSL2 L3 LTs)
• S-iBridge

Note — This document describes the configuration of an iBridge VLAN


without MPLS. For the configuration of an iBridge VLAN with MLPS, see
NTP 24.

15.2 Prerequisite
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled:

• The board must have been planned; see DLP 100.


• xDSL profiles must have been created; see DLP 49.

15.3 Procedure
Proceed as follows to configure an iBridge VLAN without MPLS at the network side (see also
Figure 3):

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 115


NTP 3105 Configure an iBridge VLAN without MPLS Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
at the network side 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

Figure 3 Configure an iBridge

DLP 1120
(DLP 3120)
DLP 3230 (DLP 3287)
DLP 3233 DLP 3124
DLP 3231 IHub DLP 3231 LT VLAN for DLP 1232
v-VPLS DLP 3351
Regular v-VPLS Residential iBridge
SAPs
Ports Ports

C 11
iBridge

Phy
v-VPLS S17 +C23
VLAN 11 iBridge

v-VPLS S 13
VLAN 17 iBridge

LT
Phy
Phy LAG
v-VPLS C 11
VLAN 13
iBridge

NT_IHUB S17 +C23


iBridge

S 13
iBridge
ISAM_IHUB
LT

1 Configure a VLAN on the LT for iBridge:

a in case of a C-iBridge; see DLP 48

b in case of an S+C-iBridge; see DLP 197

c in case of an S-iBridge; see DLP 204

2 Configure a VLAN TPID; see DLP 289

116 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3105 Configure an iBridge VLAN without MPLS
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT at the network side

3 Create a user and add him to a VLAN created in step 1. Do one of the following:

a Create an xDSL user and add him to a VLAN on the LT; see DLP 105.

b Create an xDSL IPoA user and add him to a VLAN on the LT (for iBridge): see DLP 74.

c Create a native Ethernet/NNI user and add him to a VLAN on the LT; see DLP 258.

4 Configure regular ports and residential ports on the IHub; see DLP 154.

5 Optionally, configure LAG on the IHub; see DLP 95.

6 Configure v-VPLS on the IHub; see DLP 153.

7 Configure an SAP on the IHub v-VPLS; see DLP 155.

8 Optionally, configure static MAC addresses in IHub and LT; see DLP 127.

9 Optionally, if in step 1 “secure forwarding” was enabled on the VLAN on the LT, create a static
IP user /subnet; see DLP 141.

10 Optionally, control broadcast and secure forwarding on an iBridge; see DLP 270.

11 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 117


NTP 3105 Configure an iBridge VLAN without MPLS Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
at the network side 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

118 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3108 Configure services
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

16 NTP 3108 Configure services


16.1 Purpose
This procedure provides the steps to configure the following services on the NE:

• xDSL profiles
• xDSL bonding
• Quality of Service (QoS)
• Multicast
• Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) relay agent and Option 82
• Authentication
• Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) configuration
• NT redundancy
• Link aggregation
• Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)
• Routing protocols (optional)
• Voice Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)
• Filtering on the IHub
• CES pseudowire on DS1/E1 port
• VoIP service on a POTS port
• Virtual Ethernet Interface Point (VEIP)
• video service on an RF port
• GPON VEIP
• GPON HPNA service
• GPON MoCA service
• GPON SNMP service
• Pbit counters on VLAN ports
• ethertype on a V-VPLS service
• fairness SLA on NELT-B
• E1 services using 2E1 SFP
• Priority regeneration profile
• Network Address and Port Translation (NAPT) service

16.2 Procedure
To configure a service, you need to perform the following tasks:

1 Configure xDSL profiles:

i For the configuration of the service profiles and the spectrum profiles; see DLP 49.

ii For the creation of ONT profiles; see DLP 178.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 119


NTP 3108 Configure services Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

iii For the configuration of custom PSD points; see DLP 61.

iv For the configuration of VDSL2 custom PSD shape; see DLP 285.

v For the configuration of virtual noise values for VDSL2; see DLP 62.

vi For the configuration of virtual noise values for ONT VDSL2; see DLP 188.

vii For the configuration of an xDSL Downstream Power Back Off (DPBO) profile; see DLP
67.

viii For the configuration of VDSL2 DPBO parameters for ONT VDSL; see DLP 191.

ix For the configuration of an RTX profile (standard ARQ provisioning); see DLP 75.

x For the configuration of a Vectoring Control Entity profile; see DLP 77.

xi For the configuration of an xDSL vectoring profile; see DLP 79.

xii For System Level Vectoring (SLV), two approaches are possible:

• the operator configures the mapping between the VP board and the SLV LT boards
(reflecting the front cabling); see DLP 209
• if the node is capable of auto-detecting the connections between the VP board and
the SLV LT boards, then the auto-discovery feature must be enabled; see DLP 254

xiii For configuring fallback for xDSL vectoring; see DLP 84.

xiv For the configuration of power back-off; see DLP 69.

xv For the configuration of xDSL overrule data; see DLP 71.

xvi For the configuration of the impulse noise sensor on an xDSL line; see DLP 70.

xvii For the configuration of xDSL SOS profiles; see DLP 88.

2 Configure xDSL bonding:

i Configure xDSL bonding (IFEC); see DLP 50.

ii Configure xDSL bonding group with a group RTX profile; see DLP 86.

iii Configure fallback for xDSL vectoring; see DLP 84.

iv Configure fallback for xDSL bonding vectoring; see DLP 87.

3 Configure QoS:

i For the configuration of QoS; see DLP 51.

ii For the configuration of QoS on the IHub; see DLP 136.

iii For the configuration of QoS Threshold Crossing Alerts (TCA); see DLP 64.

120 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3108 Configure services
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

4 Configure multicast:

i For the configuration of the multicast service in the system; see DLP 107.

ii For the configuration of a multicast v-VPLS; see DLP 108 or for the configuration of a
multicast VPLS; see DLP 174.

iii For the configuration of a multicast channel; see DLP 109.

iv For the configuration of the multicast service on a user port; see DLP 135.

v For configuring multicast VLAN translation; see DLP 196.

vi For configuring multicast PON VLAN translation; see DLP 241.

vii For the configuration of PIM; see DLP 176.

Figure 4 Configure Multicast in L2 mode

DLP 1198
DLP 3136 DLP 3138
Multicast
System settings Multicast
DLP 3233 service
DLP 3231 channel
v-VPLS on port
Regular DLP 3137
AccessPorts SAPs Multicast
VPLS
Multicast
Phy VLAN 19
LT
VPLS
Phy VLAN 19
Phy LAG
Multicast
VLAN 19
NT_IHUB LT

ISAM_IHUB

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 121


NTP 3108 Configure services Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

Figure 5 Configure Multicast in L3 mode

DLP 1198
DLP 3136 DLP 3138
Multicast
System settings Multicast
DLP 3230 DLP 3229 service
DLP 3231 DLP 3228 channel
v-VPLS IP on port
Regular IES
interface DLP 3137
AccessPorts Multicast
VPLS
Multicast
Phy VLAN 19
VPLS
LT
VPLS
Phy IES VLAN 19
Phy LAG
VPLS
DLP 3254 Multicast
PIM VLAN 19
NT_IHUB LT

ISAM_IHUB

5 Configure DHCP Relay:

i For the configuration of the DHCP relay agent in router mode; see DLP 110.

ii For the configuration of the L2 DHCP relay agent; see DLP 282.

iii For the configuration of the L2 DHCPv6 relay agent; see DLP 291.

6 Configure the authentication settings:

i For the configuration of the security domain; see DLP 111.

ii For the configuration of RADIUS; see DLP 112.

iii For the configuration of 802.1x authentication; see DLP 52.

iv For the configuration of operator authentication via RADIUS; see DLP 128.

7 Configure the PPP relay settings:

i For the configuration of PPPoE relay; see DLP 53.

ii For the configuration of PPPoA-PPPoE relay; see DLP 113.

122 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3108 Configure services
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

8 If necessary, configure NT redundancy; see DLP 103.

Note 1 — If NT redundancy is required, then this has to be specifically


enabled (this contrary to the earlier, <R4.1, behavior where the
redundancy was by default enabled); see DLP 103.

Note 2 — For a forced NT switchover (for example, when an active NT


board must be replaced in a redundant configuration); see DLP 145.

9 If necessary, configure link aggregation. Link aggregation is used to aggregate two or more
physical links from one switch to another:

i For the configuration of link aggregation; see DLP 95.

ii For the configuration of link aggregation on the NELT-B; see DLP 190.

10 If necessary, configure Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP):

i For the configuration MSTP on the SHub; see DLP 137.

ii For the configuration MSPT on the NELT-B; see DLP 189.

11 If necessary, configure routing protocols such as OSPF, RIP, BGP and IS-IS. The
configuration is optional (depends if the network elements which are connected to the ISAM,
are using those protocols). The routing protocols are handled in the IHub.

i For the configuration of Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) management; see DLP 96.

ii For the configuration of Routing Information Protocol (RIP) management; see DLP 97.

iii For the configuration of Border Gateway Protocol (BGP); see DLP 159.

iv For the configuration of Intermediate System to Intermediate System Protocol (IS-IS);


see DLP 149.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 123


NTP 3108 Configure services Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

12 Configure Voice SIP; see DLP 133. For the configuration of a shared SIP termination
subscriber line; see DLP 302.

Note 1 — For POTS only service, the SIP POTS and the H.248
(MEGACO) POTS services can be mixed in the same access node but
can not be mixed on the LT board. The system supports both integrated
VoIP services to run in parallel for the POTS only service.

Note 2 — For POTS plus ISDN BRI service, on the following applies:

• only the MEGACO-based VoIP service is configured supporting both


the POTS and the ISDN BRI services simultaneously.
• the SIP-based VoIP service is configured to support the POTS service
and the MEGACO-based VoIP service is configured to support the
ISDN BRI service.

Note 3 — For POTS plus ISDN PRA service, the SIP-based VoIP
service supports both the integrated POTS and the integrated ISDN PRA
service to run in parallel at the NE.

13 Configure filtering on the IHub; see DLP 106.

14 Configure CES pseudowire service on a DS1/E1 port; see DLP 183.

15 Configure VoIP service on a POTS port:

i For legacy-based provisioning method; see DLP 184.

ii For provisioning method base on the creation of an IP host; see DLP 194.

iii For VEIP-style VoIP managed outside of OMCI (for example, with TR-069) using the
VEIP interface associated with POTS port; see DLP 198.

16 For VEIP-style VoIP, configure a TR-069 management server; see DLP 238.

17 Configure video service on an RF port; see DLP 185.

18 If required, create a GPON Virtual Ethernet Interface Point (VEIP); see DLP 193.

19 If required, create a GPON HPNA service; see DLP 237.

20 If required, create a GPON MoCA service; see DLP 267.

21 If required, create a GPON SNMP service; see DLP 239.

22 Configure the p-bit counter on a VLAN port; see DLP 73.

124 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3108 Configure services
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

23 Configure the ethertype on a v-VPLS service; see DLP 248.

24 If required, configure fairness SLA on the NELT-B; see DLP 199.

25 Configure an E1 service using 2E1 SFP; see DLP 250.

26 Configure E1 service diagnostics using 2E1 SFP; see DLP 251.

27 If required, configure a priority regeneration profile on a bridge port or on a VLAN port; see
DLP 85.

28 Optionally, configure NAPT service; see DLP 293.

29 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 125


NTP 3108 Configure services Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

126 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3114 Perform equipment repairs
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

17 NTP 3114 Perform equipment


repairs
17.1 Purpose
This procedure provides the steps to perform equipment repair on the NE.

17.2 Procedure
Proceed as follows to perform equipment repair tasks:

1 Plan, unplan, and replan equipment (for example, plug-in units); see DLP 100.

2 Pull out and plug in equipment. For the procedures, see the hardware installation manual for
your equipment.

3 Lock and unlock equipment (mostly plug-in units); see DLP 101.

4 Start up or shut down the system, select one of:

a Shut down or restart the NT; see DLP 114.

b Reboot the entire system; see DLP 54.

c Shut down individual equipment; see DLP 115.

5 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 127


NTP 3114 Perform equipment repairs Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

128 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3115 Monitor alarms
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

18 NTP 3115 Monitor alarms


18.1 Purpose
This procedure provides the steps to monitor the alarms on the NE.

18.2 Procedure
Proceed as follows to monitor the alarms:

1 Create an alarm snapshot table; see DLP 116.

2 Monitor the alarms; see DLP 117.

3 Optionally, alarms which are not automatically cleared by the system can be manually
cleared by the operator; see DLP 99.

4 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 129


NTP 3115 Monitor alarms Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

130 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3116 Perform software management
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

19 NTP 3116 Perform software


management
19.1 Purpose
This procedure provides the steps to perform software management on the NE.

19.2 Procedure
The following steps can be used to perform software management:

1 Management of the NT and IHub database; see RTP 309.

2 Management of the Overall Software Packages; see DLP 55.

3 Management of Customer Dependant Engineering (CDE) profiles; see DLP 146.

4 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 131


NTP 3116 Perform software management Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

132 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3117 Modify system parameters
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

20 NTP 3117 Modify system


parameters
20.1 Purpose
This procedure lists the procedures for system parameter modification.

20.2 Procedure
The steps below show the procedures for modifying different system parameters:

1 Configure filtering on the NT; see DLP 106.

2 Configure static MAC addresses; see DLP 127.

3 Configure the system-default ethertype; see DLP 248.

4 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 133


NTP 3117 Modify system parameters Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

134 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3120 Troubleshooting the network
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

21 NTP 3120 Troubleshooting the


network
21.1 Purpose
The following troubleshooting commands can be used:

• Ping:
The ping command lets you verify that a particular IP address exists and can accept requests.
Ping is used diagnostically to ensure that a host computer you are trying to reach is actually
operating. Ping can also be used with a host that is operating to see how long it takes to get a
response back.
• Traceroute:
Traceroute is a utility that traces the route in the network for an IP address. It also calculates
and displays the amount of time each hop took.
The utility initiates the sending of a packet (using the Internet Control Message Protocol
(ICMP)), including in the packet a Time To Live (TTL) value that is designed to be exceeded
by the first router that receives it, which will return a Time Exceeded message. This enables
traceroute to determine the time required for the hop to the first router. Increasing the time limit
value, it sends the packet again so that it will reach the second router in the path to the
destination, which returns another Time Exceeded message, and so forth.
Traceroute determines when the packet has reached the destination by including a port
number that is outside the normal range. When it's received, a Port Unreachable message is
returned, enabling traceroute to measure the time length of the final hop. As the tracerouting
progresses, the records are displayed for you hop by hop.
• Ping from ONT for VoIP:
The admin iphost ping command provides the capability to enable ONTs to ping upstream
network elements including other ONTs for VoIP services. Ping is used diagnostically to
ensure that a host computer you are trying to reach is actually operating. It can also be used
with a host that is operating to see how long it takes to get a response back.

21.2 Procedure
The following troubleshooting commands can be used:

1 Ping command; see DLP 119.

2 Traceroute command; see DLP 120.

3 Port mirroring; see DLP 147.

4 Ping from ONT for VoIP command; see DLP 266.

5 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 135


NTP 3120 Troubleshooting the network Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

136 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3127 Configure SHDSL
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

22 NTP 3127 Configure SHDSL


22.1 Purpose
Single-pair High-speed Digital Subscriber Line (SHDSL) is a physical layer standard based on the
ITU-T Recommendation G.991.2. It describes a versatile transmission method for data transport
in the telecommunication access networks, capable of supporting whichever network protocol is
currently deployed while enabling higher bandwidth and reach (for example, TDM, ATM, Frame
Relay and so on).

SHDSL transceivers are designed primarily for duplex operation over mixed gauges of two wire
twisted metallic pairs. Four-wire and m-pair operations are included as options for extended reach.
The use of signal regenerators for both the two-wire and the multi-wire operations is optional.

Inverse Multiplexing for ATM (IMA) permits a broadband cell stream to be transported on a number
of lower-rate physical links (for example, several SHDSL span lines) by grouping these physical
links into a single logical channel. The specification includes a means to maintain cell order and a
method to allow in-service loss and restore of individual physical links.

Note — For a more detailed description of the different parameters for


SHDSL span, unit and segment configuration, refer to TNG 334.

22.2 Procedure
Proceed as follows to configure SHDSL:

1 To configure SHDSL; see DLP 129.

2 To configure IMA on SHDSL spans; see DLP 130.

3 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 137


NTP 3127 Configure SHDSL Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

138 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3134 Configure a VPRN or IES
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

23 NTP 3134 Configure a VPRN or IES


23.1 Purpose
In this mode, the NE is seen as an IP next-hop by the edge routers to route the IP packets to the
users connected to the NE. One or more Virtual Routers can be configured in this mode, which
can co-exist in the same system.

The Virtual Private Routed Network (VPRN) uses private IP address ranges, while IES use the
global IP addresses of the Base Router. Subscriber subnets of different VPRNs may overlap while
still have separated routes. As such, VPRNs constitute Virtual Routers. Overlapping subnets of
different Internet Enhanced Services (IESs) all share the same routes (of the Base Router).

At the user side of the system (xDSL line), IP interfaces and subnets can be shared by several
users (on different xDSL lines). For this, two levels of bridge functions must be provisioned: one
internally in the NT, one in the LT.

Towards the network, IP interfaces and subnets also must be internally linked to a bridge function
in the NT, to extend the number of network hosts belonging to the same subnet.

Host routes towards the end-user devices are either dynamically created in the NE in case of
dynamic DHCP sessions, or statically provisioned in case of static IP address assignment.

Figure 6 VPRN/IES services with "port fanout" by v-VPLS services

DLP 1120 DLP 3124


LT VLAN DLP 1232
for iBridge
DLP 3231
DLP 3231 DLP 3233 DLP 3230 DLP 3228 DLP 3229 Residential
Regular v-VPLS IHUB IHUB VPRN/IES Ports
Ports SAPs v-VPLS VPRN/IES IP interface iBridge
VLAN 19

v-VPLS v-VPLS iBridge


VLAN 17 VLAN 19 VLAN 23
LT (No VLAN
translation shown
VPRN
on user side)
or IES
iBridge
Phy v-VPLS v-VPLS VLAN 19
VLAN 11 VLAN 23
Phy LAG

iBridge
NT_IHUB DLP 3105 VLAN 23
LT
ISAM_IHUB

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 139


NTP 3134 Configure a VPRN or IES Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

23.2 Procedure
Proceed as follows to configure a VPRN or IES:

1 Create the VPRN service respectively IES service: see DLP 151.

2 Configure a VLAN on the LT for iBridge; see DLP 48.

Note 1 — The VLAN port of this iBridge must be in mode “single tagged”
(see DLP 105). The IP router will fail on frames with more than one VLAN
tag.

Note 2 — Alternately the LT could be configured with a VLAN for


C-VLAN cross-connect (untypical); see DLP 46.

3 Create users and add them to the VLAN on the LT:

• for xDSL/native Ethernet users; see DLP 105


• for IPoA user (for C-VLAN cross-connect); see DLP 59
• for IPoA user (for iBridge); see DLP 74

4 Create a v-VPLS per subscriber subnet, matching the iBridge created in step 2: see DLP 153.

5 Create a Residential Port per LT and per subtending ISAM: see DLP 154.

6 Create an SAP on each Residential Port created in step 5, in each subscriber subnet v-VPLS
created in step 4: see DLP 155.

7 Create a v-VPLS per network subnet: see DLP 153.

8 Create a Regular Port per network port: see DLP 154.

9 Create an SAP on each Regular Port created in step 8, in each network subnet v-VPLS
created in step 7: see DLP 155.

10 Create an IP Interface per subscriber subnet in the VPRN created in step 1: see DLP 152.

11 STOP. This procedure is complete.

140 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3135 Configure an iBridge VLAN with MPLS at
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT the network side

24 NTP 3135 Configure an iBridge


VLAN with MPLS at the network
side
24.1 Purpose
The concept of intelligent bridging (iBridge) mode with Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) is
that multiple NSPs are each connected to the NE with NSP-specific Pseudo-wires (PW). These
NSP-specific PWs are terminated in dedicated Virtual Private LAN Services (VPLSs) and will carry
all the user traffic for that NSP.

The association of user traffic to that dedicated VPLS is done by labeling that user traffic with a
NSP specific VLAN, that is, at the LT boards the user traffic is tagged/re-tagged with that
NSP-specific VLAN.

This model can theoretically scale up to 4K NSPs, but as the number of VPLS services is limited
in hardware and software, it scales up to 200 NSPs.

The NE supports three iBridge models:

• C-iBridge
• S+C-iBridge (with an extra tag attached upstream; only for PON LTs, xDSL L3 LTs and HiCap
VDSL2 L3 LTs)
• S-iBridge

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 141


NTP 3135 Configure an iBridge VLAN with MPLS at Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
the network side 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

Figure 7 iBridge VLAN with MPLS


LT 1

NT iBridge 1

VLAN 1
DSL

LSP 1 PW 1 VPLS
VPLS
LT n

VLAN 1

iBridge 1

DSL

Note 1 — This document describes the configuration of an iBridge VLAN


with MPLS. For the configuration of an iBridge VLAN without MLPS, see
NTP 15.

Note 2 — In case redundant PWs are needed towards the network, see
NTP 26.

24.2 Prerequisite
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled:

• The board must have been planned; see DLP 100


• xDSL profiles must have been created; see DLP 49

24.3 Procedure
Proceed as follows to configure an iBridge VLAN with MPLS at the network side (see Figure 8):

142 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3135 Configure an iBridge VLAN with MPLS at
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT the network side

Figure 8 Configure an iBridge VLAN with MPLs

DLP 1120
(DLP 3120) DLP 3124
(DLP 3287) DLP 1232
DLP 3231 DLP 3242 DLP 3245 DLP 3240 DLP 3243 DLP 3231 DLP 3351
Network IHub IHub IHub VPLS Access LT VLAN for
Ports SDP SDP VPLS SAPs Ports iBridge
binding
DLP 3239
LDP
C 11
iBridge

Phy
SDP
PW a v-VPLS S17 +C23
Phy VLAN 11 iBridge

v-VPLS S 13
Phy
SDP VLAN 17 iBridge
PW a
Phy LT

v-VPLS C 11
Phy
SDP VLAN 13
PW a
iBridge
Phy

NT_IHUB S17 +C23


iBridge

S 13
iBridge
ISAM_IHUB
LT

1 Configure a VLAN on the LT for iBridge:

a in case of a C-iBridge; see DLP 48.

b in case of an S+C-iBridge; see DLP 197.

c in case of an S-iBridge; see DLP 204.

2 Configure a VLAN TPID; see DLP 289

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 143


NTP 3135 Configure an iBridge VLAN with MPLS at Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
the network side 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

3 Create a user and add him to a VLAN created in step 1. Do one of the following:

a create an xDSL user and add him to a VLAN on the LT; see DLP 105.

b create an xDSL IPoA user and add him to a VLAN on the LT (for iBridge); see DLP 74.

c create a native Ethernet/NNI user and add him to a VLAN on the LT; see DLP 258.

4 Configure network ports and access ports on the IHub; see DLP 154.

Note — The ports must be configured as follows:

• The ports facing the network on which Label Edge Router (LER)
functionality is needed should be defined as mode network.
• The ports facing the user should be defined as mode access and of
category residential.
• The ports facing the network can also be defined of mode access and
category regular, but then LER functionality is not supported.

5 Configure a VPLS per NSP on the IHub; see DLP 162.

6 Configure SAPs on the IHub VPLS; see DLP 165.

• The SAPs must be configured with a dot1q tag equal to the bridging VLAN.
• Configure as many SAPs as there are LT boards and directly-connected user ports.

7 Configure the LSP towards the NSP on the IHub:

Note — This is optional as an LSP could already exist (that is, an LSP
that was already created for other services).

a for static LSP: create a static LSP; see DLP 169.

b for dynamic LSP: enable LDP on the network interfaces; see DLP 161.

8 Configure an SDP on the IHub; see DLP 164.

Note — This is optional as an LSP could already exist (that is, an LSP
that was already created for other services).

• Indicate that it uses a static LSP or a dynamic LSP.


• Define how service labels are configured (static or dynamic using T-LDP)

9 Configure a SDP binding between the IHub VPLS and SDP; see DLP 167.

144 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3135 Configure an iBridge VLAN with MPLS at
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT the network side

10 Optionally, configure static MAC addresses in IHub and LT; see DLP 127.

11 Optionally, if in step 1 “secure forwarding” was enabled on the VLAN on the LT, create a static
IP user/subnet; see DLP 141.

12 Optionally, control broadcast and secure forwarding on an iBridge; see DLP 270.

13 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 145


NTP 3135 Configure an iBridge VLAN with MPLS at Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
the network side 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

146 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3136 Configure a VLAN cross-connect using
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT MPLS at the network side

25 NTP 3136 Configure a VLAN


cross-connect using MPLS at the
network side
25.1 Purpose
The NE supports several VLAN cross-connect models:

• Customer VLAN cross-connect or C-VLAN CC


• Service provider VLAN cross-connect or S-VLAN CC
• VLAN stacking or S+C-VLAN CC

Note — This document describes the configuration of a VLAN


cross-connect with MPLS. For the configuration of a VLAN cross-connect
without MLPS, see NTP 14.

25.1.1 Purpose of C-VLAN CC


Use this model when a given PVC at the user side needs to be considered as a virtual leased line
in the network. For each user, an Ethernet pipe is established that transparently passes the user
over a dedicated MPLS PW. Within the ISAM, a VLL service of type EPIPE is created.

The association of user traffic to a VLL is done by labeling that user traffic with an ISAM-unique
C- VLAN. At the network side, a PW is configured with a service label identifying the VLL.

The usage of MPLS PW for VLL has the advantage that cross-connect scales above 4K as a
dedicated PW is identified via a 20-bit label value instead of a 12-bit VLAN identifier. Within a
single ISAM the maximum number is limited to 500.

Note 1 — A single PW uniquely identifies the customer. There is no


need to pass the C-VLAN inside the service tunnel. The removal of the
VLAN can be done by configuring the SDP binding in raw mode.

Note 2 — In case you need redundant PWs towards the network, see
NTP 26.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 147


NTP 3136 Configure a VLAN cross-connect using Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
MPLS at the network side 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

Figure 9 C-VLAN CC using MPLS


NT LT 1

LSP 1 PW 1 VLL VLAN 1 VLAN-CC

DSL

GLT-ONT

LSP 2 PW 3 VLL VLAN 2 VLAN-CC

DSL
GLT ONT

LT n

PW 3 VLL VLAN 3 VLAN-CC


LSP 3

PW 4 VLL VLAN 4 VLAN-CC


DSL
4K

25.1.2 Purpose of S+C-VLAN CC


Use this model when a separate VLL service per given PVC at the user side is overkill. This is the
case when all the VLL services would terminate at the same endpoint and when no service
differentiation is required between the users in the MPLS network.

In this model, all the traffic of users of the same NSP is aggregated in the same MPLS PW and
the customer traffic can be identified by the unique C-VLAN being passed (this is in contrast to
NTP 24 where no user specific C-VLAN is passed).

The association of user traffic to that dedicated VPLS is done by labeling the user traffic with an
NSP-specific S-VLAN on top of the C-VLAN.

This model can theoretically scale up to 4K NSPs (that is, the number of S-VLANs), but as the
number of VPLS services is limited in hardware and software, it scales up to 200 NSPs.

Note 1 — A single PW uniquely identifies the NSP. There is no need to


pass the S-VLAN inside the service tunnel. The removal of the S-VLAN
can be done by configuring the SDP binding in raw mode.

Note 2 — Frames on the subscriber interface may be C-VLAN tagged or


untagged/priority tagged. In case of C-VLAN tagged frames, a check will
be performed on the received C-VLAN ID, while the pre-configured
S-VLAN of the subscriber interface will be assigned. In case of
untagged/priority tagged frames, the pre-configured C-VLAN and
S-VLAN of the subscriber interface will be assigned.

148 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3136 Configure a VLAN cross-connect using
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT MPLS at the network side

Figure 10 S+C VLAN using MPLS


NT LT 1

S-VLAN 7 C-VLAN 1 translation


+ add S-VLAN
DSL

GLT-ONT
C-VLAN 1 C-VLAN 2 translation
S-VLAN 7
VPLS + add S-VLAN
LSP 1 C-VLAN 2
DSL
PW 1
C-VLAN 3 GLT ONT
C-VLAN 4
LT n
C-VLAN 3 translation
+ add S-VLAN
S-VLAN 7
C-VLAN 4 translation
+ add S-VLAN
DSL

25.1.3 Purpose of S-VLAN CC


Use this model when a given PVC at the user side needs to be considered as a virtual leased line
in the network. For each user, an Ethernet pipe is established that transparently passes the user
traffic over a dedicated MPLS PW. Within the ISAM, a VLL service of type EPIPE is created.

The association of user traffic to a VLL is done by labeling that user traffic with an ISAM-unique S-
VLAN. At the network side, a PW is configured with a service label identifying the VLL.

The difference with C-VLAN cross-connect is that it allows transparent passing of customer
VLANs.

Note 1 — As a single PW identifies uniquely the customer there is no


need to pass the S-VLAN inside the service tunnel. The removal of the
S-VLAN can be done by configuring the SDP binding in raw mode.

Note 2 — In case redundant PWs are needed towards the network, see
NTP 26.
Figure 11 S VLAN using MPLS
NT LT n

Tunnel VLAN-CC
PW 2 VLL VLAN 1 (tunnel)
VLAN
LSP 2

PW 3 VLL VLAN 3 VLAN-CC


(mapped)
DSL

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 149


NTP 3136 Configure a VLAN cross-connect using Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
MPLS at the network side 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

25.2 Prerequisite
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled:

• The board must have been planned; see DLP 100.


• xDSL profiles must have been created; see DLP 49.

25.3 Procedure
Proceed as follows (see Figure 12):

Figure 12 Configure an VLAN cross-connect with MPLS


DLP 3231 DLP 3240 DLP 3244
Network IHub VPLS
Ports VPLS SAPs DLP 1117
(DLP 1118)
DLP 3242 DLP 3246 DLP 3241 DLP 3231 (DLP 3119) DLP 3124
IHub IHub IHub Access LT VLAN for DLP 1174
SDP SDP EPIPE Ports C-VLAN CC DLP 3351
binding
DLP 3239
LDP C 11 C-VLAN
VLAN CC CC
EPIPE

LSP SDP
S17 +C23 S+C-VLAN
CC
Phy VPLS VLAN CC
(No VLAN
LT
Phy translation
shown on
SDP user side)

LSP S17 +C29 S+C-VLAN


EPIPE CC
VLAN CC

S 13 S-VLAN
CC
VLAN CC
LT
NT

ISAM

1 Configure a VLAN on the LT for VLAN cross-connect. Do one of the following:

a For C-VLAN cross-connect; see DLP 46.

b For S-VLAN cross-connect; see DLP 47.

c For S+C-VLAN cross-connect; see DLP 104.

150 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3136 Configure a VLAN cross-connect using
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT MPLS at the network side

2 Configure VLAN TPID, see DLP 289

3 Create a user and add him to a VLAN created in step 1. Do one of the following:

a create an xDSL user and add him to a VLAN on the LT; see DLP 105.

b create an xDSL IPoA user and add him to a VLAN on the LT (for C-VLAN
cross-connect): see DLP 59.

c create a native Ethernet/NNI user and add him to a VLAN on the LT; see DLP 258.

4 Configure regular ports and residential ports on the IHub; see DLP 154.

5 Configure a VPLS or an EPIPE per NSP on the IHub:

• For VLPS; see DLP 162.


• For EPIPE; see DLP 163.

6 Configure SAP on the IHub. Do one of the following:

Note — The SAPs must be configured with a VLAN ID so that:

• In case of C-VLAN CC, the VLAN ID is the ID of the C-VLAN


• In case of S-VLAN CC, the VLAN ID is the ID of the S-VLAN
• In case of S+C-VLAN CC, the VLAN ID is the ID of the S-VLAN
a Configure SAPs on the IHub for VPLS; see DLP 165.

b Configure a single SAP on the IHub for EPIPE; see DLP 166.

7 Configure the LSP towards the NSP on the IHub:

Note — This is optional as there could already exist an LSP (that is, an
LSP that was already created for other services).

a for static LSP: create a static LSP; see DLP 169.

b for dynamic LSP: enable LDP on the network interfaces; see DLP 161.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 151


NTP 3136 Configure a VLAN cross-connect using Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
MPLS at the network side 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

8 Configure an SDP on the IHub; see DLP 164.

Note — This is optional as there could already exist a SDP (that is, an
SDP that was already created for other services).

• Indicate that it uses a static LSP or a dynamic LSP.


• Define how service labels are configured (static or dynamic using T-LDP).

9 Configure a SDP binding. Do one of the following:

a For an SDP binding between the IHub VPLS and SDP; see DLP 167.

b For an SDP binding between the IHub EPIPE and SDP; see DLP 168.

10 Optionally, configure static MAC addresses in IHub and LT; see DLP 127.

11 Optionally, if in step 1 “secure forwarding” was enabled on the VLAN on the LT, create a static
IP user subnet; see DLP 141.

12 Optionally, control broadcast and secure forwarding on a VLAN CC; see DLP 270.

13 STOP. This procedure is complete.

152 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3137 Configure PW redundancy
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

26 NTP 3137 Configure PW


redundancy
26.1 Purpose
The models described in NTP 25 using EPIPE have the disadvantages that when the peer PE fails
that the cross-connect service is no longer running (as the PW ID is down). Therefore it can be
useful to provide PW redundancy, that is, use a configuration where the service provider has two
PWs: one PW towards PE1 being the preferred one and one PW towards PE2 being the fallback.

PW redundancy is also useful for models using a VPLS described in NTP 24 and NTP 25.

Figure 13 Pseudo-wire redundancy


LT 1

NT iBridge 1
Active
VLAN 1
LSP 1 PW 1 DSL

VPLS
VPLS
LT n
LSP 2 PW 2 VLAN 1

iBridge 1
Standby
Active DSL

LSP 3 PW 3

VPLS
VLAN 2 VLAN-CC
LSP 4 PW 4
DSL

Standby

26.2 Prerequisite
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled:

• The board must have been planned; see DLP 100.


• xDSL profiles must have been created; see DLP 49.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 153


NTP 3137 Configure PW redundancy Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

26.3 Procedure
Proceed as follows (see Figure 14):

Note — Only the differences with NTP 24 and NTP 25 are indicated.

Figure 14 Configure PW redundancy


DLP 3231
Network
Ports
DLP 3244
DLP 3242 DLP 3249 VPLS DLP 3231
IHub IHub SAPs Access
SDP endpoint Ports

DLP 3239
DLP 3241
LDP
IHub
EPIPE

LT
PW a
SDP End VPLS
Phy point
Phy
SDP

PW a
NT LT

ISAM

1 Configure an endpoint on the VPLS, see DLP 170.

2 Configure a SDP binding between the IHub VPLS and SDP and bind it to an endpoint; see
DLP 171.

3 STOP. This procedure is complete.

154 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3138 Configure full business bridging
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

27 NTP 3138 Configure full business


bridging
27.1 Purpose
This model offers direct user to user communication between two user ports with full transparency
of C-VLANs.

Figure 15 Full business bridging


NT LT 1

LSP 1 PW 1 C-VLAN Tunnel VLAN 1 VLAN-CC


DSL

VPLS
LT n
VLAN x
C-VLAN Tunnel VLAN 2 VLAN-CC
DSL

27.2 Prerequisite
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled before a VLAN-CC of any type can be configured:

• The board must have been planned; see DLP 100.


• xDSL profiles must have been created; see DLP 49.

27.3 Procedure
Proceed as follows:

1 Configure S-VLAN cross-connects on the LT boards; see DLP 47:

Note — If the cross-connect is configured on the same board, then


S-VLAN 1 must be equal to S-VLAN 2.

i Configure an S-VLAN 1 cross-connect on the LT board

ii Configure an S-VLAN 2 cross-connect on the same LT board or on another LT board

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 155


NTP 3138 Configure full business bridging Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

2 Create xDSL users and add them to the S-VLANs created in step 1; see DLP 105 or DLP 59:

i Create an xDSL user 1 and add him to S-VLAN 1

ii Create an xDSL user 2 and add him to S-VLAN 2

3 Configure access ports on the IHub; see DLP 154.

Note — The ports must be configured as follows:

• The ports facing the user should be defined as mode access and of
category residential.
• The ports facing the network should be defined of mode access and
category regular (non-MPLS).

4 Configure a VPLS on the IHub; see DLP 162.

i Activate user-to-user communication.

ii Activate unrestricted MAC learning.

5 Configure SAPs on the IHub VPLS for each S-VLAN created in step 1: see DLP 165.

6 STOP. This procedure is complete.

156 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3139 Manage and monitor EPON alarms
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

28 NTP 3139 Manage and monitor


EPON alarms
28.1 Purpose
This NTP provides the procedures to manage and monitor the EPON alarms on the NE.

28.2 Procedure
Use the following procedure to manage and monitor the alarms.

1 To set and verify notification codes for alarm and event conditions, see DLP 210.

2 To allow autonomous messages based on a specified severity, see DLP 210.

3 To set RSSI thresholds for EPON alarm conditions, see DLP 211.

4 To monitor current EPON alarms, see DLP 212.

5 To configure SFP/XFP RSSI profile parameters, see DLP 242.

6 To retrieve SFP/XFP configuration data, see DLP 243.

7 To isolate and troubleshoot faults, see TAP 323.

8 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 157


NTP 3139 Manage and monitor EPON alarms Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

158 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3140 Monitor performance of EPON system
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

29 NTP 3140 Monitor performance of


EPON system
29.1 Purpose
This NTP provides the procedures to monitor the performance of an EPON system.

29.2 General
This NTP lists the procedures to:

• retrieve PM counters
• report optical status between the OLT and the ONT

29.3 Procedure
Use the following procedures to monitor performance of the EPON system.

1 See DLP 234 to enable PM for the EPON system.

2 See DLP 234 to retrieve PM counters for the following interfaces:

• EPON
• ONT
• ONT Ethernet UNI

3 See DLP 235 to enable or disable reporting of optical power levels.

4 See DLP 235 to report the optical power levels between the OLT and the ONT, and the
operating parameters of the optics module on the PON and the ONT.

5 See TAP 326 to enable the collection and retrieval of OTDR data on a per-PON basis.

6 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 159


NTP 3140 Monitor performance of EPON system Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

160 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3141 Configure IGMP and multicast for an
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT EPON ONT

30 NTP 3141 Configure IGMP and


multicast for an EPON ONT
30.1 Purpose
This NTP provides the steps to configure IGMP and multicast for an EPON ONT.

30.2 General
The EPON ONT can be configured in one of three IGMP modes:

• control
• snooping
• flooding

See “Configuration considerations” for an explanation of each mode.

30.3 Configuration considerations


When configuring IGMP for the EPON ONT, the operator must be aware of IGMP and multicast
configuration requirements and implementation across the 7360 ISAM FX. Multicast services
impact both the LT and NT cards as well as the EPON ONT. The LT card implements a multicast
forwarder and IGMP proxy. The LT card forwards multicast streams from internal ports to user
ports. IGMP channels and advanced features such as cross-VLAN multicasting, fast leave, most
of SSM, RAC on the user line, access control and CDRs are implemented in the LT card.

30.3.1 Configuring in the control or IGMP snooping mode


When the EPON OLT is acting as IGMP proxy, there are two basic models for configuring the
EPON ONT multicast forwarding table:

• The ONT can use control mode, where the multicast forwarding table is defined by the OLT via
extended OAM messaging. This mode is normally used when the OLT is managing the IPTV
service.
• The ONT can perform IGMP snooping and maintain the multicast forwarding table itself. This
mode would be used when a central IPTV platform is managing the IPTV service. When the
ONT is configured for IGMP snooping, from one to eight multicast VLANs are required for each
Ethernet UNI to specify the multicast traffic that can pass downstream from the EPON ONT to
the UNI.

Figure 16 illustrates 7360 ISAM FX multicast with the EPON ONT in IGMP control mode.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 161


NTP 3141 Configure IGMP and multicast for an Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
EPON ONT 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

Figure 16 7360 ISAM FX multicast with EPON ONT in IGMP control mode
EPON OAM
STB ONT channel
Unicast VLAN IGMP controllable
LIM
mcast fwd IGMP Proxy

mcast fwd
ONT IHub
Multicast IGMP Snooper
VLAN Aggregation
LIM mcast fwd
IGMP Proxy
network

mcast fwd

Multicast VLANs
Multicast channels
Multicast VLANs Multicast bundles
Multicast channels Router ports
IGMP channels Multicast trees
Multicast packages

Figure 17 illustrates 7360 ISAM FX multicast with the EPON ONT in IGMP snooping mode.

Figure 17 7360 ISAM FX multicast with EPON ONT in IGMP snooping mode
STB ONT
Unicast VLAN IGMP snooping
LIM
mcast fwd IGMP Proxy

mcast fwd
ONT IHub
Multicast IGMP Snooper
VLAN Aggregation
LIM mcast fwd
IGMP Proxy
network

mcast fwd

Multicast VLANs
Multicast channels
Multicast VLANs Multicast bundles
Multicast channels Router ports
IGMP channels Multicast trees
Multicast packages

30.3.2 Configuring in the flooding mode


IGMP flooding mode is supported specifically for MDUs that use an EPON uplink, such as the
7353 ISAM FTTB. The MDU with the EPON uplink acts as the IGMP proxy and uses a separate
SNMP management channel to configure services and UNIs. The OAM management channel is
used for EPON MAC configuration.

A dedicated SNMP management channel must be configured for MDUs with EPON uplink that are
configured in IGMP flooding mode.

162 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3141 Configure IGMP and multicast for an
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT EPON ONT

30.4 Prerequisites
The prerequisites are:

• The EPON interface must be provisioned; see DLP 220.


• Multicast VLANs must be configured prior to specifying them for the Ethernet UNI.
• The operator must be aware of IGMP multicast configuration requirements and implementation
across the 7360 ISAM FX, including on the LT and NT cards.

30.5 Procedure
Use this procedure to configure IGMP and multicast for the EPON ONT.

1 Select and configure the IGMP mode of the EPON ONT; see DLP 221.

a CONTROL is used if the multicast forwarding table is to be defined by the OLT via
extended OAM messaging.

b SNOOPING is used if the ONT is to perform IGMP snooping and maintain the multicast
forwarding table itself.

c FLOODING is used specifically for MDUs with EPON uplinks that use a dedicated
SNMP channel to manage services and UNIs.

2 If IGMP snooping mode is specified, configure from one to eight multicast VLANs for each
Ethernet UNI for the EPON ONT; see DLP 226.

3 If the multicast forwarding mode for an ONT Ethernet UNI is set to translation, then configure
up to eight VLAN translation pairs for the UNI; see DLP 226.

4 If IGMP flooding mode is specified, ensure that the SNMP management channel is
configured for the MDU; see DLP 222.

5 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 163


NTP 3141 Configure IGMP and multicast for an Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
EPON ONT 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

164 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3142 Download, activate, and commit ONT
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT software

31 NTP 3142 Download, activate, and


commit ONT software
31.1 Purpose
This NTP provides the steps to download, activate, and commit software on an ONT.

31.2 General
There are three methods to upgrade the software on an ONT after the ONT registers at the PON.
The value of the ONT parameter SWPLNDVER determines the software upgrade method for a
specific ONT.

• Planned (sw-ver-pland=planned software version)


For a planned software upgrade, the OLT automatically downloads, activates, and commits the
ONT software after the ONT registers, if the configured planned software version for the ONT
differs from the active software version on the ONT.
If the software upgrade mode is set for MSO EPON, the OLT sets the software filename before
restarting the ONT.
• Automatic (sw-ver-pland=AUTO)
For automatic software upgrades, the ONT software version control table specifies the planned
software version for the ONT. The OLT automatically downloads, activates, and commits this
software version to a newly-registered ONT that is configured in automatic upgrade mode, and
has a pre-configured entry in the ONT software version control table.
For MSO EPON, auto mode using the software version table is not supported.
• Manual (sw-ver-pland=MANUAL)
For a manual software upgrade, the operator must download, activate, and commit the ONT
software using TL1.
If the software upgrade mode is set for MSO EPON, you must restart the ONT using CLI.

The OLT can download the software in CTC, TK, or DPoE mode:

• CTC or DPoE are used if the ONU can extract the files from the software package. In CTC
mode, the OLT downloads the software package from the NT to the LT to the ONU.
• TK or DPoE is used if the ONU cannot extract the files from the software package:
• The OLT extracts the files from the software package for the ONU at the NT.
• The OLT downloads the extracted files from the NT to the LT to the ONU.
• China EPON may use CTC or TK mode based on ONU type
• MSO EPON may use DPoE or TK mode based on ONY type

Note — The OLT can support TK and DPoE links to OAM on the same
PON concurrently.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 165


NTP 3142 Download, activate, and commit ONT Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
software 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

The value of the ONT parameter upgrade-mode determines the software download mode.

Figure 18 depicts the ONT software download process.

Note — For the ONT software download process, ONU type 1/2 is used
for China EPON, and ONU type 3 is used for MSO EPON.

Figure 18 ONT Software download process

ONU Software Control Map


ONU Software image PLAN DPoE
ONU type 1 XXXXYYYYRnnmmma AUTO CTC
ONU type 2 XXXXYYYYRnnmmmb MANUAL TK
ONU type 3 3FEXXXXXYYYYaa

ONU 1

ONU 2
Internal Extended
TFTP communication OAM
EMS download NT download LT download

1 2 3
ONU 64*8

CI002807

31.3 Configuration considerations

31.3.1 Software version names for China EPON


When provisioning software to run on an ONT, the following file name format is used:

• XXXXY1Y2Y3Y4Rnnmmmae

• XXXXY1Y2Y3Y4Rnnmmmbe

where

• XXXX is part number.


• Y1 is customer.
• Y2 is hardware version number.
• Y3 is OEM manufacturer.
• Y4 is chipset.
• R is voice version number (R=All, S=SIP, M=Megaco).
• nnmmma is the version number.
• e is reserved for future use.

166 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3142 Download, activate, and commit ONT
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT software

For example, for an EPON ONU EONU400-E with part number 3FE61450AABA, the software
name is: 1450AABAR040000. The image will be placed in the /Sw/Ont/XXXX directory of the NT.
XXXX is the ONT.

Note — When the automatic or planned software upgrade methods are


used, the ONU software file format must be tar format. For these two
software upgrade methods, the NT board performs the untar file
operation. If the file is not in tar file format, an alarm will be reported.

31.3.2 Software version names for MSO EPON


In North America, GPON naming rules will be used, for example: 3FE61450AABA01. The image
will be placed in the /Sw/Ont directory of the NT, without the leading “3”.

• FEXXXXXY1Y2Y3Y4aa

where

• FEXXXXX is part number.


• Y1 is customer.
• Y2 is hardware version number.
• Y3 is OEM manufacturer.
• Y4 is chipset.
• R is voice version number (R=All, S=SIP, M=Megaco).
• nnmmma is the version number.
• e is reserved for future use.

31.3.3 Software download failures


The software download has failed if one of the alarms in Table 8 is raised. See TAP 323 for more
information about these alarms.

Table 8 Software download failure alarms

Alarm Description

SWVERMM Software version mis-match

SWDLMM Software download mode mismatch

SWVERNF Software version not found in ONT software version control file

SWDLFM Software download file missing

SWDLFAIL Software download failure

SWACTFAIL Software activation failure

SWCMTFAIL Software commit failure

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 167


NTP 3142 Download, activate, and commit ONT Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
software 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

If the ONT software download fails, verify that the correct load was specified, then attempt to
redownload by editing the ONT out of service and back in service

31.4 Prerequisites
The prerequisites are:

• The ONU must be configured on the network.


• The ONT software version must be in the NT file system.

31.5 Procedure
Use this procedure to download, activate, and commit ONT software.

Note — For MSO EPON software upgrade mode, automatic upgrade


using a software version table is not supported.

1 Create an entry in the ONT software version control table for the specified ONT hardware
version and software version variant using DLP 215.

Note — For China EPON, when the operator creates an entry in the
ONT software version control table, the OLT creates the sub-directory
/Sw/Ont/XXXX in the NT file system on the flash disk for the ONT
hardware type XXXX if the sub-directory does not exist, and enables write
privileges.

2 Upload the ONT software image to the specified software directory on the NT flash disk using
TFTP protocol.

3 Determine the software download mode required by the ONT (CTC, TK, or DPoE).

4 Choose the method to upgrade the software on an ONT:

a Upgrade the software on the ONT in manual mode using DLP 215.

b Upgrade the software on the ONT in planned mode using DLP 213.

c Upgrade the software on the ONT in automatic mode using DLP 214

5 To maintain the ONT software version control table, see DLP 216.

6 STOP. This procedure is complete.

168 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3143 Configure a VoIP service for EPON
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

32 NTP 3143 Configure a VoIP


service for EPON
32.1 Purpose
This NTP provides the steps to configure a VoIP service for EPON ONTs.

32.2 General
This NTP describes the steps to activate VoIP service on an EPON ONT. The configuration
elements include the following:

• ONT
• ONT LLID
• PONVLAN and SHub VLAN used for the VoIP signaling and bearer traffic
• digit map profile configured for the SIP user agent
• SIP user agent configured for the ONT
• voice common table configured for the ONT
• H.248 media gateway table configured for the ONT
• VoIP POTS lines configured for each of the ONT ports

32.3 Prerequisites
The prerequisites are:

• The ONU must be configured on the network.


• The following must be decided:
• choice of VoIP protocol that will be used: SIP or H.248
• choice of configuration mode for SIP
• for SIP, a network address profile and authentication credentials for iConfig (or Sipping)
configuration server if needed, or the name of the configuration profile
• for H.248, the name of the configuration profile
• optional IP address parameters to identify the softswitches, the ONT, and the FTP server
in the network
• The operating personnel must have network management access or craft port access to the
OLT that supports the ONT where VoIP services are to be provisioned.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 169


NTP 3143 Configure a VoIP service for EPON Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

32.4 Procedure
Use this procedure to create, modify, delete, or view a VoIP service for ONTs.

1 Configure the S-VLAN for the VoIP service on the IHub.

2 Attach the S-VLAN to the applicable network port and LT card.

3 Configure the S-VLAN including the VLAN mode and tagging mode on the LT.

4 Ensure that the ONT is configured on the network; see DLP 221.

5 Modify the LLID for the EPON ONT, if applicable; see DLP 223.

6 Configure the VoIP common table for the ONT; see DLP 228.

7 If you specified IP mode “static” for the ONT voice common table in step 6, create a static
ARP entry in the ARP table for the PON VLAN.

8 Perform one of the following:

a If you are using SIP:

i Configure the digit map profile for the SIP user agent; see DLP 229.

ii Configure the SIP user agent for the ONT; see DLP 230.

b If you are using H.248, configure the VoIP Media Gateway for the ONT; see DLP 231.

9 Configure the VoIP POTS lines for the ONT; see DLP 232.

10 Verify VoIP operation using DLP 233.

11 STOP. This procedure is complete.

170 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3144 Configure an APIPE service
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

33 NTP 3144 Configure an APIPE


service
33.1 Purpose
This NTP provides the steps for configuring an APIPE service.

33.2 General
An APIPE service is used to carry ATM cells over an MPLS network. This enables service
providers to offer “emulated” ATM services over existing MPLS networks. In ISAM, the LT board
acts as a Pseudo Wire Emulation Edge-to-Edge (PWE3) edge and the NT board acts as a normal
bridge.

PWE3 is a mechanism that emulates the essential attributes of a service like ATM over a Packet
Switched Network (PSN). The required functions of an APIPE service include:

1 encapsulating service-specific ATM cells arriving at an ingress port


2 carrying them across a path or tunnel
3 managing their timing and order
4 any other operations required to emulate the behavior and characteristics of the service as
faithfully as possible

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 171


NTP 3144 Configure an APIPE service Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

Figure 19 ATMoPWE3 Network

VPI/VCI
cross connector
8/35 80/32
80/32

Residential
8/35 80/33
80/33 VLAN or S-VLAN
8/35 80/34
80/34
Pseudowire

C-VLAN
Protocol stack

ATM ATM PVC

PWE3

MPLS

VLAN
PWE3 in
8/35
N:1 mode OPM
NETWORK PWE3 GW
Residential

80/32
8/35
80/33
8/35 80/32
80/34
80/33
VLAN A 80/34
8/35 90/32
OLO with shared

90/32
bandwidth

9/40 90/33
VLAN B 90/33
90/34
8/35
90/34
92/32
S-VLAN C 92/33
92/32

8/35
OLO with dedicated
bandwidth/business

92/33 93/33
8/36
8/35 93/33
S-VLAN D 94/33

8/35 94/33

Protocol stack
PWE3 in
ATM
IP 1:1 mode
DSLAM PWE3

MPLS

C-VLAN

S-VLAN

Each xDSL access can be "ADSL1/2+" or "SHDSL 2/4 wires"

You can configure a distributed IP Interface, Inbound LSP, Outbound LSP, SDP, SDP binding,
APIPE SDP binding, VCL binding to attain the functionality of the end-to-end APIPE service.

The distributed IP interface configuration specifies the IP address and its corresponding subnet
mask for the IP Interface, over which the Inbound and Outbound LSP configurations have to be
done.

The distributed Inbound LSP configuration specifies the MPLS label that needs to be contained in
the Downstream (DS) traffic of this Pseudowire (PW).

The distributed Outbound LSP configuration specifies the MPLS label used in the Upstream (US)
traffic of the PW.

172 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3144 Configure an APIPE service
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

The APIPE service model uses logical entities that interact to provide a service. The service model
requires the service provider to create configurations for three main entities:

1 Services
2 Virtual Channel Link (VCL)
3 Service Distribution Points (SDPs)

An Service Distribution Path (SDP) is the network-side termination point for an ATMoPWE3
tunnel. A SDP acts as a logical way of directing traffic from one router to another through a
uni-directional (one-way) service tunnel. The SDP terminates at the far-end router which directs
packets to the correct service egress VCL on that device.

The SDP binding configuration associates the SDP with a specific APIPE service.

The VCL binding configuration associates the ATM PVC with a specific APIPE service.

The APIPE SDP binding configuration specifies the following parameters of the SDP binding:

• max-count: maximum number of ATM cells (towards US direction) that can be accumulated
into an Ethernet frame
• max-delay: maximum amount of time (in ms) to wait while performing ATM cell concatenation
into an MPLS packet before transmitting the MPLS packet

33.3 Procedure
Use this procedure to configure an APIPE service:

1 Configure an ATM PVC line with encapsulation type “None”; see DLP 240.

2 Configure the APIPE service:

i Configure a Distributed IP Interface; see DLP 240.

ii Configure a Distributed Inbound LSP; see DLP 240.

iii Configure a Distributed Outbound LSP; see DLP 240.

iv Configure a Distributed SDP; see DLP 240.

v Configure a Distributed APIPE service; see DLP 240.

vi Configure a Distributed SDP binding; see DLP 240.

vii Configure a Distributed VCL binding; see DLP 240.

viii Optionally, Configure a QOS trTCM policer for the US traffic; see DLP 51.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 173


NTP 3144 Configure an APIPE service Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

ix Optionally, configure (modify) the distributed APIPE service to associate with a different
QOS session profile; see DLP 240.

x Optionally, configure (modify) the distributed APIPE SDP binding (cell concatenation)
parameters; see DLP 240.

3 STOP. This procedure is complete.

174 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3145 Download and install an application on the
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT AI platform

34 NTP 3145 Download and install an


application on the AI platform
34.1 Purpose
This procedure provides the steps to:

• enable the Application Intelligence (AI) platform on ISAM


• download and install an application on the AI platform.

34.2 Procedure
Proceed as follows:

1 Enable an AI Platform on ISAM; see DLP 244.

2 Download and install an application on the AI Platform; see DLP 245.

3 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 175


NTP 3145 Download and install an application on the Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
AI platform 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

176 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3146 Manage DPoE links to OAM (EPON)
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

35 NTP 3146 Manage DPoE links to


OAM (EPON)
35.1 Purpose
This NTP provides the steps to manage DPoE mode links to operation, administration and
management functions for the EPON system.

35.2 General
Using the DPoE link to OAM feature, the operator can perform ONU software upgrades, control
the ONU VLAN process, retrieve current alarm statistics, or restart the ONU. DPoE links to OAM
can be accessed using the following modes:

• CTC: China
• TK: China and MSOs in North America
• DPoE: MSOs in North America

Note 1 — The OLT can support TK and DPoE links to OAM on the same
PON concurrently.

Note 2 — DPoE in the context of this NTP and related DLPs, means that
the OAM type will support DPoE provisioning if the system is converted
to DPoE services in the future.

The following ONU software upgrade modes are supported using DPoE links to OAM:

• plan
• manual

See NTP 31 “NTP 3142 Download, activate, and commit ONT software” for more information.

35.3 Procedure
Use this procedure to manage DPoE mode links to OAM.

1 Determine the software upgrade mode required by the ONT (CTC, TK, or DPoE).

2 Configure the software upgrade mode:

a Upgrade the software on an ONT in manual mode using DLP 215.

b Upgrade the software on an ONT in planned mode using DLP 213.

3 Configure DPoE services, see DLP 252.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 177


NTP 3146 Manage DPoE links to OAM (EPON) Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

4 Retrieve trouble-shooting statistics, see DLP 195

5 Retrieve current alarm statistics, see DLP 253.

6 STOP. This procedure is complete.

178 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3147 Configure DPoE
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

36 NTP 3147 Configure DPoE


36.1 Purpose
This NTP provides the steps to set up a DPoE (DOCSIS provisioning over EPON) user platform
and to configure DPoE services for the ISAM system in North America. DPoE Operations,
Administration, Maintenance and Provisioning (OAMP) functionality can be enabled to allow
existing EPON equipment to re-use existing DPoE Operations Support System Infrastructure
(OSSI).

See Chapter “DPoE Network Architecture” in the Systems Description Guide for FD 100/320 Gbps
and FX NT for more information.

36.2 General
The procedures in this NTP provide a general workflow for the operator to use as a guideline only.
You can see the following references for a complete description of the commands and parameters
supported.

See your Nokia representative and/or Technical Support Services for assistance, if required.

36.2.1 References
The following references apply:

• CLI Command Guide for FD 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT


• IHub Interface Guide
• IHub Router Configuration and Protocols Guide
• IHub Services Guide

36.3 Procedure
Use this procedure to configure DPoE.

1 Setup a local CLI session, see DLP 45.

2 Create a default operator profile, see DLP 123.

3 Plan, replan, and unplan equipment, see DLP 100.

4 Configure DPoE ISAM management access, see DLP 259.

5 Configure DPoE general parameters, see DLP 260.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 179


NTP 3147 Configure DPoE Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

6 Configure a VLAN and IP address for ISAM management access, see DLP 156.

7 Configure a security access policy to NT OBC on IHub, see DLP 157.

8 Configure SSH and SFTP, see DLP 57.

9 Configure general security settings, see DLP 65.

10 Configure system parameters (supplement SNTP or NTP configuration), see DLP 94.

11 Configure RADIUS/TACACs+, see DLP 112 / DLP 283.

12 Configure SNMP, CMTS events and trap management, see DLP 271.

13 Configure vCM SNMP, trap and event management, see DLP 272.

14 Enable EMS management, see DLP 122.

15 Manage the alarms, see DLP 99.

16 Manage the IHub database, see DLP 118.

17 Configure a DPoE platform for MEF service auto-provision; see DLP 304.

18 Configure a DPoE MEF service, see DLP 261.

19 Configure a DPoE IP (HSD) service, see DLP 262.

20 Configure a DPoE static Cable Modem (CM) service, see DLP 264.

21 Configure an IPDR service, see DLP 301.

22 Configure D-ONU authentication parameters, see DLP 265.

23 If required, configure IP(HSD) serving group selection per SVLAN, see DLP 268.

24 If required, configure IP(HSD) ARP downstream flooding, see DLP 269.

25 Configure a DPoE DHCPv6 Service, see DLP 274.

26 Configure QoS for MEF Service over DPoE Network, see DLP 275.

180 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3147 Configure DPoE
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

27 Configure an E-Line Service over DPoE Network, see DLP 276.

28 Configure an E-LAN Service over DPoE Network, see DLP 277.

29 Upgrade an E-LAN Service over DPoE Network, see DLP 278.

30 Configure DPoE turbo mode, see DLP 287.

31 Configure DPoE lease query; see DLP 290

32 Detect DPoE rogue ONUs; see RTP 316

33 Configure a DPoE multicast service; see DLP 303.

34 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 181


NTP 3147 Configure DPoE Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

182 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3148 Configure a GPON uplink
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

37 NTP 3148 Configure a GPON


uplink
37.1 Purpose
The GPON uplink on 7363 ISAM MX or 7367 ISAM SX can be configured for backhaul through
CLI or TL1 at the 7360 ISAM FX (OLT) or 7342 ISAM FTTU (OLT) as described in Table 9.

Table 9 Procedures for configuring the GPON uplink

OLT Procedure to configure GPON uplink on 7363 ISAM MX or 7367 ISAM SX


7360 ISAM FX Described in NTP Configure a GPON uplink
See Operations and Maintenance Using TL1 for 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT
See TL1 Commands and Messages for 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

7342 ISAM FTTU Described in NTP Configure GPON uplink


See Operations and Maintenance Using TL1 for 7342 ISAM FTTU
See TL1 Commands and Messages for 7342 ISAM FTTU

37.2 General
This NTP describes the high-level steps to configure a GPON uplink on 7363 ISAM MX or 7367
ISAM SX for backhaul procedures through CLI at the 7360 ISAM FX.

For detailed information about the 7360 ISAM FX CLI commands, see the CLI Command Guide
for FD 100/320Gbps NT and FX NT.

37.3 Procedure
Proceed as follows to configure a GPON uplink on 7363 ISAM MX or 7367 ISAM SX through CLI
at the 7360 ISAM FX:

1 Configure an Ethernet port on the NT card; see DLP 154.

2 Configure and unlock an LT card; DLP 100 and DLP 101.

3 Configure a PON port on the LT card that you configured in step 2; see DLP 179.

4 Configure an ONT on the PON port that you configured in step 3, and enable IPHC and set
the admin state to up; see DLP 180.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 183


NTP 3148 Configure a GPON uplink Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

5 Configure a VEIP ONT card on the ONT that you configured in step 4, and set the admin state
to up; be sure to set the ‘planned-card-type’ as VEIP and to set the number of data ports to
1; see DLP 180.

Note — A VEIP should be created as an NNI in transparent mode.

6 Create the VEIP port on the VEIP ONT card created in step 5, and set the admin state to up;
see DLP 193.

7 Configure profiles:

i Configure a QoS bandwidth profile; see DLP 203.

ii Associate the QoS bandwidth profile that you configured in step 7i with a QoS interface;
see DLP 203.

iii Configure a QoS ingress profile; see DLP 203.

Note — For NNI transparent mode, the QoS ingress profile can be
specified but will be ignored in upstream because gem port mapping is
based on pbit only.

8 Configure VLAN ports:

i For HSI service, configure a C or S cross-connect VlanPort; see DLP 46 and DLP 47.

ii For VOIP service, configure a vlan port; see DLP 48.

9 Configure a v-VPLS service and SAPs for HSI:

i Configure a v-VPLS service. The VLAN ID for the VLAN is the one that you configured
in step 8i; see DLP 153.

ii Configure an NT SAP for the VPLS service that you configured in step 9i. The VLAN ID
for the VLAN is the one you that configured in step 8i; see DLP 155.

iii Configure an LT SAP for the VPLS service that you configured in step 9i. The VLAN ID
for the VLAN is the one that you configured in step 8i; see DLP 155.

184 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3148 Configure a GPON uplink
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

10 Configure a v-VPLS service and SAPs for VoIP:

i Configure a v-VPLS service. The VLAN ID for the VLAN is the one that you configured
in step 8ii; see DLP 153.

ii Configure an NT SAP for the VPLS service that you configured in step 10i. The VLAN
ID for the VLAN is the one that you configured in step 8ii; see DLP 155.

iii Configure an LT SAP for the VPLS service that you configured in step 10i. The VLAN
ID for the VLAN is the one that you configured in step 8ii; see DLP 155.

11 Configure a VLAN port for in-band management:

i Configure a residential bridge VLAN; see DLP 48.

ii Configure a bridge port for the VLAN, then configure the tag parameter to single-tagged
and configure a static user IP address; see DLP 141.

Note — Configuring a static user IP address is only required when


secure forwarding is enabled on the OLT. Note that the DPU SNMP
management address can be configured from the OLT, but does not need
to be configured from the OLT.

12 Configure v-VPLS service and SAPs for in-band management:

i Configure a v-VPLS service. The VLAN ID for the VLAN is the one that you configured
in step 11i; see DLP 153.

ii Configure an NT SAP for the VPLS service that you configured in step 12i. The VLAN
ID for the VLAN is the one that you configured in step 11i; see DLP 155.

iii Configure an LT SAP for the VPLS service that you configured in step 12i. The VLAN
ID for the VLAN is that you configured in step 11i; see DLP 155.

13 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 185


NTP 3148 Configure a GPON uplink Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

186 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3150 Configure NG-PON2
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

38 NTP 3150 Configure NG-PON2


38.1 Purpose
This NTP provides basic conceptual information and the procedures required to configure
NG-PON2 on the 7360 ISAM FX platform.

38.2 General
NG-PON2 is a passive optical network that utilizes Time and Wavelength Division Multiplexed
(TWDM PON) technology and 10G GPON technology to support multiple subscribers grouped into
multiple wavelength pairs with the ability to co-exist with several other PONs technologies on the
on the same fiber as separated wavelengths. In this regard the following PON technologies can
be used with the addition of a Wavelength Multiplexer and Coexistence Element on the fiber plant:

• analog RF video
• GPON
• Universal NG-PON (XGS-PON or NG-PON2)
• EPON
• 10G EPON

In NG-PON2, a channel group corresponds to the NG-PON2 optical fiber feeder reaching all
ONTs.

Once the channel group is created, the operator can allocate one or several channel pairs
resources to it. This configuration reflects the fact that a channel pair is physically attached to the
wavelength multiplexer equipment.

Note 1 — Each channel pair on a channel group must have a unique


wavelength TX/RX pair to avoid optical conflict.

Note 2 — One subchannel group per channel group is supported.

To deploy services on an NG-PON2 channel group, the operator must logically partition a channel
group into one or several subchannel group(s). For example, one possible application for
subchannel groups is to wholesale a channel group between several service providers, each one
with one or more subchannel groups reserved for its exclusive use.

It is an operators responsibility to allocate the channel pairs of a given channel group to one or
another subchannel group, as one channel pair can only be allocated to a single subchannel
group. Allocating channel pairs to subchannel groups can reflect how much resource is
wholesaled to each service provider.

For NG-PON2, service provisioning is done by configuring each ONT to belong to a single
subchannel group. Configuring an ONT to a given subchannel group reflects the fact that the ONT
subscribes to the service offered by this subchannel group.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 187


NTP 3150 Configure NG-PON2 Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

In addition to configuring the ONT to a subchannel group, the operator must also configure the
ONT with a preferred channel pair belonging to the ONT subchannel group. The preferred channel
pair of an ONT is the channel pair which will enforce and enable service to the ONT.

Optionally, the operator can also configure the ONT with a protection channel pair that also
belongs to the ONT subchannel group. The protection channel pair of an ONT is the alternate
channel pair which the ONT can use at activation time or in service following a protection
switch-over, should the preferred channel pair be unable to provide service to the ONT.

The configuration of a protection channel pair can be done during ONT creation or at anytime after
that. Note that the protection channel pair is an ONT specific parameter. The ONTs in the same
subchannel group can use different protection channel pairs even if they would use the same
preferred channel pair.

Optionally, the operator can also configure the ONT with an alternative preferred channel pair that
also belongs to the ONT subchannelgroup. The alternative preferred channel pair of an ONT is
the channel pair it can be instructed to re-tune upon operator request. The intention of this
alternative preferred channel pair is that it eventually becomes the new preferred channel pair of
the ONT.

Note — In the current release, the alternative preferred channel pair


cannot be configured when a protection channel pair is already assigned
to the ONT.

Figure 20 summarizes these basic NG-PON2 concepts. The lambda symbols shown in the figure
represent a value of 1 to 6 respectively.

188 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3150 Configure NG-PON2
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

Figure 20 NG-PON2 basic concepts

Dedicated to Dedicated to
Service Provider_a Service Provider_b

Sub- Sub- Sub-


channelgroup channelgroup channelgroup
1 2 3 ONT
Provisionned on
(pref7) Subchannelgroup
Service 3 (-> ServProv_a)
Provider_a ONT
(pref7)
Provisionned on
EMAN OLT Mux ONT Subchannelgroup
Service 2 (-> ServProv_b)
Provider_b
Provisionned on
Channelgroup ONT Subchannelgroup
(feeder fiber) 3 (-> ServProv_b)
(pref7)
Channelpair
(fiber)
24935

Note — An OLT can support several channel groups, although this


concept is not shown in the figure above.

See the System Description Guide for FD 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT


for more information about NG-PON2.

38.3 Configuration guidelines


The general steps required to configure NG-PON2 are as follows:

• configure a channel group


• configure a subchannel group
• configure a channel pair
• allocate channel pairs to a channel group
• allocate channel pairs to one or more subchannel group
• configure one or more ONTs in given subchannel groups

38.4 Procedure
Use the following procedure to configure NG-PON2:

1 Configure a channel group and a subchannel group in the OLT; see DLP 279.

2 Configure a channel pair; see DLP 280.

3 Allocate a channel pair to a channel group and a subchannel group; see DLP 281.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 189


NTP 3150 Configure NG-PON2 Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

4 Configure an ONT in a given subchannel group; see DLP 180.

5 Configure NG-PON2 performance monitoring; see DLP 284.

6 STOP. This procedure is complete.

190 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3152 Modify system scaling mode
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

39 NTP 3152 Modify system scaling


mode
39.1 Purpose
This NTP provides the steps to modify the system scaling mode.

39.2 General
The following system scaling modes are supported:

• layer 2 plus mode: l2plus


• layer 3 plus host mode: l3plus_host
• layer 3 plus LPM mode: l3plus_lpm

39.3 Prerequisites
None.

39.4 Procedure
Use the following procedure to modify the system scaling mode:

1 Configure the new system scaling mode; see DLP 288.

2 Reboot the system to apply the new system scaling mode; see DLP 54.

3 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 191


NTP 3152 Modify system scaling mode Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

192 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3154 Configure zero touch provisioning
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

40 NTP 3154 Configure zero touch


provisioning
40.1 Purpose
This NTP provides the steps to configure zero touch provisioning.

40.2 General
ISAM supports the configuration of zero touch provisioning to simplify the installation of small
and/or remote ISAM nodes which are installed closer to the end user in the access network.

Zero touch provisioning allows for the following:

• installation of an arbitrary node at any installation site


• installation without the need for on-site provisioning using a craft terminal
• installation without the need to open the sealed unit

Zero touch provisioning is performed in three stages, as follows:

• connection for basic IP through DHCP


• download and execution of the pre-configuration file
• supervision by AMS

During the different stages, the LEDs provide external indication and status of the ISAM node.

40.3 Prerequisites
None.

40.4 Hardware considerations


Zero touch provisioning is supported on FANT-F and FANT-G cards only.

40.5 References
See System Description for FD 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT for more information about ISAM
zero touch provisioning.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 193


NTP 3154 Configure zero touch provisioning Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

40.6 Procedure
Use the following procedure to configure zero touch provisioning:

1 Enable or disable zero touch provisioning; see DLP 294.

2 STOP. This procedure is complete.

194 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3155 Manage PON upstream bandwidth
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT utilization

41 NTP 3155 Manage PON upstream


bandwidth utilization
41.1 Purpose
This NTP provides the steps to manage PON upstream bandwidth utilization.

41.2 General
ISAM supports the management of GPON/NG-PON2 upstream bandwidth utilization and allows
operators to reserve bandwidth as per provisioning, or to utilize bandwidth from un-provisioned
ONTs as guaranteed bandwidth. Operators can improve upstream bandwidth and CAC to
accommodate various PON splits.

PON upstream bandwidth utilization can be improved by provisioning the following requirements:

• reserve bandwidth at the PON level


• reserve bandwidth per ONT/PON
• configure CAC for remaining bandwidth against TCONT/PON

Two modes are supported, as follows:

• dynamic mode:
• allows utilization of available PON bandwidth as guaranteed bandwidth
• allows utilization of available PON bandwidth adjusted as ONTs are provisioned
• static mode:
• allows reservation of available PON bandwidth to accommodate maximum allowed
number of ONTs on the PON
• allows remaining bandwidth to be used as guaranteed bandwidth

41.3 Prerequisites
None.

41.4 Hardware considerations


None.

41.5 References
See System Description for FD 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT. See CLI Command Guide for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 195


NTP 3155 Manage PON upstream bandwidth Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
utilization 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

41.6 Procedure
Use the following procedure to manage PON upstream bandwidth utilization.

1 Configure maximum ranging ONTs number; see DLP 295.

2 Configure maximum TCONTS per frame; see DLP 296.

3 Clear alarm of ranging number mismatch; see DLP 297.

4 Review trap and log bandwidth per PON/channel-pair changes; see DLP 298.

5 Display QoS interface bandwidth; see DLP 299.

6 STOP. This procedure is complete.

196 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3156 Configure XGS-PON
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

42 NTP 3156 Configure XGS-PON


42.1 Purpose
This NTP provides basic conceptual information and the procedures required to configure
XGS-PON on the 7360 ISAM FX platform.

42.2 General
XGS-PON is a symmetric passive optical network system in an optical access network for
residential, business, mobile backhaul, and other applications. This system operates over a
point-to-multipoint optical access infrastructure at the nominal data rate of 10 Gigabits per second
both in the downstream and upstream directions. It provides service to multiple end users through
TDM. In the upstream direction, XGS-PON supports dual line rates of 2.5 Gbit/s and 10Gbit/s. This
enables co-existence of XGS-PON1 ONTs and XGS-PON ONTs on the same ODN. With the
addition of a co-existence element and/or WDM filter on the fiber plant, it also has the ability to
co-exist with several other PON technologies such as the following:

• analog RF video
• GPON
• NG-PON2

Note — Co-existence is valid for XGS-PON with a basic wavelength


setting only. The optional wavelength set defined in G.9807.1 is currently
not supported and would result in a different co-existence scenario.

Similar to the NG-PON2 management model, the operator must create a channel group. In
XGS-PON, a channel group corresponds to the optical fiber feeder reaching all ONTs. Once the
channel group is created, the operator can allocate XGS-PON channel pair resources to it. Only
a single channel pair per channel group is allowed.

Also similar to the NG-PON2 management model, the operator must create a subchannel group
within the aforementioned channel group. Once the subchannel group is created, the operator can
allocate the XGS-PON channel pair to it. In XGS-PON, only a single subchannel group per
channel group is allowed.

Subsequently, the operator provision XGS-PON ONTs and/or XGPON1 ONTs on the subchannel
group, and assign the unique XGS-PON channel pair available to each of them in this subchannel
group.

Note — See the System Description Guide for 100/320 Gbps FD and
FX NT for more information about XGS-PON.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 197


NTP 3156 Configure XGS-PON Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

42.3 Configuration Guidelines


The general steps required to configure XGS-PON are as follows:

• configure a channel group


• configure a subchannel group within the channel group
• configure an XGS-PON channel pair
• allocate the XGS-PON channel pair to the channel group
• allocate the XGS-PON channel pair to the subchannel group
• configure one or more ONTs in the subchannel group

42.4 Procedure
Use the following procedure to configure XGS-PON:

1 Configure a channel group and a subchannel group in the OLT; see DLP 279.

2 Configure an XGS-PON channel pair; see DLP 280.

3 Allocate an XGS-PON channel pair to a channel group and a subchannel group; see DLP
281.

4 Configure an ONT in the subchannel group; see DLP 180.

5 Configure XGS-PON performance monitoring; see DLP 284.

6 STOP. This procedure is complete.

198 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3159 Configure an interface port
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

43 NTP 3159 Configure an interface


port
43.1 Purpose
This NTP provides the information and procedures required to configure an interface port.

43.2 General
It is important to distinguish the port type because the behavior of the system may be different
dependent on the port type parameter configuration.

43.3 Procedure
Use the following procedure to configure an interface port:

1 Configure a port on an Ethernet LT; see DLP 177.

2 Configure a port on a VDSL LT; see DLP 305

3 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 199


NTP 3159 Configure an interface port Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

200 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3160 Configure a dynamic VLAN assignment in
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT PoL

44 NTP 3160 Configure a dynamic


VLAN assignment in PoL
44.1 Purpose
This NTP provides the steps to configure a dynamic VLAN assignment in Passive Optical LAN PoL
scenarios, supported in GPON, NG-PON2, and XGS-PON technologies.

44.2 General
Different from traditional static configuration VLANs for end-user services, ISAM also provides the
dynamic assignment of VLANs that may particularly be needed in Enterprise environments.

Port-based 802.1x authentication is not sufficient for PoL scenarios. Hence, a MAC-based
authentication function is required.

44.2.1 Dynamic VLAN assignment


Dynamic VLAN assignment is based on 802.1x MAC-based authentication. This feature allows for
the association of the end users towards a network service VLAN, based on IEEE 802.1x (Radius)
authentication results.

An operator needs to configure all VLAN ports and forwarder modes in the client side. Once
authenticated, the server will reply the network information and the OLT will dynamically associate
the VLAN port and forwarder mode. This association will be removed after 802.1x authentication
is clear.

Note — If dynamic VLAN assignment is enabled, the parameter


accept-all in the command configure system security radius
aut-s-unreach-act (reject-all) \ accept-all) can not be used for the
802.1x sessions in case authentication servers are down or unreachable.

44.2.2 802.1x MAC-based authentication


Traditional 802.1x authentication is port-based, which means that on one UNI port any client traffic
can pass through if one authentication is complete. MAC-based authentication is different in that
MAC1 (client1) must complete the 802.1x authentication before the MAC1 traffic can pass
through. The MAC2 (client2) from the same UNI port can not access the network until MAC2
completes authentication.

Note — Static MAC address can not be configured if 802.1x


MAC-based authentication is enabled.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 201


NTP 3160 Configure a dynamic VLAN assignment in Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
PoL 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

In a PoL scenario, each connected user needs authentication separately when they are connected
through the same UNI such as; WiFi, Ethernet switch, IP-phone, subtending, and so on. Therefore
MAC-based authentication is needed. Only authenticated users MAC addresses can be in the
allowed list, as user MAC addresses that fail authentication will be blocked.

The exception is when the system defines the default forwarder for the users who do not pass
authentication. In this case, the failed user authentication triggers the MAC address to be allowed
to access the default forwarder only. This function will not be active unless an operator explicitly
configures the default forwarder and enables it system-wide.

44.3 Configuration considerations


Dummy devices are supported when connected in a PoL scenario. These devices (a printer for
example) are also connected to an 802.1x enabled UNI. In this case, the system supports the MAC
address fallback authentication which uses the MAC address of the dummy device as the
username/password for 802.1x authentication.

An un-authenticated VLAN service (authentication fail VLAN service) is typically used for guests.
A special RB forwarder that is not used for service can be selected as the default forwarder and
associated to a VLAN. When a client fails to authenticate a session (normally, user name or
password is not correct), the OLT can associate the VLAN port in the client side to the
un-authentication. Therefore the client can still access the network, but with some limitation.

Note — The un-authenticated VLAN can not be the same one as the
default VLAN.

44.4 User level


The command in this procedure can be accessed and executed by operators with alarm, oam, and
VLAN privileges.

44.5 Prerequisites
None.

44.6 Hardware considerations


Supported hardware: FANT-F, and FANT-G boards.

44.7 References
See the following references for more information:

• System Description for FD 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT


• CLI Command Guide for FD 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

202 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD NTP 3160 Configure a dynamic VLAN assignment in
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT PoL

44.8 Procedure
Use the following procedure to configure a dynamic VLAN assignment on PoL:

1 Configure the VLAN port level upstream queues on the PON UNI; see DLP 207.

2 Configure all VLAN forwarders which may be allocated by the RADIUS server; see DLP 46
or DLP 48.

3 Configure 802.1x; see DLP 52.

4 Optionally, enable MAC address bypass (MAB) in 802.1x:

i Configure dynamic VLAN assignment; see DLP 52.

ii Configure a dummy device in RADIUS server; see DLP 306.

5 Optionally, configure an un-authentication VLAN service; see DLP 48.

6 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 203


NTP 3160 Configure a dynamic VLAN assignment in Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
PoL 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

204 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD Detailed Level Procedures (DLP)
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

Detailed Level Procedures (DLP)


45 DLP 1100 Set up a local CLI or TL1 session

46 DLP 1117 Configure a VLAN on the LT for C-VLAN network


cross-connect

47 DLP 1118 Configure a network VLAN on the LT for S-VLAN


cross-connect

48 DLP 1120 Configure a network VLAN on the LT for C-iBridge

49 DLP 1129 Create xDSL profiles

50 DLP 1130 Configure xDSL bonding

51 DLP 1134 Configure QoS

52 DLP 1145 Configure 802.1x

53 DLP 1146 Configure PPPoE relay on LT

54 DLP 1152 Reboot the system

55 DLP 1159 Manage OSWP

56 DLP 1163 Modifying xDSL profiles

57 DLP 1170 Configure SSH and SFTP

58 DLP 1173 Switch a user from ADSL to VDSL and vice versa

59 DLP 1174 Create an xDSL IPoA user and add this user to a VLAN
for C-VLAN cross-connect

60 DLP 1187 Configure global VLAN parameters

61 DLP 1188 Configure custom PSD points

62 DLP 1189 Configure VDSL2 virtual noise values

63 DLP 1201 Configure protocol tracing

64 DLP 1202 Configure QoS threshold crossing alerts

65 DLP 1203 Configure general security settings

66 DLP 1205 Configure link related Ethernet OAM

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 205


Detailed Level Procedures (DLP) Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

67 DLP 1206 Configure an xDSL DPBO profile

68 DLP 1207 Modify an xDSL DPBO profile

69 DLP 1208 Configure xDSL power back off

70 DLP 1215 Configure the impulse noise sensor on an xDSL line

71 DLP 1217 Configure the xDSL overrule data

72 DLP 1221 Manage troubleshooting counters on LT

73 DLP 1225 Configure the p-bit counter on a VLAN port

74 DLP 1232 Create an xDSL IPoA user and add this user to a VLAN
for iBridge

75 DLP 1257 Configure a line with an xDSL RTX profile

76 DLP 1258 Modify an xDSL RTX profile

77 DLP 1291 Configure a VDSL2 vectoring control entity profile and


associate it to a board

78 DLP 1292 Modify a Vectoring Control Entity profile

79 DLP 1295 Configure a line with an xDSL vectoring profile

80 DLP 1296 Modify an xDSL vectoring profile

81 DLP 1297 Delete an xDSL vectoring profile

82 DLP 1298 Monitor xDSL vectoring lines

83 DLP 1330 Initiate a connectivity fault management test

84 DLP 1336 Configure fallback for xDSL vectoring

85 DLP 1347 Configure a priority regeneration profile

86 DLP 1358 Configure a bonding group with a group RTX profile

87 DLP 1380 Configure fallback for xDSL bonding vectoring

88 DLP 1386 Configure xDSL SOS profiles

89 DLP 1404 Configure an xDSL legacy UPBO profile

90 DLP 1419 Configure an E1 line interface

91 DLP 1420 Configure multi-framing and CRC on an E1 line

206 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD Detailed Level Procedures (DLP)
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

92 DLP 1421 Configure operator login retry policy

93 DLP 3101 Create operator profiles and instances

94 DLP 3103 Configure system parameters

95 DLP 3105 Configure link aggregation usage

96 DLP 3107 Manage OSPF

97 DLP 3108 Manage RIP

98 DLP 3109 Configure SNMP and trap management

99 DLP 3110 Manage alarms

100 DLP 3111 Plan, re-plan, and unplan equipment

101 DLP 3112 Lock and unlock equipment

102 DLP 3113 Configure the equipment

103 DLP 3114 Configure NT redundancy

104 DLP 3119 Configure a VLAN on the LT for S+C-VLAN


cross-connect

105 DLP 3124 Create an xDSL/native Ethernet user and add this user
to a VLAN on the LT

106 DLP 3132 Configure filtering on the NT

107 DLP 3136 Configure the multicast service in the system

108 DLP 3137 Configure a multicast v-VPLS

109 DLP 3138 Configure a multicast channel

110 DLP 3140 Configure DHCP relay agent in router mode

111 DLP 3142 Configure the security domain

112 DLP 3144 Configure RADIUS

113 DLP 3147 Configure PPPoX cross-connect

114 DLP 3151 Shut down and restart the NT

115 DLP 3153 Shut down and restart individual equipment

116 DLP 3154 Create a snapshot alarm table

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 207


Detailed Level Procedures (DLP) Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

117 DLP 3155 Monitor alarms

118 DLP 3157 Manage the IHub database

119 DLP 3164 Ping another host

120 DLP 3165 Perform a traceroute action

121 DLP 3167 Script files

122 DLP 3171 Enable EMS management

123 DLP 3172 Create a default operator profile

124 DLP 3176 Configure performance monitoring

125 DLP 3177 Configure SFP downlink ports

126 DLP 3179 Configure system logging

127 DLP 3180 Configure static MAC addresses

128 DLP 3181 Configure operator authentication using RADIUS

129 DLP 3182 Configure SHDSL

130 DLP 3183 Configure IMA on SHDSL spans

131 DLP 3190 Configure threshold crossing alerts

132 DLP 3195 Configure general bridge parameters

133 DLP 3196 Configure voice SIP

134 DLP 3197 View port configuration and operational data on LT

135 DLP 3198 Configure the multicast service on a user port

136 DLP 3199 Configure QoS on the IHub

137 DLP 3200 Configure Spanning Tree on the IHub

138 DLP 3209 Configure vMAC

139 DLP 3210 View the status of various system parameters

140 DLP 3211 Configure SFP uplink ports

141 DLP 3212 Create an IP user/subnet

142 DLP 3213 Enable OAM counters

208 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD Detailed Level Procedures (DLP)
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

143 DLP 3214 Configure connectivity fault management

144 DLP 3216 Configure voice Megaco

145 DLP 3219 Forced NT switchover

146 DLP 3220 Manage the CDE profile

147 DLP 3223 Configure IHub port mirroring

148 DLP 3224 Change shelf mode

149 DLP 3226 Manage IS-IS

150 DLP 3227 Create a customer

151 DLP 3228 Create and update a VPRN or an IES service

152 DLP 3229 Configure an IP interface and SAP on a VPRN or an IES

153 DLP 3230 Configure v-VPLS

154 DLP 3231 Manage the ports on the LT, NT/NTIO

155 DLP 3233 Configure an SAP on a v-VPLS

156 DLP 3234 Configure a VLAN and IP address for ISAM


management access

157 DLP 3235 Configure a security access policy to NT OBC on IHub

158 DLP 3236 Configure the enhanced system clock synchronization

159 DLP 3237 Manage BGP

160 DLP 3238 Configure the internal bidirectional speed for the NT-LT
link

161 DLP 3239 Manage LDP

162 DLP 3240 Configure VPLS

163 DLP 3241 Configure an EPIPE

164 DLP 3242 Configure SDP

165 DLP 3243 Configure an SAP on a VPLS

166 DLP 3244 Configure an SAP on an EPIPE

167 DLP 3245 Configure an SDP binding on a VPLS

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 209


Detailed Level Procedures (DLP) Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

168 DLP 3246 Configure an SDP binding on an EPIPE

169 DLP 3247 Configure a static LSP

170 DLP 3248 Configure an endpoint on a VPLS

171 DLP 3249 Associate an SDP binding with an endpoint of a VPLS

172 DLP 3250 Configure an IP interface on top of a VPLS

173 DLP 3251 Configure an IP interface on the base router

174 DLP 3252 Configure a multicast VPLS

175 DLP 3253 Configure the third-party equipment management port


on the 7356 FD REM

176 DLP 3254 Configure L3 multicasting

177 DLP 3255 Configure a port on an Ethernet LT

178 DLP 3259 Create ONT profiles

179 DLP 3260 Configure GPON

180 DLP 3261 Configure an ONT

181 DLP 3262 Create a GPON xDSL user

182 DLP 3263 Create a GPON Ethernet user

183 DLP 3264 Create a GPON CES pseudowire service

184 DLP 3265 Create a GPON VoIP service

185 DLP 3266 Create a GPON video service

186 DLP 3267 GPON performance monitoring

187 DLP 3268 GPON port mirroring

188 DLP 3269 Configure virtual noise values for ONT VDSL2

189 DLP 3270 Configure spanning tree on the NELT-B LT

190 DLP 3271 Configure link aggregation on the NELT-B LT

191 DLP 3272 Configure VDSL2 DPBO parameters for ONT VDSL2

192 DLP 3273 External packet forwarding

210 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD Detailed Level Procedures (DLP)
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

193 DLP 3274 Create a GPON virtual Ethernet interface point (VEIP)

194 DLP 3275 Create a GPON VoIP service using an IP host

195 DLP 3276 Manage PON troubleshooting counters on the LT

196 DLP 3279 Create a multicast VLAN translation entry

197 DLP 3280 Configure a network VLAN on the LT for S+C-iBridge

198 DLP 3281 Configure VEIP-style VoIP service

199 DLP 3282 Configure the fairness SLA on the NELT-B LT

200 DLP 3283 Troubleshooting congestion on the NELT-B LT

201 DLP 3284 Enable the hairpinning feature for voice services

202 DLP 3285 Configure SNTP proxy on a VLAN

203 DLP 3286 Configure upstream queue at the ONT

204 DLP 3287 Configure a VLAN on the LT for S-iBridge

205 DLP 3288 Configure an S+C-iBridge on the PON LT

206 DLP 3289 Configure downstream remote queue at the ONT

207 DLP 3290 Configure VLAN port level upstream queues on GPON
UNI

208 DLP 3293 Delete a vectoring control entity profile

209 DLP 3294 Configure or modify the mapping between the VP board
and the SLV LT boards

210 DLP 3299 Set and view notification codes for alarm and event
conditions

211 DLP 3300 Set RSSI thresholds for EPON alarm conditions

212 DLP 3301 Monitor current EPON alarms

213 DLP 3302 Download software to an ONT in planned mode (EPON)

214 DLP 3303 Download software to an ONT in automatic mode


(EPON)

215 DLP 3304 Download software to an ONT in manual mode (EPON)

216 DLP 3305 Maintain the ONT software version control table

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 211


Detailed Level Procedures (DLP) Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

217 DLP 3306 Retrieve ONT software download status

218 DLP 3307 Configure traffic profiles for ONT UNIs

219 DLP 3308 Retrieve default queue profile

220 DLP 3309 Configure an EPON

221 DLP 3310 Configure an ONT for an EPON system

222 DLP 3311 Modify ONT management channels

223 DLP 3312 Modify the LLID for an ONT

224 DLP 3313 Configure an Ethernet UNI

225 DLP 3314 Configure an ONT Ethernet UNI for VLAN trunk,
translation, or aggregation forwarding

226 DLP 3315 Configure multicast VLANs for an ONT Ethernet UNI

227 DLP 3316 Apply traffic filter to ONT Ethernet UNI

228 DLP 3317 Configure a VoIP common table for an EPON ONT

229 DLP 3318 Configure a digit map profile for a SIP user agent

230 DLP 3319 Configure the VoIP SIP user agent for EPON ONTs

231 DLP 3320 Configure VoIP H.248 media gateway table for EPON
ONTs

232 DLP 3321 Configure VoIP POTS line for EPON ONTs

233 DLP 3322 Retrieve voice operation information for EPON ONTs

234 DLP 3323 Enable and retrieve EPON PM counters

235 DLP 3324 Report optical status between EPON OLT and EPON
ONT

236 DLP 3325 Configure PON port protection

237 DLP 3326 Create a GPON HPNA service

238 DLP 3327 Create a TR-069 management server

239 DLP 3328 Create a GPON SNMP service

240 DLP 3329 Configure an APIPE service

212 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD Detailed Level Procedures (DLP)
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

241 DLP 3331 Create a multicast PON VLAN translation entry

242 DLP 3332 Set RSSI thresholds on NT, NTIO, and LT PON SFP
interfaces

243 DLP 3333 Retrieve SFP/XFP RSSI configuration data

244 DLP 3334 Enable an application intelligence platform on the ISAM

245 DLP 3335 Download and install an application on the AI platform

246 DLP 3337 Configure the BCMP client (EPON)

247 DLP 3338 Configure RMS global parameters (EPON)

248 DLP 3339 Configure dot1q Ethertype per v-VPLS

249 DLP 3341 Perform a PPPoE emulation test on a UNI port

250 DLP 3342 Configure E1/T1/DS1 service with 2E1/T1 SFP

251 DLP 3343 Configure E1 service diagnostics using 2E1 SFP

252 DLP 3344 Configure a DPoE service using CTC, TK, or DPoE links
to OAM (EPON)

253 DLP 3345 Display current alarm statistics using DPoE links to
OAM (EPON)

254 DLP 3346 Enable VP-LT auto-discovery for system level


vectoring

255 DLP 3348 Disable VP-LT auto-discovery for single host system
level vectoring

256 DLP 3349 Troubleshooting counters on the REM expansion link

257 DLP 3350 Switch users from VDSL2 non-vectored to VDSL2


vectored

258 DLP 3351 Create a native Ethernet/NNI user and add this user to
a VLAN on the LT

259 DLP 3353 Configure DPoE ISAM management access

260 DLP 3354 Configure DPoE general parameters

261 DLP 3355 Configure a DPoE MEF service

262 DLP 3356 Configure a DPoE IP (HSD) service

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 213


Detailed Level Procedures (DLP) Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

263 DLP 3357 GPON ONT loop detection

264 DLP 3359 Configure a static cable modem service

265 DLP 3360 Configure DPoE authentication parameters

266 DLP 3361 Ping from an ONT for VoIP

267 DLP 3362 Create a GPON MoCA service

268 DLP 3363 Configure IP(HSD) serving group selection per SVLAN

269 DLP 3364 Configure IP(HSD) ARP downstream flooding

270 DLP 3365 Controlling broadcast and secure forwarding on an


iBridge and Vlan CC

271 DLP 3366 Configure DPoE system SNMP, CMTS event and trap
and management

272 DLP 3367 Configure DPoE system vCM SNMP, trap and event
management

273 DLP 3369 Manage P-bit troubleshooting counters on the LT

274 DLP 3372 Configure a DPoE DHCPv6 service

275 DLP 3373 Configure QoS for MEF service over DPoE network

276 DLP 3374 Configure an E-Line service over DPoE network

277 DLP 3375 Configure an E-LAN service over DPoE network

278 DLP 3376 Upgrade an E-LAN service over DPoE network

279 DLP 3381 Configure a channel group and a subchannel group in


the OLT

280 DLP 3382 Configure a channel pair

281 DLP 3383 Allocate a channel pair to a channel group and a


subchannel group

282 DLP 3384 Configure L2 DHCP relay

283 DLP 3385 Configure TACACs+

284 DLP 3387 Configure NG-PON2 performance monitoring

285 DLP 3400 Configure GPON VDSL2 custom PSD shape

214 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD Detailed Level Procedures (DLP)
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

286 DLP 3391 Configure GPON/NG-PON2 uplink connectivity fault


management

287 DLP 3401 Configure DPoE turbo mode

288 DLP 3402 Configure system scaling mode

289 DLP 3404 Configure VLAN TPID

290 DLP 3405 Configure DPoE lease query

291 DLP 3408 Configure L2 DHCPv6 relay

292 DLP 3410 Configure ONT system parameters

293 DLP 3411 Configure a NAPT service

294 DLP 3412 Enable or disable zero touch provisioning

295 DLP 3413 Configure maximum ranging ONT number

296 DLP 3414 Configure maximum TCONTS per frame

297 DLP 3415 Clear alarm of ranging number mismatch

298 DLP 3416 Review trap and log bandwidth per PON/channel-pair
changes

299 DLP 3417 Display QoS interface bandwidth

300 DLP 3418 Manage the LSA SIP server

301 DLP 3424 Configure an IPDR service

302 DLP 3425 Configure a shared SIP termination subscriber line

303 DLP 3426 Configure a DPoE multicast service

304 DLP 3428 Configure a DPoE platform for MEF service


auto-provision

305 DLP 3430 Configure a port on a VDSL LT

306 DLP 3431 Configure RADIUS server in Linux

307 DLP 3432 Configure a shared subscriber line for 2 H.248 POTS
terminations

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 215


Detailed Level Procedures (DLP) Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

216 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD DLP 1100 Set up a local CLI or TL1 session
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

45 DLP 1100 Set up a local CLI or TL1


session
45.1 Purpose
This procedure provides the steps to set up a local CLI session or a local TL1 session with the
ISAM using the local craft connection.

Note 1 — For security purposes, it is advised to change the default user


name and password both for CLI sessions and for TL1 sessions when
you log in for the first time.

Note 2 — 7362 ISAM DF does not support TL1 configuration.

45.2 Procedure
Proceed as follows to set up a local CLI or TL1 session:

1 Enter LOGIN to start up the command line interface.

The login prompt appears.

2 After the question “Would you like a CLI(C) or a TL1 login(T) or TL1 normal session(N)? [N]:”,
type C and press Enter.

3 Enter the default user name (isadmin) and password (i$@mad-) that were provided to you
with the system.

Warning — After three unsuccessful login attempts (that is, each


consisting of three failed username/password prompts), the ISAM will
block all login attempts from the IP address or from the craft port from
which the three unsuccessful login attempts were initiated for a period of
two minutes.

If the user fails to successfully log in after this timeout has expired, the
ISAM extends the blocking period with two minutes and will continue to
extend this blocking period with two minutes for each failed login attempt.

Note — For remote CLI, after you set up the management channel, you
can set up a remote CLI session using Telnet.

4 Log out.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 217


DLP 1100 Set up a local CLI or TL1 session Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

5 Enter LOGIN to start up the command line interface.

The login prompt appears.

6 After the question “Would you like a CLI(C) or a TL1 login(T) or TL1 normal session(N)? [N]:”,
type T or N and press Enter.

7 Enter the default user name (SUPERUSER) and password (ANS#150) that were provided to
you with the system.

8 Log out.

9 STOP. This procedure is complete.

218 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD DLP 1117 Configure a VLAN on the LT for C-VLAN
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT network cross-connect

46 DLP 1117 Configure a VLAN on the


LT for C-VLAN network
cross-connect
46.1 Purpose
This procedure provides the steps to configure a network VLAN on the LT for C-VLAN
cross-connect.

This is the most straightforward VLAN cross-connect model where a single VLAN ID at the EMAN
side is associated with a given user. Any kind of traffic issued by the subscriber is passed
transparently towards the network using the selected VLAN ID.

Note — This configuration is used system-wide and the operator does


not need to identify any specific LT.

Figure 21 Configure a VLAN on the LT for C-VLAN cross-connect


DLP

C-VLAN
CC
LT

NT

ISAM

46.2 Reserved or default system VLAN identifiers


The following VLAN IDs are used by the system and cannot be used for configuration purposes
by the operator:

• VLAN IDs 0 and 4095: reserved by IEEE


• VLAN ID 4094: internal communication VLAN

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 219


DLP 1117 Configure a VLAN on the LT for C-VLAN Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
network cross-connect 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

Sometimes an ISAM feature requires reserving a new VLAN ID. In general such VLAN IDs are
configurable, with the default values located in the upper range of the VLAN ID space. The set of
VLAN IDs that need to be reserved are ISAM product variant specific. Some examples:

• Internal Communication VLAN: programmable in [1..4093] with default 4092


• MPLS internal control VLAN: programmable in [1..4093] with default 4089

So, when it comes to configuring a new VLAN ID for actual deployments, a good practice is to favor
the use of the lower range of the VLAN ID space and use the upper range only as a last resort.

46.3 References
For more detailed information and details about commands and parameters, the following
references are applicable:

• System Description for FD 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

• CLI Command Guide for FD 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

46.4 Procedure
Proceed as follows to configure a network VLAN on the LT for C-VLAN cross-connect:

1 Create a network C-VLAN with the following command:

configure vlan id (no) name mode cross-connect (no) priority (no)


new-broadcast (no) protocol-filter (no) pppoe-relay-tag (no)
new-secure-forwarding (no) aging-time

2 If required, modify the network C-VLAN with the following command:

Note — If the new-secure-forward <Vlan::NewSecureForward> fails,


and the following error message displays, see DLP 51. Release of
ingress hardware filter resources may be required.

error: Request is refused due to insufficient hardware


resources

The amount of ingress hardware filter resources to be released can be


monitored using the following command:

show qos resource-usage ingress-hw-filter

configure vlan id

3 STOP. This procedure is complete.

220 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD DLP 1117 Configure a VLAN on the LT for C-VLAN
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT network cross-connect

Configuration example (Config#1):

configure vlan id 301 name "ISP_C_VLAN_301" mode cross-connect

configure vlan id 301 dhcp-opt82-ext enable circuit-id-dhcp physical-id


remote-id-dhcp customer-id relay-id-dhcp relay-id

configure vlan id 300 name "ISP_C_VLAN_300" mode cross-connect

configure vlan id 300 dhcp-opt82-ext add-or-replace circuit-id-dhcp


physical-id remote-id-dhcp customer-id relay-id-dhcp relay-id

configure vlan id 298 name "ISP_C_VLAN_298" mode cross-connect

configure vlan id 298 dhcp-opt82-ext add-or-forward circuit-id-dhcp


physical-id remote-id-dhcp customer-id relay-id-dhcp relay-id

configure vlan id 299 name "ISP_C_VLAN_299" mode cross-connect

configure vlan id 299 dhcp-opt82-ext enable circuit-id-dhcp physical-id


remote-id-dhcp customer-id relay-id-dhcp relay-id

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 221


DLP 1117 Configure a VLAN on the LT for C-VLAN Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
network cross-connect 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

222 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD DLP 1118 Configure a network VLAN on the LT for
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT S-VLAN cross-connect

47 DLP 1118 Configure a network


VLAN on the LT for S-VLAN
cross-connect
47.1 Purpose
This procedure provides the steps to configure a network VLAN on the LT for S-VLAN
cross-connect.

In this mode, the Service Provider VLAN (S-VLAN) ID at the EMAN side is associated with a single
subscriber interface at the user side. The C-VLANs carried within the S-VLAN are passed
transparently to the end user. This allows the end user to specify its own end-to-end connectivity,
while remaining transparent for the EMAN.

Forwarding is only done based on the S-VLAN forwarding context. The forwarding is transparent
for the C-VLANs. Frames on the subscriber interface may or may not have an S-VLAN tag. In case
of an absent S-VLAN tag (that is for C-VLAN tagged and untagged/priority tagged frames), the
subscriber interface’s pre-configured S-VLAN ID will be assigned.

Note — This configuration is used system-wide and the operator does


not need to identify any specific LT.

Figure 22 Configure a network VLAN on the LT for S-VLAN cross-connect


DLP

S-VLAN
CC
LT

NT

ISAM

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 223


DLP 1118 Configure a network VLAN on the LT for Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
S-VLAN cross-connect 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

47.2 Reserved or default system VLAN identifiers


The following VLAN IDs are used by the system and cannot be used for configuration purposes
by the operator:

• VLAN IDs 0 and 4095: reserved by IEEE


• VLAN ID 4094: internal communication VLAN

Sometimes an ISAM feature requires reserving a new VLAN ID. In general such VLAN IDs are
configurable, with the default values located in the upper range of the VLAN ID space. Some
examples:

• Internal Communication VLAN: programmable in [1..4093] with default 4092


• MPLS internal control VLAN: programmable in [1..4093] with default 4089

So, when it comes to configuring a new VLAN ID for actual deployments, a good practice is to favor
the use of the lower range of the VLAN ID space and use the upper range only as a last resort.

47.3 References
For more detailed information and details about commands and parameters, the following
references are applicable:

• System Description for FD 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

• CLI Command Guide for FD 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

47.4 Procedure
Proceed as follows to configure a network VLAN on the LT for S-VLAN cross-connect:

1 Create an S-VLAN on the LT with the following command:

configure vlan id stacked name mode cross-connect (no) priority (no)


new-broadcast (no) protocol-filter (no) pppoe-relay-tag

224 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD DLP 1118 Configure a network VLAN on the LT for
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT S-VLAN cross-connect

2 If required, configure the S-VLAN on the LT with the following command:

Note — For FGLT-B and for 7362 ISAM DF:

The parameter cvlan4095passthru is always effective on "passThru",


regardless of the configuration.

The vmac is not supported, so when associating a VLAN to a VLAN port,


the configuration will be rejected when that VLAN has been configured
using the attributes vmac-translation,vmac-dnstr-filter or
vmac-not-in-opt61.

configure vlan id

3 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Configuration example (Config#1):

configure vlan id stacked:400:0 name “IPS_S_VLAN-400” mode cross-connect

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 225


DLP 1118 Configure a network VLAN on the LT for Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
S-VLAN cross-connect 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

226 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD DLP 1120 Configure a network VLAN on the LT for
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT C-iBridge

48 DLP 1120 Configure a network


VLAN on the LT for C-iBridge
48.1 Purpose
This procedure provides the steps to configure a network VLAN on the LT for C-iBridge.

The concept of a VLAN in intelligent bridging (iBridge) mode is that multiple NSPs are each
connected to the NE with a VLAN. The user ports are connected to the VLAN of their
corresponding NSP.

Note — This configuration is used system-wide and the operator does


not need to identify any specific LT.

Figure 23 Configure a VLAN on the LT for C-iBridge


DLP

C-VLAN
iBridge
LT

NT

ISAM

48.2 Reserved or default system VLAN identifiers


The following VLAN IDs are used by the system and cannot be used for configuration purposes
by the operator:

• VLAN IDs 0 and 4095: reserved by IEEE


• VLAN ID 4094: internal communication VLAN

Sometimes an ISAM feature requires reserving a new VLAN ID. In general such VLAN IDs are
configurable, with the default values located in the upper range of the VLAN ID space. The set of
VLAN IDs that need to be reserved are ISAM product variant specific. Some examples:

• Internal Communication VLAN: programmable in [1..4093] with default 4092


• MPLS internal control VLAN: programmable in [1..4093] with default 4089

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 227


DLP 1120 Configure a network VLAN on the LT for Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
C-iBridge 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

So, when it comes to configuring a new VLAN ID for actual deployments, a good practice is to favor
the use of the lower range of the VLAN ID space and use the upper range only as a last resort.

48.3 References
For more detailed information and details about commands and parameters, the following
references are applicable:

• System Description for FD 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

• CLI Command Guide for FD 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

48.4 Procedure
Proceed as follows to create a C-VLAN iBridge on the LT:

1 Create a network C-VLAN iBridge with the following command:

configure vlan id (no) name mode residential-bridge (no) priority (no)


new-broadcast (no) protocol-filter (no) pppoe-relay-tag (no)
new-secure-forwarding (no) aging-time

2 If required, configure the network C-VLAN iBridge with the following command:

Note — If the new-secure-forward <Vlan::NewSecureForward> fails,


and the following error message displays, see DLP 51. Release of
ingress hardware filter resources may be required.

error: Request is refused due to insufficient hardware


resources

The amount of ingress hardware filter resources to be released can be


monitored using the following command:

show qos resource-usage ingress-hw-filter

configure vlan id

228 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD DLP 1120 Configure a network VLAN on the LT for
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT C-iBridge

3 Optionally, create an RB forwarder and enable an un-authenticated VLAN service with the
following command:

configure vlan id (no) mac-unauth

Note — See NTP 44 for more information about an un-authenticated


VLAN service.

4 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Configuration examples (Config#1):

configure vlan id 100 name “iBridge-vlan” mode residential-bridge

configure vlan id 100 dhcp-opt82-ext enable circuit-id-dhcp physical-id


remote-id-dhcp customer-id relay-id-dhcp relay-id new-secure-fwd enable

configure vlan id 200 name “Multicast-vlan” mode residential-bridge

configure vlan id 401 mode residential-bridge name MCAST_VLAN_401

configure vlan id 402 mode residential-bridge name MCAST_VLAN_402

configure vlan id 450 name “iBridge-vlan450” mode residential-bridge

configure vlan id 450 dhcp-opt82-ext enable circuit-id-dhcp physical-id


remote-id-dhcp customer-id relay-id-dhcp relay-id new-secure-fwd enable

configure vlan id 501 mode residential-bridge name BLV_VLAN

configure vlan id 502 mode residential-bridge name SLV_VLAN

configure vlan id 1234 mac-unauth mode residential-bridge

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 229


DLP 1120 Configure a network VLAN on the LT for Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
C-iBridge 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

230 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD DLP 1129 Create xDSL profiles
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

49 DLP 1129 Create xDSL profiles


49.1 Purpose
This procedure provides the steps to create xDSL profiles.

49.2 General
Before you can create an xDSL line, you need to create the necessary profiles. Table 10 describes
the two types of profiles.

Table 10 xDSL profiles

Profile Description
Service Profile Groups a number of parameters related to the xDSL service

Spectrum Profile Groups a number of parameters related to the xDSL spectrum

The parameters of the xDSL spectrum depend largely on the xDSL flavour (ADSL, READSL,
ADSL2(+), VDSL, or VDSL2). That is why the configuration of an xDSL spectrum is done in two
steps:

1 Configure the general xDSL spectrum parameters:


• used profiles
• noise margins
• power management mode
• Seamless Rate Adaptation (SRA) parameters
2 Configure the xDSL flavour specific parameters.

Refer to the System Description for FD 100/320Gbps NT and FX NT for more information on
power management mode, SRA, and so on.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 231


DLP 1129 Create xDSL profiles Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

49.3 Procedure
Proceed as follows to create an xDSL profile:

1 Create an xDSL service profile with the following command:

configure xdsl service-profile (index)

name <AsamProfileName>

version <SignedInteger>

(no) ra-mode-down <Xdsl::RAModeDownType>

(no) ra-mode-up <Xdsl::RAModeUpType>

(no) min-bitrate-down <Xdsl::BitRate>

(no) min-bitrate-up <Xdsl::BitRate>

(no) plan-bitrate-down <Xdsl::BitRate>

(no) plan-bitrate-up <Xdsl::BitRate>

(no) max-bitrate-down <Xdsl::BitRate>

(no) max-bitrate-up <Xdsl::BitRate>

(no) max-delay-down <Xdsl::InterleavingDelay>

(no) max-delay-up <Xdsl::InterleavingDelay>

(no) imp-noise-prot-dn <Xdsl::ImpNoiseProtection>

(no) imp-noise-prot-up <Xdsl::ImpNoiseProtection>

(no) inp-wo-erasure-dn

(no) inp-wo-erasure-up

(no) min-l2-br-down <Xdsl::BitRate>

Note — The value of “min-bitrate-down” is also used for the calculation


of the available bandwidth for multicast; see DLP 107.

232 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD DLP 1129 Create xDSL profiles
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

2 Activate an xDSL service profile with the following command:

configure xdsl service-profile (index) active

Note 1 — The xDSL service profile must be activated within 15 minutes


after it has been created, otherwise it will be deleted.

Note 2 — The activation parameter can also be included in step 1, but


then no modification of the parameters is possible afterwards (except
name, scope and version; see DLP 56).

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 233


DLP 1129 Create xDSL profiles Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

3 Create an xDSL spectrum profile and configure the parameters common to all the DSL
flavors with the following command:

configure xdsl spectrum-profile (index)

name <AsamProfileName>

local-profile

version <SignedInteger>

(no) dis-ansi-t1413

(no) dis-etsi-dts

(no) dis-g992-1-a

(no) dis-g992-1-b

(no) dis-g992-2-a

(no) dis-g992-3-a

(no) dis-g992-3-b

(no) g992-3-l1

(no) g992-3-l2

(no) g992-3-aj

(no) g992-3-am

(no) g992-5-a

(no) g992-5-b

(no) ansi-t1.424

(no) dis-etsi-ts

(no) itu-g993-1

(no) ieee-802.3ah

(no) g992-5-aj

(no) g992-5-am

(no) g993-2-8a

(no) g993-2-8b

(no) g993-2-8c

(no) g993-2-8d

(no) g993-2-12a

234 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD DLP 1129 Create xDSL profiles
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

(no) g993-2-12b

(no) g993-2-17a

(no) g993-2-30a

(no) g993-2-35b

(no) min-noise-down <Xdsl::NoiseMargin>

(no) min-noise-up <Xdsl::NoiseMargin>

(no) trgt-noise-down <Xdsl::NoiseMargin>

(no) trgt-noise-up <Xdsl::NoiseMargin>

(no) max-noise-down <Xdsl::NoiseMarginPlus>

(no) max-noise-up <Xdsl::NoiseMarginPlus>

(no) carrier-mask-down <Xdsl::CarrierMaskDown>

(no) carrier-mask-up <Xdsl::CarrierMaskUp>

(no) rf-band-list <Xdsl::RFBand>

(no) power_mgnt_mode <Xdsl::LinePowerMgtMode>

(no) l0-time <Xdsl::LineTime>

(no) l2-time <Xdsl::LineTime>

(no) l2-agpow-red-tx <Xdsl::L2Atpr>

(no) modification <Xdsl::ModifyStatus>

(no) rau-noise-down <Xdsl::NoiseMargin>

(no) rau-noise-up <Xdsl::NoiseMargin>

(no) rau-time-down <Xdsl::RaTime>

(no) rau-time-up <Xdsl::RaTime>

(no) rad-noise-down <Xdsl::NoiseMargin>

(no) rad-noise-up <Xdsl::NoiseMargin>

(no) rad-time-down <Xdsl::RaTime>

(no) rad-time-up <Xdsl::RaTime>

(no) l2-agpw-to-red-tx <Xdsl::LineL2Atpr>

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 235


DLP 1129 Create xDSL profiles Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

4 Configure the artificial noise (that is, the transmitter-referred artificial noise level to be used
as additional noise source at the downstream transmitter) with the following command:

configure xdsl spectrum-profile (index)

artificial-noise-down (psd-point)

(no) frequency <Xdsl::CustFreq>

(no) psd <Xdsl::CustPsd>

5 If the xDSL type is ADSL or ADSL2, then the ADSL and ADSL2 specific part of an xDSL
spectrum profile can be managed with the following command:

configure xdsl spectrum-profile (index) adsl-adsl2

(no) proprietary-feat

(no) propr-feat-value <Xdsl::ProprFeatValue>

(no) max-agpowlev-down <Xdsl::PowerLevel>

(no) max-agpowlev-up <Xdsl::PowerLevel>

(no) max-psd-down <Xdsl::Adsl2PowerSpectralDensityDown>

(no) max-psd-up <Xdsl::Adsl2PowerSpectralDensityUp>

(no) pbo-mode-up

(no) max-recv-power-up <Xdsl::RxPowerLevel>

(no) psd-mask-up <Xdsl::Adsl2PsdMaskUp>

236 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD DLP 1129 Create xDSL profiles
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

6 If the xDSL type is ADSL2+, then the ADSL2+ specific part of an xDSL spectrum profile can
be managed with the following command:

configure xdsl spectrum-profile (index) adsl2-plus

(no) proprietary-feat

(no) propr-feat-value <Xdsl::ProprFeatValue>

(no) max-agpowlev-down <Xdsl::PowerLevel>

(no) max-agpowlev-up <Xdsl::PowerLevel>

(no) max-psd-down <Xdsl::Adsl2PlusPowerSpectralDensityDown>

(no) max-psd-up <Xdsl::Adsl2PlusPowerSpectralDensityUp>

(no) pbo-mode-up

(no) max-recv-power-up <Xdsl::RxPowerLevel>

(no) psd-shape-down <Xdsl::Adsl2PlusPsdShapeDown>

(no) psd-mask-up <Xdsl::Adsl2PlusPsdMaskUp>

7 If the xDSL type is Reach Extended ADSL2 (READSL2), then the READSL2 specific part of
an xDSL spectrum profile can be managed with the following command:

configure xdsl spectrum-profile (index) re-adsl

(no) proprietary-feat

(no) propr-feat-value <Xdsl::ProprFeatValue>

(no) max-agpowlev-down <Xdsl::PowerLevel>

(no) max-agpowlev-up <Xdsl::PowerLevel>

(no) max-psd-down <Xdsl::ReAdsl2PowerSpectralDensityDown>

(no) max-psd-up <Xdsl::ReAdsl2PowerSpectralDensityUp>

(no) pbo-mode-up

(no) max-recv-power-up <Xdsl::RxPowerLevel>

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 237


DLP 1129 Create xDSL profiles Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

8 If the xDSL type is VDSL, then the VDSL specific part of an xDSL spectrum profile can be
managed with the following command:

configure xdsl spectrum-profile (index) vdsl

(no) proprietary-feat

(no) propr-feat-value <Xdsl::ProprFeatValue>

(no) vdsl-band-plan <Xdsl::VdslBandPlan>

(no) optional-band <Xdsl::OptionalBandUsage>

(no) optional-endfreq <Xdsl::OptionalBandEndFreq>

(no) adsl-band <Xdsl::AdslBandUsage>

(no) max-agpowlev-down <Xdsl::VdslPowerLevel>

(no) max-agpowlev-up <Xdsl::VdslPowerLevel>

(no) psd-shape-down <Xdsl::VdslPsdShapeDown>

(no) psd-shape-up <Xdsl::VdslPsdShapeUp>

(no) pbo-mode-down

(no) pbo-mode <Xdsl::PboModeVdsl>

(no) rx-psd-shape-up <Xdsl::RxVdslPsdShapeUp>

(no) ghstones-pwr-mode <Xdsl::GhsTonesTxPwr>

(no) max-band <Xdsl::VdslMaxBandNum>

(no) max-freq <Xdsl::VdslMaxFrequency>

(no) m-psd-level-down <Xdsl::MaxPsdDown>

(no) m-psd-level-up <Xdsl::MaxPsdUp>

(no) psd-pbo-par-a-up <Xdsl::ABParamType>

(no) psd-pbo-par-b-up <Xdsl::ABParamType>

(no) cust-psd-sc-down <Xdsl::PsdScaleBit>

(no) cust-psd-ty-down <Xdsl::PsdTypeBit>

(no) cust-rx-psd-sc-up <Xdsl::PsdScaleBit>

(no) cust-rx-psd-ty-up <Xdsl::PsdTypeBit>

(no) opt-startfreq <Xdsl::OptionalBandStartFreq>

238 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD DLP 1129 Create xDSL profiles
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

9 Configure the transmission power of the G.hs tones in VDSL environment with the following
command:

configure xdsl spectrum-profile (index) vdsl ghstone-set-pwr-ctrl

(no) a43 standard | auto | manual:<Xdsl::GhsTonesTxPwrLvl>

(no) b43 standard | auto | manual:<Xdsl::GhsTonesTxPwrLvl>

(no) a43c standard | auto | manual:<Xdsl::GhsTonesTxPwrLvl>

(no) v43 standard | auto | manual:<Xdsl::GhsTonesTxPwrLvl>

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 239


DLP 1129 Create xDSL profiles Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

10 If the xDSL type is VDSL2, then the VDSL2 specific part of an xDSL spectrum profile can be
managed with the following command:

configure xdsl spectrum-profile (index) vdsl2

(no) proprietary-feat

(no) propr-feat-value <Xdsl::ProprFeatValue>

(no) max-agpowlev-down <Xdsl::VdslPowerLevel>

(no) max-agpowlev-up <Xdsl::VdslPowerLevel>

(no) psd-shape-down <Xdsl::Vdsl2PsdShapeDown>

cs-psd-shape-dn <Xdsl::Vdsl2CustPsdShape>

cs-psd-shape-up <Xdsl::Vdsl2CustPsdShape>

(no) psd-shape-up <Xdsl::Vdsl2PsdShapeUp>

(no) rx-psd-shape-up <Xdsl::RxVdslPsdShapeUp>

(no) psd-pbo-e-len-up <Xdsl::PsdPboElectrLength>

(no) m-psd-level-down <Xdsl::MaxPsdDown>

(no) m-psd-level-up <Xdsl::MaxPsdUp>

(no) psd-pbo-par-a-up <Xdsl::ABParamType>

(no) psd-pbo-par-b-up <Xdsl::ABParamType>

(no) v-noise-snr-down <Xdsl::SnrmMode>

(no) v-noise-snr-up <Xdsl::SnrmMode>

(no) v-noise-psd-down <Xdsl::VirtualNoisePsdDownType>

(no) v-noise-psd-up <Xdsl::VirtualNoisePsdUpType>

(no) cust-psd-sc-down <Xdsl::PsdScaleBit>

(no) cust-psd-ty-down <Xdsl::PsdTypeBit>

(no) cust-psd-sc-up <Xdsl::PsdScaleBit>

(no) cust-psd-ty-up <Xdsl::PsdTypeBit>

(no) cust-rx-psd-sc-up <Xdsl::PsdScaleBit>

(no) cust-rx-psd-ty-up <Xdsl::PsdTypeBit>

240 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD DLP 1129 Create xDSL profiles
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

11 Activate an xDSL spectrum profile with the following command:

configure xdsl spectrum-profile (index)

active

12 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 241


DLP 1129 Create xDSL profiles Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

Configuration example (Config#1):

configure xdsl service-profile 7 name ADSL_profile version 1

configure xdsl service-profile 7 active

configure xdsl service-profile 8 name VDSL_profile version 1


min-bitrate-down 25000 min-bitrate-up 25000 plan-bitrate-down 40000
plan-bitrate-up 27000 max-bitrate-down 262143 max-bitrate-up 262143

configure xdsl service-profile 8 active

configure xdsl service-profile 10 name XSRVC_0_0 version 1 min-l2-br-down


0

configure xdsl service-profile 10 ra-mode-up automatic min-bitrate-up 0


plan-bitrate-up 0 max-bitrate-up 0 max-delay-up 16 imp-noise-prot-up 0
no inp-wo-erasure-up

configure xdsl service-profile 10 ra-mode-down automatic


min-bitrate-down 0 plan-bitrate-down 0 max-bitrate-down 0 max-delay-down
16 imp-noise-prot-dn 0 no inp-wo-erasure-dn

configure xdsl service-profile 10 active

configure xdsl spectrum-profile 4 name vdsl_profile version 1

configure xdsl spectrum-profile 4 dis-ansi-t1413 dis-etsi-dts


dis-g992-1-a dis-g992-1-b dis-g992-2-a dis-g992-3-a dis-g992-3-b
dis-etsi-ts g993-2-8a g993-2-8b g993-2-8c g993-2-8d g993-2-12a
g993-2-12b g993-2-17a g993-2-30a

configure xdsl spectrum-profile 4 active

configure xdsl spectrum-profile 5 name adsl_profile version 1

configure xdsl spectrum-profile 5 active

configure xdsl spectrum-profile 6 name "slv-fallback-profile"

configure xdsl spectrum-profile 6 active

configure xdsl spectrum-profile 22 name "approved-profile"

configure xdsl spectrum-profile 22 active

configure xdsl spectrum-profile 99 name "blv-fallback-spec-profile"

configure xdsl spectrum-profile 99 active

242 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD DLP 1130 Configure xDSL bonding
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

50 DLP 1130 Configure xDSL


bonding
50.1 Purpose
This procedure provides the steps to configure xDSL bonding and PTM initialization mode.

xDSL bonding allows traffic to be carried to and from a single logical subscriber interface over
multiple physical xDSL lines.

Note — xDSL is ADSL or VDSL.

50.1.1 Bonding services


It offers the following services:

• extended reach of xDSL service


• provisioning of standard xDSL services to subscribers that cannot receive these services over
a single xDSL line
• higher bit rate services

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 243


DLP 1130 Configure xDSL bonding Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

50.1.2 Bonding levels


Different bonding levels can be configured, depending on the type of system, and LT board type
(ADSL or VDSL) and capabilities.

• odd-even adjacent line bonding (for ATM/ADSL lines)


• intra-LT line bonding (for ATM/ADSL lines and for PTM/VDSL lines)

Note 1 — The following applies to these xDSL lines in case of


odd-even adjacent line bonding:

• the two lines used for xDSL bonding must be subsequent lines
• the first line must be an odd line
• ATM PVC, … must be configured AFTER configuring the bonding
group

Note 2 — The following applies to the first line (also known as bonding
group index):

• Configuration of parameters such as atm pvc, bridge port, and so on,


must be done on that first line. Refer to DLP 105 for the configuration
procedure.

244 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD DLP 1130 Configure xDSL bonding
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

50.2 Configuration considerations


The PTM bonding initialization mode is applicable for all the PTM bonding groups present in the
system. Two possible configuration modes are available and can be selected at the system level
as follows:

• mode 1: double initialization with probe-training (default)


• mode 2: single initialization without probe-training

Caution 1 — An NT reset is required for PTM bonding initialization to


take effect on the system. Plan the NT reset for minimum service impact.

PTM bonding groups that are operational when the PTM bonding
initialization mode is configured will stay in operational mode until an NT
reset is requested.

Caution 2 — If there are no bonding groups configured in the system,


both the configured PTM bonding initialization mode and the actual PTM
bonding initialization mode are updated with the newly configured PTM
initialization mode immediately.

Caution 3 — If there are one or more bonding groups configured in the


system before an NT reset, only the configured PTM bonding initialization
mode value will be updated with the new value. The actual PTM bonding
initialization mode value will be updated only after the NT reset is
complete. At any given moment, the actual PTM bonding initialization
mode will reveal the actual initialization mode of the PTM bonding groups.

50.3 References
For more information see the following references:

• System Description for FD 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

• CLI Command Guide for FD 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

50.4 Prerequisites
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled before xDSL bonding can be configured:

• The LT must be planned; see DLP 100.


• The xDSL service and spectrum profiles must have been created; see DLP 49; the xDSL lines
(primary and secondary) must have been configured with those profiles.
• The transfer mode of the xDSL lines must be correct:
• If the default transfer mode of the lines is the required transfer mode, no configuration of
the lines is necessary.
• If the default transfer mode of the lines is not the required transfer mode, the xDSL
line/user must be configured; see DLP 105.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 245


DLP 1130 Configure xDSL bonding Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

• Optional - If vectoring is to be applied on the xDSL Lines:


• configure the VCE entity; see DLP 77

50.5 Procedure
Proceed as follows to configure xDSL bonding:

1 Do one of the following steps:

a Create an xDSL bonding group, go to step 2.

b Delete an xDSL bonding group, go to step 4.

2 Create a bonding group as follows:

i Configure an xDSL bonding group profile with the following command:

configure xdsl-bonding group-profile

Note — A bonding group profile can be created in one step (that is, with
all the necessary parameters and activation of the bonding group profile).
It can also be created in several steps by specifying a few parameters in
each step and by activating the bonding group profile in the last step.
ii Configure the bonding group assembly timeout with the following command:

configure xdsl-bonding group-assembly-time

Note 1 — Default value is zero (“0” represents an infinite time), which


results in the bonding group remaining down until all lines in this bonding
group are up.

Note 2 — Setting the assembly timer to a certain value (e.g. 120 s)


allows the bonding group to become operational once this time is
achieved and the minimum configured bandwidth for the bonding group
are met, even when not all the lines are in showtime.

Note 3 — This system-wide bonding group assembly timer will be


overruled - for a particular bonding group - by the assembly timer
specified in the bonding-group profile, provided that the latter timer has a
value different from use-system.

246 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD DLP 1130 Configure xDSL bonding
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

iii Create an xDSL bonding group with the following command:

configure xdsl-bonding group group-profile name

Note 1 — The “bonding-group-idx” is the primary link number, which is


also the bonding group number.

Note 2 — A primary line will immediately be added to the group when a


profile is assigned to a new group.
iv Add links to the xDSL bonding group with the following command:

configure xdsl-bonding group link

Note 1 — A secondary line cannot be added to a group that does not


exist yet.

Note 2 — Removing the prime line will delete the complete group
(removing lines is only allowed when the administrative status of the
bonding group is “down”).
v Set the administrative status of an xDSL bonding group to “up” with the following
command:

configure xdsl-bonding group up

Note — The administrative status of an xDSL bonding group cannot be


put to “up” when no group-profile has been assigned to the group yet.

3 Go to step 5.

4 To delete a bonding group, remove the bonding-group profile from the group. Use the
following command:

configure xdsl-bonding group no group-profile

configure xdsl-bonding group group-profile 0

5 To display information on the xDSL bonding group, the following commands can be used:

a View the xDSL bonding profiles with the following command:

show xdsl-bonding profiles

b View the operational data for the bonding group with the following command:

show xdsl-bonding operational-data group

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 247


DLP 1130 Configure xDSL bonding Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

c View the operational data for the bonding link with the following command:

show xdsl-bonding operational-data link

d View the xDSL bonding failure statistics for near-end, far-end or the group with the
following commands:

show xdsl-bonding failure-status near-end

show xdsl-bonding failure-status far-end

show xdsl-bonding failure-status group

e View the xDSL bonding group summary with the following command:

show xdsl-bonding summary

6 To set the PTM initialization mode and activate it on the system, use the following steps:

i Configure the PTM initialization mode with the following command:

configure xdsl-bonding ptm-init-mode

ii Trigger an NT reset with any one of the following commands:

Caution 1 — An NT reset is required for PTM bonding initialization to


take effect on the system. Plan the NT reset for minimum service impact.

PTM bonding groups that are operational when the PTM bonding
initialization mode is configured will stay in operational mode until an NT
reset is requested.

Caution 2 — If there are no bonding groups configured in the system,


both the configured PTM bonding initialization mode and the actual PTM
bonding initialization mode are updated with the newly configured PTM
initialization mode immediately.

Caution 3 — If there are one or more bonding groups configured in the


system before an NT reset, only the configured PTM bonding initialization
mode value will be updated with the new value. The actual PTM bonding
initialization mode value will be updated only after the NT reset is
complete. At any given moment, the actual PTM bonding initialization
mode will reveal the actual initialization mode of the PTM bonding groups.

admin equipment slot nt-a reboot with-selftest

admin equipment slot nt-a reboot without-selftest

admin equipment slot nt-a reboot hot-restart

7 View the configured PTM bonding initialization mode with the following command:

info configure xdsl-bonding

248 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD DLP 1130 Configure xDSL bonding
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

8 View the actual PTM bonding initialization mode with the following command:

show xdsl-bonding actual-ptm-init-mode

9 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Configuration example (Config#1):

configure xdsl-bonding group-profile 1 name XBOND_0_0 local-profile


version 1

configure xdsl-bonding group-assembly-time 0

configure xdsl-bonding group-profile 1 min-bitrate-up 0 plan-bitrate-up


0 max-bitrate-up 0 max-delay-up 16 imp-noise-prot-up 0 grp-assembly-time
65500

configure xdsl-bonding group-profile 1 active

configure xdsl-bonding group 1/1/5/15 group-profile name:XBOND_0_0

configure xdsl-bonding group 1/1/5/15 link 1/1/5/16

configure xdsl-bonding group 1/1/5/15 up

show xdsl-bonding profiles 1

show xdsl-bonding operational-data group 1/1/5/15

show xdsl-bonding operational-data link 1/1/5/15

show xdsl-bonding failure-status near-end 1/1/5/15

show xdsl-bonding failure-status far-end 1/1/5/15

show xdsl-bonding failure-status group 1/1/5/15

show xdsl-bonding summary 1/1/5

Configuration example of PTM initialization when there are no bonding


groups configured in the system:

configure xdsl-bonding ptm-init-mode mode2

info configure xdsl-bonding

show xdsl-bonding actual-ptm-init-mode

Configuration example of PTM initialization when there are one or more


bonding groups configured in the system:

configure xdsl-bonding ptm-init-mode mode2

admin equipment slot nt-a reboot without-selftest

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 249


DLP 1130 Configure xDSL bonding Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

info configure xdsl-bonding

show xdsl-bonding actual-ptm-init-mode

Configuration example of PTM initialization when there are one or more


bonding groups configured in the system:

configure xdsl-bonding ptm-init-mode mode1

admin equipment slot nt-a reboot with-selftest

info configure xdsl-bonding

show xdsl-bonding actual-ptm-init-mode

250 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD DLP 1134 Configure QoS
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

51 DLP 1134 Configure QoS


51.1 Purpose
This procedure provides the steps to configure QoS.

Note — In case of S+C VLAN CC, both the S-VLAN and the C-VLAN
P-bits are set by the P-bit contract table, port default P-bit, or by the policy
action. Note that in this case downstream traffic segregation relies on the
P-bits in the C-VLAN tag.

51.2 Procedure
Proceed as follows to configure QoS:

1 Configure general QoS parameters (if necessary):

Note — This option is not applicable to GPON LTs.

i Configure the ATM overhead factor, the EFM overhead factor, and the CAC mode with
the following command:

configure qos (no) atm-overhead-fact <Qos::AtmFactor> (no)


eth-efm-fact <Qos::EthEfmFactor> (no) enable-alignment (no) cac-mode
<Qos::CacMode>

ii Configure the upstream QoS DSL Control Packet Policer for incoming packets with the
following command:

configure qos dsl-ctrl-pkt-policer (no) sustained-rate


<Qos::SustainedRate> (no) burst-size <Qos::DslCtrlBurstSize> (no)
protocol-ctrl <Qos::ControlProtocolPolicerCtrl>

iii Configure the police rate and burst rate per protocol with the following command:

configure qos ctrl-pkt-policer (protocol-id) (no) sustained-rate


<Qos::SustainedRate> (no) burst-size <Qos::DslCtrlBurstSize>

iv Configure the police rate and burst rate for NNI ports with the following command:

configure qos nni-ctrl-pkt-policer (no) sustained-rate


<Qos::NniSustainedRate> (no) burst-size <Qos::NniCtrlBurstSize>

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 251


DLP 1134 Configure QoS Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

v If required, configure the DSCP to Dot1P Alignment Table for layer 3 forwarded traffic.
There are two options:

• The first option is to use the global setting. This can be configured with the following
command:

configure qos dscp-map-dot1p (index)dot1p-value


<Qos::DscpToDot1PAlign>

• The second option is to use a DSCP-to-P-bit profile. This can be configured with the
following command:

configure qos profiles dscp-pbit (name)

configure qos profiles dscp-pbit (name) codepoint (number)


[dot1p-value <Qos::DscpToDot1PAlign>]

Note — The second option is only supported on GPON LTs.

vi Configure the downstream traffic class mapping table (if needed) defining the
relationship between the traffic class and the queue and queue drop color, with the
following command:

configure qos tc-map-dot1p (index) tc <Qos::QosTrafficClass> dpcolor


<Qos::Color> policer-color <Qos::PolicerColor>

Note — This command is not supported for GPON LT boards.

vii Configure the QoS priority bit handling, which is a system-level VLAN-specific
parameter, using the command “configure vlan” (parameter priority-policy) as described
in DLP 60.

252 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD DLP 1134 Configure QoS
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

viii Configure the QoS p-bit behavior in the upstream and downstream direction of the S+C
VLAN cross connect and residential iBridge forwarding model with the following
command:

Note — This command is only applicable to DSL LTs.

configure qos pbit-scheduling (no) sc-xcon-us <QoS::PbitSched> (no)


sc-xcon-dn <QoS::PbitSched> (no) sc-xcon-rb-us <QoS::PbitSched> (no)
sc-rb-dn <QoS::PbitSched>

ix Configure the QoS handling of upstream protocol (ARP, PPPoE, DHCPv4/v6, ND and
MLD) for DSL LTs with the following command:

configure qos upstr-prot-dsl (no) enable

2 Configure the QoS policer profiles with the following command:

Note 1 — The real number of user-configurable up- or downstream


policers:

• For NGLT-A the real number of user-configurable up- or downstream


policers is 32K MINUS the number of bridge ports.
• For FGLT-A the real number of user-configurable upstream policers is
32K MINUS the number of bridge ports.

Note 2 — When re-planning from NGLT-A to NGLT-C:

In a session profile that is attached to a VLAN port, a “two-rate three color


marker” (trtcm) policer with a remarking action based on the frame color
(green, yellow, red) can be used as downstream policer on the NGLT-A.

But on the NGLT-C, this remarking action is NOT supported. The only
allowed policer actions based on the color are “pass” or “discard”).

Hence, an operator who intends to re-plan an NGLT-A to an NGLT-C


cannot use a trtcm policer with remarking action as downstream policer
in a session profile attached to a VLAN port.

Note 3 — For NGLT boards, SAP level up/down policing is supported


only at VLAN port. Subflow policing is supported both at bridgeport and
VLAN port.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 253


DLP 1134 Configure QoS Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

Note 1 — Parameter policed-Size-Ctrl are supported only on specific


variants of boards NGLT-A, NGLT-C, and FGLT-A, in upstream direction
only. Parameter is not supported in 7362 ISAM DF.

Possible values for parameter policed-Size-Ctrl:


auto-controlled/ingress-mode/ egress-mode/rmv4b-ingress. DS policer
(include subflow policer) only supports auto-controlled, other modes
would be rejected.

When bind session Profile to BP/VP for specific variants of boards, if


policer policed-Size-Ctrl is not auto-controlled, the configuration will be
rejected.

When you specify a policer profile to session profile down-policer, if


policer policed-Size-Ctrl is not auto-controlled, the configuration will be
rejected.

Note 2 — For FGLT-B and 7362 ISAM DF, the range of the parameter
committed-burst-size is changed to 1024 to 67108864 unit: bytes. The
parameters committed-burst-size and excess-burst-size can only be
configured to 64 different types of values. The configuration would be
rejected while associating the session profile with such a policer profile to
a VLAN port.

configure qos profiles policer (name) committed-info-rate


<Qos::CommittedInfoRate> committed-burst-size
<Qos::CommittedBurstSize>(no) policer-type
<QoS::PolicerType>[excess-info-rate
<Qos::ExcessInfoRate>][excess-burst-size
<Qos::ExcessBurstSize>][coupling-flag <Qos::CouplingFlag>][color-mode
<Qos::ColorMode>][yellow-action <Qos::YellowAction>][red-action
<Qos::RedAction>] [green-action <Qos::GreenAction> policed-size-ctrl
<Qos:: PoliceFrameCtrl>]

3 Create a QoS marker profile:

i Configure a marker for single dot-1P with the following command:

configure qos profiles marker d1p (name) default-dot1p


<Qos::ExtVlanSysPrio>

ii Configure a marker for single DSCP with the following command:

configure qos profiles marker dscp (name) default-dscp


<Qos::DscpToDot1PAlignmentDscpIndex> (no) alignment

iii Configure a marker for a DSCP contract table with the following command:

configure qos profiles marker dscp-contract (name) (no) alignment

254 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD DLP 1134 Configure QoS
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

iv Configure a codepoint for a DSCP contract table with the following command:

configure qos profiles marker dscp-contract (name) codepoint


(codepoint) (on) dscp-value <Qos::DscpToDot1PAlignmentDscpIndex>

v Configure a marker for Dot1P and the DSCP contract table with the following command:

configure qos profiles marker d1p-dscp-contract (name) dot1p-value


<Qos::ExtVlanSysPrio>

vi Configure a codepoint for Dot1P and the DSCP contract table with the following
command:

configure qos profiles marker d1p-dscp-contract (name) codepoint


(codepoint) (no) dscp-value <Qos::DscpToDot1PAlignmentDscpIndex>

vii Configure a marker for Dot1P and single DSCP with the following command:

configure qos profiles marker d1p-dscp (name) default-dscp


<Qos::DscpToDot1PAlignmentDscpIndex> default-dot1p
<Qos::ExtVlanSysPrio>

viii Configure a marker for Dot1P alignment. There are two options:

• The first option is to use the system level mapping. This can be configured with the
following command:

configure qos profiles marker d1p-alignment (name) enable

• The second option is to use a DSCP-to-P-bit profile. This can be configured with the
following command:

configure qos profiles marker d1p-alignment (name) enable


dscp-pbit-prof (name)

ix Configure a marker for dot1p remark table with the following command:

Note 1 — DSCP marking is not supported for GPON LTs.

Note 2 — DSCP remarking and single dot1p/DSCP marking is not


supported for GPON LTs.

Note 3 — DSCP-to-pbit alignment for GPON is only supported on the


bridge port via a marker profile.

Note 4 — For NELT-B: DSCP-to-pbit alignment is only supported on


VLAN ports that correspond to the configured pvid and only for untagged
IPoE traffic.

configure qos profiles marker dot1p-remark (name) dot1p-value <


Qos::ExtVlanSysPrio> remark-value <Qos::ExtVlanSysPrio >

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 255


DLP 1134 Configure QoS Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

4 Configure a scheduler node profile with the following command:

configure qos profiles scheduler-node (name) priority <Qos::QosPriority>


weight <Qos::QosWeight> shaper-profile <Qos::QosShaperProfileName> (no)
mcast-inc-shape <Qos::QosMulticastInclShaping>

5 Configure a CAC profile with the following command:

configure qos profiles cac (name) res-voice-bandwidth


<Qos::BandWidthKBPS> max-mcast-bandwidth <Qos::BandWidthKBPS>
res-data-bandwidth <Qos::BandWidthKBPS>

6 Configure a queue profile (that is, the used algorithm (tail-drop or Random Early Detection
(RED)) and threshold(s)) with the following command:

Note 1 — DSCP marking is not supported for GPON LTs.

Note 2 — DSCP remarking and single dot1p/DSCP marking is not


supported for GPON LTs.

Note 3 — DSCP-to-pbit alignment for GPON is only supported on the


bridge port using a marker profile.

Note 4 — The difference in granularity of the HW to be configured


versus the granularity of the configuration parameter may result in some
inaccuracy.

configure qos profiles (no) queue (name) (bac-complex-type) [(no)


unit<Qos::Units> ]

7 Use one of the following commands to configure a filter which can be used to build policy
actions based on filtering criteria:

a To configure a filter using L2 filtering criteria (MAC address, Ethernet type,...), use the
following command:

Note — An IGMP channel has precedence over L2 filtering. In other


words, if an IGMP channel is configured, user upstream IGMP packets
are directly processed by the IGMP module, bypassing any L2 filter.

configure qos profiles l2-filter (name) (no) dst-mac-addr


<Qos::MacAddrAndMask> (no) src-mac-addr <Qos::MacAddrAndMask> (no)
ethertype <Qos::FilterEthernetType> (no) dot1p-priority
<Qos::MatchDot1pValue> (no) canonical-format <Qos::FilterCfi> (no)
vlan-id <Qos::FilterVlanId>

256 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD DLP 1134 Configure QoS
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

b To configure a filter using L3 filtering criteria containing IPv4 addresses (destination IP


address, source IP address,...), use the following command:

Note 1 — If the filter type is set to ipv4, then the parameters


dst-ipv6-addr and src-ipv6-addr are not applicable.

Note 2 — An IGMP channel has precedence over L3 filtering. In other


words, if an IGMP channel is configured, user upstream IGMP packets
are directly processed by the IGMP module, bypassing any L3 filter.

configure qos profiles l3-filter (name) filter-type ipv4 (no)


dst-ip-addr <Ip::AddressAndMaskFull> (no) src-ip-addr
<Ip::AddressAndMaskFull> (no) dst-ipv6-addr <ipv6::PrefixAndLength>
(no) src-ipv6-addr <ipv6::PrefixAndLength> (no) min-dst-port
<Qos::L4PortNumber> (no) max-dst-port <Qos::L4PortNumber> (no)
min-src-port <Qos::L4PortNumber> (no) max-src-port
<Qos::L4PortNumber> (no) dscp-value <Qos::MatchDscpValue> (no)
protocol <Qos::Protocol>

c To configure a filter using L3 filtering criteria containing IPv6 addresses (destination IP


address, source IP address,...), use the following command:

Note — If the filter type is set to ipv6, then the parameters dst-ip-addr
and src-ip-addr are not applicable.

configure qos profiles l3-filter (name) filter-type ipv6 (no)


dst-ip-addr <Ip::AddressAndMaskFull> (no) src-ip-addr
<Ip::AddressAndMaskFull> (no) dst-ipv6-addr <ipv6::PrefixAndLength>
(no) src-ipv6-addr <ipv6::PrefixAndLength> (no) min-dst-port
<Qos::L4PortNumber> (no) max-dst-port <Qos::L4PortNumber> (no)
min-src-port <Qos::L4PortNumber> (no) max-src-port
<Qos::L4PortNumber> (no) dscp-value <Qos::MatchDscpValue> (no)
protocol <Qos::Protocol>

8 Configure QoS policy action profiles, using the policer profiles created in step 2, with the
following command:

Note 1 — p-bit/DSCP marking as policy action is not supported on the


GPON LTs.

Note 2 — Mirror VLAN set as policy action is only supported on FELT-B.

configure qos profiles policy-action (name) (no) dscp-value


<Qos::SetDscpValue> (no) dot1p-value <Qos::SetDot1pValue> (no)
discard-packet <Qos::DiscardPacket (no) shared-policer <Qos::Shared
Policer> (no) policer-profile <Qos::QosPolicerProfileName> (no)
mirror-vlan <Qos::PolicyActionMirrorVlan>

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 257


DLP 1134 Configure QoS Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

9 Configure QoS policy profiles with a set of associated actions.

A policy rule contains:

• Filter type
• L2 or L3 filter (see step 7)
• Precedence of this policy rule
• Policy action (see step 8).

configure qos profiles policy (name) filter <Qos::PolicyFilter> (no)


precedence <Qos::PolicyPrecedence> (no) policy-action
<Qos::QosProfileName>

10 Create a QoS policer per TC profile:

i Configure a policer per TC profile table with the following command:

configure qos profiles policer-per-tc (name)

ii Configure a policer per TC profile (using profiles created in step 1) with the following
command:

configure qos profiles policer-per-tc (name) tc-policer


<Qos::TcIndex> (no) policer none | name: <Policer Profile name>

11 Create the QoS session profile:

i Configure the session profile table (using profiles created in step 1 and marker profiles
used in step 3) with the following command:

configure qos profiles session (name)

Note — The parameter ing-outer-marker is only supported on FELT-B.

ii Configure a list of upstream policy profiles (minimum 2, maximum 16), using policy
profiles created in step 9, with the following command:

configure qos profiles session (name) up-policy (policy-name)

iii Configure a list of downstream policy profiles (minimum 2, maximum 16), using policies
created in step 9, with the following command:

configure qos profiles session (name) down-policy (policy-name)

258 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD DLP 1134 Configure QoS
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

12 Configure an ingress QoS profile with the following command:

Note 1 — The ingress QoS profile is only supported on GPON LTs,


FELT-B and on NELT-B UNI for downstream traffic.

Note 2 — The default value (15; binary: 1111) means that the
corresponding p-bit is not used and that the traffic will be dropped.

configure qos profiles ingress-qos (name) (no) dot1-p0-tc


<Vlan::NibbleMask_0> (no) dot1-p1-tc <Vlan::NibbleMask_1> (no)
dot1-p2-tc <Vlan::NibbleMask_2> (no) dot1-p3-tc <Vlan::NibbleMask_3>
(no) dot1-p4-tc <Vlan::NibbleMask_4> (no) dot1-p5-tc
<Vlan::NibbleMask_5> (no) dot1-p6-tc <Vlan::NibbleMask_6> (no)
dot1-p7-tc <Vlan::NibbleMask_7> (no) usedei (no) dot1-p0-color
<Qos::NibbleMask_0> (no) dot1-p1-color <Qos::NibbleMask_1> (no)
dot1-p2-color <Qos::NibbleMask_2> (no) dot1-p3-color <Qos::NibbleMask_3>
(no) dot1-p4-color <Qos::NibbleMask_4> (no) dot1-p5-color
<Qos::NibbleMask_5> (no) dot1-p6-color <Qos::NibbleMask_6> (no)
dot1-p7-color <Qos::NibbleMask_7>

13 Configure a rate limit profile with the following command:

configure qos profiles rate-limit (name)

14 Configure an upstream bandwidth profile with the following command:

Note — The upstream bandwidth profile is only supported on GPON


and NG-PON2 LTs.

configure qos profiles bandwidth (name)

15 Configure a shaper profile with the following command:

configure qos profiles shaper (name)

16 Attach the created session profile to a bridge port with the following command:

configure bridge port <Rack/Shelf/Slot/Port:VCI:VPI> (no) qos-profile


<Session-profile>

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 259


DLP 1134 Configure QoS Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

17 Attach the created scheduler node profile (see step 4) and CAC profile (see step 5) to an
ONT or UNI interface with the next command:

Note 1 — This is only supported on GPON and EPON LTs, NELT-B and
FELT-B for UNIT/NNI only (not ONT), and NG-PON2 LTs.

Note 2 — Detaching the scheduler node profile from the QoS interface
again is normally done using the no scheduler-node option of the
command. However, in this specific case, detaching this profile is not
allowed because a queue is by default always associated to the QoS
interface, be it:

• an ONT QoS interface: queue sharing is enabled


• a UNI QoS interface (no queue sharing): a queue is associated to a
UNI by default on the GPON LT

Therefore, detaching a scheduler node profile will never be possible, only


modification of the profile is allowed in these cases.

Note 3 — The parameter ingress-profile is only used for EPON ONU


interfaces.

Note 4 — The parameter cac-profile is used for CAC on the 1G PON


bandwidth in the case of EPON OLTs in downstream.

Note 5 — The parameter ext-cac is used for CAC on the 10G PON
bandwidth in the case of EPON OLTs in downstream.

Note 6 — When re-planning from NGLT-A to NGLT-C:

The number of QoS downstream queues per UNI, configurable at PON


level, can be configured individually on each PON (values: 4 or 8) on the
NGLT-A. On the NGLT-C, the configured value must be the same for two
adjacent PONs within the same pair (1&2, 3&4, 5&6, 7&8). Hence, an
operator who intends to re-plan an NGLT-A to an NGLT-C cannot
configure different values for the number of QoS downstream queues on
two neighboring PONs.

configure qos interface (index) (no) scheduler-node


<Qos::SchedulerNodeProfName> (no) ingress-profile
<Qos::QosIngressProfileNameEOnu> (no) cac-profile
<Qos::QosCacProfileName> (no) ext-cac <Qos::QosCacProfileName> (no)
ds-queue-sharing (no) us-queue-sharing (no) ds-num-queue
<Qos::NumberofQueues> (no) ds-num-rem-queue <Qos::NumberofQueues> (no)
us-num-queue <Qos::NumberofQueues> (no) queue-stats-on (no) autoschedule
oper-weight <Qos::QosWeight> oper-rate <Qos::ShaperExcessiveInfoRate>
(no) us-vlanport-queue (no) dsfld-shaper-prof
<Qos::QosShaperProfileName> (no) gem-sharing <Qos::GemSharing>

260 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD DLP 1134 Configure QoS
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

18 Configure the upstream queue at the interface, using the following command:

configure qos interface upstream-queue (no) priority (no) weight (no)


bandwidth-profile (no) ext-bw (no) bandwidth-sharing (no) queue-profile
(no) shaper-profile

19 Attach the created queue profile (see step 6) and shaper profile (see step 15) to an interface
(can be a DSL port, an SHDSL interface, an Ethernet link, a PON interface, an ONT interface,
or a UNI interface) with the next command:

configure qos interface (index) queue (queue) priority


<Qos::QosPriority> weight <Qos::QosWeight> queue-profile
<Qos::QosQueueProfileName> shaper-profile <Qos::QosShaperProfileName>

20 Configure the downstream queues on the ONT with the following command:

configure qos interface (index) ds-rem-queue (queue) (no) priority


<Qos::QosPriority> (no) weight <Qos::QosWeight> ]

21 Configure the user port interface to schedule traffic using outer VLAN, C-VLAN, or S-VLAN
with the following command:

configure qos interface (index) (no) scheduler-node <Qos::SchedulerNode


ProfName> (no) ds-schedule-tag <Qos::DsSchedulePbitTag>

Note — This command is supported on FGLT-B.

22 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Configuration examples (Config#1):

configure qos profiles policer ppUsSap256

committed-info-rate 256 committed-burst-size 32000

configure qos profiles policer ppDsSap3

committed-info-rate 3000 committed-burst-size 96000

configure qos profiles policer ppVoice100

committed-info-rate 100 committed-burst-size 3000

configure qos profiles marker d1p mpUsSap default-dot1p 0

configure qos interface 1/1/1/12 upstream-queue 0

configure qos interface 1/1/1/1/1/1/1 upstream-queue 0

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 261


DLP 1134 Configure QoS Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

IPv4 L3 filter configurations:

configure qos profiles l3-filter f3pUsVoiceIp src-ip-addr 192.170.0.0/16

configure qos profiles l3-filter f3pDsVoiceIp dst-ip-addr 192.170.0.0/16

configure qos profiles l3-filter l3pUsVodIp dst-ip-addr 192.180.2.2/0

configure qos profiles l3-filter l3pDsVodIp src-ip-addr 192.180.2.2/0

IPv6 L3 filter configurations:

configure qos profiles l3-filter ipv6_f3pUsVoiceIp filter-type ipv6


src-ipv6-addr 12ee:1234:3333:4444:5555:6666:7777:8888/120

configure qos profiles l3-filter ipv6_f3pDsVoiceIp filter-type ipv6


dst-ipv6-addr 12ee:4444::8888/120

configure qos profiles l3-filter ipv6_l3pUsVodIp filter-type ipv6


dst-ipv6-addr 12ee:1234:3333:4444::6789/0

configure qos profiles l3-filter ipv6_l3pDsVodIp filter-type ipv6


src-ipv6-addr 12ee:4444::8888/0

configure qos profiles policy-action apVoice dot1p-value 6


policer-profile name:ppVoice100k

configure qos profiles policy-action apVod dot1p-value 3

configure qos profiles policy pcyUpVoice policy-action name:apVoice no


precedence filter l3-name:f3pUsVoiceIp

configure qos profiles policy pcyDnVoice policy-action name:apVoice no


precedence filter l3-name:f3pDsVoiceIp

configure qos profiles policy pcyUpVod policy-action name:apVod filter


l3-name:l3pUsVodIp

configure qos profiles policy pcyDnVod policy-action name:apVod filter


l3-name:l3pDsVodIp

configure qos profiles policy ipv6_pcyUpVoice policy-action name:apVoice


no precedence filter l3-name:ipv6_f3pUsVoiceIp

configure qos profiles policy ipv6_pcyDnVoice policy-action name:apVoice


no precedence filter l3-name:ipv6_f3pDsVoiceIp

configure qos profiles policy ipv6_pcyUpVod policy-action name:apVod


filter l3-name:ipv6_l3pUsVodIp

configure qos profiles policy ipv6_pcyDnVod policy-action name:apVod


filter l3-name:ipv6_l3pDsVodIp

262 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD DLP 1145 Configure 802.1x
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

52 DLP 1145 Configure 802.1x


52.1 Purpose
This procedure provides the steps to enable, disable, and configure parameters for 802.1x.

52.2 Configuration considerations


Different from traditional static configuration VLANs for end-user services, ISAM also provides the
option for dynamic assignment of VLANs that may particularly be needed in Enterprise
environments.

Port-based 802.1x authentication is not sufficient for PoL scenarios. Hence, a MAC-based
authentication function is required.

Note — Static MAC address can not be configured if 802.1x


MAC-based authentication is enabled.

See NTP 44 for more information about configuring dynamic VLAN


assignment in PoL.

52.3 Procedure
Proceed as follows to configure 802.1x:

1 Enable 802.1x with the following command:

configure system security pae port-access

2 Configure the 802.1x parameters with the following command:

configure system security pae authenticator (port) (no) controlled-port


<Aaa::PaeControlledPortControl> (no) quiet-period <Aaa::paeQuitTime>
(no) tx-period <Aaa::paeTime> (no) supp-timeout <Aaa::paeTime> (no)
server-timeout <Aaa::paeTime> (no) max-req <Aaa::paeMaxReq> (no)
re-auth-enabled (no) re-auth-period <Aaa::paeReauthPeriod>

3 Configure the remote authenticator and enable authentication and handshake with the
following command:

configure system security pae ext-authenticator (port) (no)


authentication (no) init-authreq-off (no) handshake (no)
handshake-period <Aaa::PortHandShakePeriod>

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 263


DLP 1145 Configure 802.1x Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

4 Optionally, configure the remote authenticator to enable/disable MAC-based authentication


and dynamic VLAN assignment in PoL with the following command:

configure system security pae ext-authenticator (port) (no)


authentication (no) init-authreq-off (no) handshake (no)
handshake-period <Aaa::PortHandShakePeriod> (no) mac-auth-enabled (no)
mab-auth (no) dyn-vlan-assign

Note — MAC address by-pass (MAB) can only be enabled when the
parameter mac-auth-enabled is configured. MAB can be
enabled/disabled with the same command.

5 Enable initialization control for a port with the following command:

configure system security pae port (port) (no) initialize

6 Optionally, determine the behavior for 802.1x sessions in case authentication servers are
down or unreachable with the following command:

configure system security radius aut-s-unreach-act (reject-all) |


accept-all)

7 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Configuration example (Config#1):

configure system security pae port-access

configure system security pae authenticator 1/1/5/12 controlled-port


force-unauthorized server-timeout 20 max-req 5

configure system security pae ext-authenticator 1/1/5/12 authentication


handshake

configure system security pae port 1/1/5/12 initialize

configure system security pae ext-authenticator 1/1/7/1/1/1/1 mac-auth


dyn-vlan-assign

configure system security pae ext-authenticator 1/1/7/1/1/1/1 mab-auth

264 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD DLP 1146 Configure PPPoE relay on LT
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

53 DLP 1146 Configure PPPoE relay


on LT
53.1 Purpose
PPPoE relay needs no configuration at the LT level. It should only be enabled or disabled on a
specific VLAN. The number of user VLANs that the NE should be aware of for PPPoE relay
functionality (PPP0E user VLAN awareness) is configurable at the VLAN forwarder level.

53.2 Behavior of the line ID


The behavior of the line ID is determined by the value of the parameter pppoe-relay-tag. The value
of the parameter pppoe-relay-tag can be:

• true:
if pppoe-relay-tag is set to true, then the values of circuit-id-pppoe and of remote-id-pppoe are
irrelevant.
The NE adds the vendor-specific tag and always puts the customer-id parameter into the
remote-id suboption, and will always generate a string (access node, rack,...) to put in the
circuit-id suboption.
• false (default):
if pppoe-relay-tag is false, then the values of circuit-id-pppoe and of remote-id-pppoe are
irrelevant.
The NE does not add the vendor-specific tag.
• configurable:
if pppoe-relay-tag is set to configurable, then the values of circuit-id-pppoe and of
remote-id-pppoe are relevant and subject to the same rules as for DHCP.
The NE adds the vendor specific tag according to the settings of these suboptions.

In both cases where a string is to be generated (that is, the case where pppoerelaytag is
configurable and circuit-id-pppoe is set to physcial-id; and the case where pppoerelaytag is set to
true), the string format is identified by:

• the configurable syntax parameters (ADSL/EFM): configurable via the loop-id-syntax; see DLP
94, step 3.

53.3 Access loop encapsulation


The behavior of the Access Loop Encapsulation is determined by the value of the parameter
pppoe-relay-tag. The value of the parameter can be as follows:

• true
• configurable
• false: default

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 265


DLP 1146 Configure PPPoE relay on LT Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

If the parameter pppoe-relay-tag is set to true or configurable, then the access loop encapsulation
configuration has an effect.

The NE adds the vendor-specific tag and puts the access loop encapsulation sub-option into it, if
the pppoe-l2-encaps parameter is set to add. The encaps1 vlaue is also added.

If the pppoe-l2-encaps parameter is set to notadd, then the access loop encapsulation sub-option
is not added to the vendor-specific tag.

If the parameter pppoe-relay-tag is set to false (default), then the value of the parameter
pppoe-l2-encaps sub-option does not have an effect. The NE does not add the vendor-specific
tag.

The behavior of the Access Loop Encapsulation is not determined by the value of the line rate
parameter. The system will add the Access Loop Encapsulation sub-option even if the line rate
parameter tags are configured as notadd.

53.4 Prerequisite
The following prerequisite must be fulfilled before PPPoE can be enabled on a VLAN:

• A VLAN must have been created; see46 DLP 47, DLP 10448.

53.5 Procedure
Proceed as follows to enable or disable PPPoE relay:

1 Enable PPPoE relay and, if required, configure the vendor-specific tag with the following
command:

Note — The parameters pppoer-vlanware and dhcpr-vlanware are only


supported in 7363 ISAM MX.

configure vlan id (vlanid) (no) pppoe-relay-tag


<Vlan::PppoeRelayEnableR3.1> (no) pppoe-linerate <Vlan::Pppoe-linerate>
(no) pppoe-l2-encaps <Vlan::PppoeAccessEncap> (no) l2-encaps1
<Vlan::AccessLoopEncap1> (no) pppoer-vlanaware
<Vlan::PppoeRelayVlanAware> (no) circuit-id-pppoe
<Vlan::CircuitIdPppoe> (no) remote-id-pppoe <Vlan::RemoteIdPppoe>

2 Disable PPPoE relay with the following command:

configure vlan id (vlanid) no pppoe-relay-tag

3 STOP. This procedure is complete.

266 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD DLP 1146 Configure PPPoE relay on LT
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

Configuration example (Config#1):

configure vlan id 560 mode residential-bridge name PPPoXVlan560

configure vlan id 560 pppoe-relay-tag configurable circuit-id-pppoe


physical-id remote-id-pppoe customer-id pppoe-linerate addactuallinerate
pppoe-l2-encaps add l2-encaps1 untagged pppoer-vlanaware system-default

configure vlan id 560 pppoe-relay-tag true circuit-id-pppoe physical-id


remote-id-pppoe customer-id pppoe-linerate addactuallinerate
pppoe-l2-encaps add l2-encaps1 single-tagged pppoer-vlanaware
upto-1-uservlan

configure vlan id 560 no pppoe-relay-tag

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 267


DLP 1146 Configure PPPoE relay on LT Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

268 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD DLP 1152 Reboot the system
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

54 DLP 1152 Reboot the system


54.1 Purpose
You can reboot the whole system in the following modes:

• restart with self-test


• restart without self-test
• system hot restart

Caution — The xHub configuration, if any, must be saved before


performing an NT reset or an NT restart.

See RTP 309 for the procedure to backup the configuration.

54.2 Procedure
Proceed as follows to reboot the system:

1 Reboot the system with the following command:

admin equipment reboot-isam <Equipm::SystemRestart>

2 To reboot the system without a self-test:

admin equipment reboot-isam without-self-test

3 To perform a hot restart of the system:

admin equipment reboot-isam hot-restart

4 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Configuration example (Config#1):

admin equipment reboot-isam with-self-test

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 269


DLP 1152 Reboot the system Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

270 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD DLP 1159 Manage OSWP
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

55 DLP 1159 Manage OSWP


55.1 Purpose
This procedure provides the steps to manage the Overall Software Package (OSWP).

Note — For more information on OSWP; see TNG 332.

55.2 Prerequisite
The NE contains one OSWP, which is committed and active on all the boards.

55.3 Procedure
Proceed as follows to manage the OSWP in the NE:

1 Verify the OSWP current load and equipment slots, using the following commands:

show software-mngt oswp

show equipment slot

2 Configure the download of an OSWP with the following command:

Note — When FTP is used for file transfer, the server ID should be
present in the configured FTP server list (see DLP 65).

configure software-mngt oswp (index)

primary-file-server-id <SwMngt::serverId>

second-file-server-id <SwMngt::serverId>

(no) activate <SwMngt::OswpAutoAct>

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 271


DLP 1159 Manage OSWP Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

3 Configure database automatic activation and automatic backup states and attributes with the
following command:

configure software-mngt database

(no) activate <SwMngt::DbAutoAct>

(no) backup <SwMngt::DbAutoBackup>

(no) auto-backup-intvl <SwMngt::DbAutoBackIntvl>

4 Start the actual OSWP download with the following command:

Note — In a multiple LT system, when a new board type is introduced


within the current OSWP context, the missing software files for this new
board type can be retrieved by re-downloading the OSWP. The
re-download command is identical to the regular OSWP download
command. The command will simply re-evaluate the planned and/or
detected board types in the system and upload any missing software file
(see also TNG 332 for more details).

admin software-mngt oswp (index) download <SwMngt::oswpName>

5 Abort an OSWP download with the following command:

admin software-mngt oswp (index) abort-download

6 Activate an OSWP with the following command:

admin software-mngt oswp (index) activate <SwMngt::activationType>

7 Commit an OSWP with the following command:

admin software-mngt oswp (index) commit

8 Verify the configuration, using the following command:

show software-mngt oswp

272 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD DLP 1159 Manage OSWP
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

9 Manage disk and descriptor files with the following command:

Note — A disk file contains information about the different software files
and descriptor files that are stored on the file disk. It also contains
information such as the file name, file size, file type, file availability status,
and file format.

The operator can remove an unused file from the disk by specifying the
file name, which is unique over all unit types and over all SWP types for
all releases.

admin software-mngt disk-file (path) [(remove)]

10 View the information about the relationships between the files known by the system and the
available OSWPs with the following command:

Note — If this command is executed immediately after executing the


'download command from step 4 and no output is available, this means
the download is still going on. The show command has to be executed
some time after the download command has been executed.

show software-mngt swp-disk-file (name)[file-name


<SwMngt::swpContainsFileName>][file-board-type <SwMngt::swpBoardType>]

11 Reset the database to the default database with the following command:

admin software-mngt oswp (index) activate with-default-db

Note 1 — The default database differs from a ‘clear’ as it will maintain


the management connectivity information and the configuration data up
to the equipment card level identification (for examples, user line
configuration, forwarding configuration and services configuration are
removed or defaulted).

Note 2 — If any specific configuration is marked as protected, this


command will only restore those OAM configurations.

Note 3 — The default database activation will give first priority to the
marked interface configuration.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 273


DLP 1159 Manage OSWP Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

12 Clear the database to the factory defaults with the following command:

admin software-mngt oswp (index) activate clear-db

Note — When performing this clear of the database to the factory


defaults, all configuration information is lost.

The purpose of this command is to bring the NT as close as possible to


the factory defaults (only difference is the running OSWP vs the factory
OSWP). This command is valuable during a HW replacement scenario of
a simplex NT. The removed NT can immediately be reused in another
setup.

13 Clear the database and reset the NT with factory database with the following command:

admin software-mngt oswp (index) activate with-factory-db

Note — This command is different than the clear-db command. The


clear-db command requires a physical plug-out and plug-in of the NT
board, however, the factory-db command does not require a physical
plug-out and plug-in of the NT board.

14 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Configuration example (Config#1):

configure software-mngt oswp 2

primary-file-server-id 192.168.111.112

second-file-server-id 192.168.111.212

activate manually

admin software-mngt oswp 2 download OSWP_packages/OSWP1

admin software-mngt oswp 2 activate with-linked-db

admin software-mngt oswp 2 commit

admin software-mngt oswp 2 activate with-default-db

admin software-mngt oswp 2 activate clear-db

admin software-mngt oswp 2 activate with-factory-db

274 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD DLP 1163 Modifying xDSL profiles
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

56 DLP 1163 Modifying xDSL profiles


56.1 Purpose
This procedure provides the steps to modify xDSL spectrum profiles.

You can modify:

• xDSL service profiles


Only the parameters name, scope and version can be changed for an existing xDSL service
profile. If other parameters need to be changed, then a new xDSL service profile must be
created.
• xDSL spectrum profiles

56.2 Prerequisite
The following prerequisite must be fulfilled before an xDSL spectrum profile can be modified:

• The xDSL spectrum profile must have been created; see DLP 49.

56.3 Procedure
Proceed as follows to modify an xDSL spectrum profile:

1 Start the modification of an xDSL spectrum profile with the following command:

configure xdsl spectrum-profile (index) modification start

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 275


DLP 1163 Modifying xDSL profiles Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

2 Modify the parameters of an xDSL spectrum profile with the following command:

configure xdsl spectrum-profile (index)

name <AsamProfileName>

local-profile

version <SignedInteger>

(no) dis-ansi-t1413

(no) dis-etsi-dts

(no) dis-g992-1-a

(no) dis-g992-1-b

(no) dis-g992-2-a

(no) dis-g992-3-a

(no) dis-g992-3-b

(no) g992-3-l1

(no) g992-3-l2

(no) g992-3-aj

(no) g992-3-am

(no) g992-5-a

(no) g992-5-b

(no) ansi-t1.424

(no) dis-etsi-ts

(no) itu-g993-1

(no) ieee-802.3ah

(no) g992-5-aj

(no) g992-5-am

(no) g993-2-8a

(no) g993-2-8b

(no) g993-2-8c

(no) g993-2-8d

(no) g993-2-12a

276 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD DLP 1163 Modifying xDSL profiles
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

(no) g993-2-12b

(no) g993-2-17a

(no) g993-2-30a

(no) g993-2-35b

(no) min-noise-down <Xdsl::NoiseMargin>

(no) min-noise-up <Xdsl::NoiseMargin>

(no) trgt-noise-down <Xdsl::NoiseMargin>

(no) trgt-noise-up <Xdsl::NoiseMargin>

(no) max-noise-down <Xdsl::NoiseMarginPlus>

(no) max-noise-up <Xdsl::NoiseMarginPlus>

(no) carrier-mask-down <Xdsl::CarrierMaskDown>

(no) carrier-mask-up <Xdsl::CarrierMaskUp>

(no) rf-band-list <Xdsl::RFBand>

(no) power_mgnt_mode <Xdsl::LinePowerMgtMode>

(no) l0-time <Xdsl::LineL0Time>

(no) l2-time <Xdsl::LineL2Time>

(no) l2-agpow-red-tx<Xdsl::LineL2Atpr>

(no) rau-noise-down <Xdsl::NoiseMargin>

(no) rau-noise-up <Xdsl::NoiseMargin>

(no) rau-time-down <Xdsl::RaTime>

(no) rau-time-up <Xdsl::RaTime>

(no) rad-noise-down <Xdsl::NoiseMargin>

(no) rad-noise-up <Xdsl::NoiseMargin>

(no) rad-time-down <Xdsl::RaTime>

(no) rad-time-up <Xdsl::RaTime>

(no) l2-agpw-to-red-tx <Xdsl::LineL2Atpr>

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 277


DLP 1163 Modifying xDSL profiles Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

3 Use one of the following commands to complete the modification of the xDSL spectrum
profile:

a When the modifications must be kept:

configure xdsl spectrum-profile (index) modification complete

b When the modifications must be canceled:

configure xdsl spectrum-profile (index) modification cancel

4 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Configuration example (Config#1):

configure xdsl spectrum-profile 22 modification start

configure xdsl spectrum-profile 22 name test_profile

configure xdsl spectrum-profile 22 modification complete

278 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD DLP 1170 Configure SSH and SFTP
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

57 DLP 1170 Configure SSH and


SFTP
57.1 Purpose
This procedure provides the steps to configure the SSH and SFTP functionality.

57.2 General
When configuring SSH, the following must be taken into consideration:

• SSH can only be configured by the CLI security administrator or by the TL1 manager
• SSH can use password or public key authentication:
• In case of password authentication:
The operator can login using SSH without any further configuration (that is, other than the
configuration described in DLP 93). Once logged in, it is advised to disable the
non-secure channels (such as Telnet and TFTP). The operator can now configure the
client username/password for the SFTP client in the NE.
• In case of public key authentication:
Before being able to login with a public key, the operator has to configure the
username/public key on the system, so the NE can authenticate the user. In order to do
this, the operator has to login via username/password, configure the username/key
combinations and change to key authentication.
Again, the operator must make sure that the non-secure channels are closed.

When configuring SFTP, the following must be taken into consideration:

• When the NE acts as an SFTP server, both password authentication and public key
authentication can be used.
• When the NE acts as an SFTP client (to another external SFTP server), only password
authentication can be used.

57.3 Procedure
Proceed as follows to configure the SSH functionality:

1 Configure the SSH server profile (retries, timeout, authentication algorithm, and encryption
algorithm) with the following command:

configure system security ssh server-profile (no) server-retries


<SSH::ServerRetries> (no) idle-timeout <SSH::ServerIdleTimeOut> (no)
dis-hmac-sha-1 (no) dis-hmac-sha-1-96 (no) dis-aes (no) dis-des-3 (no)
dis-blowfish (no) dis-des-56

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 279


DLP 1170 Configure SSH and SFTP Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

2 Do one of the following:

a If public key authentication is used, go to step 3

b If password authentication is used, go to step 4

3 Configure the SSH user and the public key, to be used while connecting, with the following
command:

Note 1 — The private/public key pair is generated by the operator by an


external key generator program on the EMS. The generated key is placed
in a file by the generator program. This file can be downloaded to the NE
in the SSH directory “/pub/SSH/Download” via TFTP. Based on the file
name and file extension (for example, isadmin.pk2), the NE stores the
public key automatically in its database, associated with an operator
name. Now the NE can use this key to authenticate the operator when he
logs in via CLI. A maximum of 10 users can be configured.

Note 2 — Once the session is set up, it is advised to try the login first
before continuing with the next step.

Note 3 — When the operator notices that the private/public key pair of
the NE has been compromised, the server’s public key can be
regenerated with the following command:

admin system security ssh generate-key


<SSH::RegenerateKey>

configure system security ssh user (name) key <SSH::SshClientPublicKey>

4 Configure an SFTP user name and password for when the NE has to connect to an external
SFTP server with the following command:

Note — The SFTP user created with the command above, is unique in
the system. In case of a second attempt to create such an SFTP user, the
first one will be overwritten.

configure system security ssh sftp-user (username) password prompt |


plain:<SSH::SftpPassword>

5 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Configuration example (Config#1):

configure system security ssh server-profile server-retries 3


idle-timeout 1800 no dis-hmac-sha-1 no dis-hmac-sha-1-96 no dis-aes
no dis-des-3 no dis-blowfish no dis-des-56

280 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD DLP 1170 Configure SSH and SFTP
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

configure system security ssh user SSH01

configure system security ssh user SSH02


key AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABJQAAAIEAnDR5OYM3lhz3tYC3wGQhumJhrum9pyGJ3Ic0WGW
0nJ7SW5CkMm7WfDUXujqwY09I2vZ2s1fMtpPHr/yrSAQ29qnLvmnhAeMdcan1YoVMgp0TAE
jWKdKonn9SlGH9oPe6FFRb+1eJoPNNH3CGpGk03mqROeM0KQWoU/nRlcYFa9c=

configure system security ssh sftp-user JohnDoe password plain:sshpsw01

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 281


DLP 1170 Configure SSH and SFTP Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

282 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD DLP 1173 Switch a user from ADSL to VDSL and vice
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT versa

58 DLP 1173 Switch a user from


ADSL to VDSL and vice versa
58.1 Purpose
This procedure provides the steps to change the configuration of a user from an ADSL service to
a VDSL (1 or 2) service and the opposite, from a VDSL service to an ADSL service.

58.2 Procedure
Proceed as follows to switch a user from ADSL service to VDSL (1 or 2) service:

1 At the creation of the service and spectrum profiles, fill in the correct values both for the ADSL
and VDSL profiles; see DLP 49.

2 Enable the modification by changing the value of the parameter transfer-mode from atm to
ptm, or ptm to atm with the following command:

Note — The existing interfaces on top of the xDSL line (such as pvc,
bridge port and so on) will be automatically removed.

configure xdsl line (if-index)

service-profile none | <Xdsl::ProfilePointer> | name: <PrintableString>

spectrum-profile none | <Xdsl::ProfilePointer> | name:<PrintableString>

(no) dpbo-profile <Xdsl::LineDpboProfile>

transfer-mode <Xdsl::TpsTcMode> admin-up

Note — Set the transfer mode to ptm to switch to a VDSL service, and
vice versa, set the transfer mode to atm to switch to a ADSL service.

3 Create the new forwarding model. Depending on the mode, refer to DLP 46DLP 47DLP 104
or or DLP 48 for the correct procedure.

4 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 283


DLP 1173 Switch a user from ADSL to VDSL and vice Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
versa 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

Configuration example (Config#1):

configure xdsl line 1/1/4/1 service-profile 8 spectrum-profile 4

transfer-mode ptm admin-up

284 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD DLP 1174 Create an xDSL IPoA user and add this
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT user to a VLAN for C-VLAN cross-connect

59 DLP 1174 Create an xDSL IPoA


user and add this user to a VLAN
for C-VLAN cross-connect
59.1 Purpose
This procedure provides the steps to create an xDSL IPoA user and add this user to a VLAN for
C-VLAN cross-connect.

Figure 24 shows creation of an xDSL IPoA user added to a VLAN for C-VLAN cross-connect.

Figure 24 Create an xDSL IPoA user and add this user to a VLAN for
C-VLAN cross-connect
VlanPort
BridgePort
DLP IPoA/IPoE interworking
ATM PVC
xDSL

IWL

PVID
VLAN

LT

NT

59.2 Prerequisites
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled before an IPoA cross-connect user can be created:

• The LT must be planned; see DLP 100.



• xDSL profiles must have been created; see DLP 49.
• A VLAN must have been configured for C-VLAN cross-connect; see DLP 46 .

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 285


DLP 1174 Create an xDSL IPoA user and add this Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
user to a VLAN for C-VLAN cross-connect 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

59.3 Procedure
Proceed as follows to create an xDSL IPoA user:

1 Create an xDSL line with the following command:

configure xdsl line (if-index)

service-profile none | <Xdsl::ProfilePointer> | name: <PrintableString>

spectrum-profile none | <Xdsl::ProfilePointer> | name:<PrintableString>

(no) dpbo-profile <Xdsl::LineDpboProfile>

(no) ansi-t1413

(no) etsi-dts

(no) g992-1-a

(no) g992-1-b

(no) g992-2-a

(no) g992-3-a

(no) g992-3-b

(no) g992-3-l1

(no) g992-3-l2

(no) g992-3-aj

(no) g992-3-am

(no) g992-5-a

(no) g992-5-b

(no) ansi-t1.424

(no) etsi-ts

(no) itu-g993-1

(no) ieee-802.3ah

(no) g992-5-aj

(no) g992-5-am

(no) g993-2-8a

(no) g993-2-8b

(no) g993-2-8c

286 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD DLP 1174 Create an xDSL IPoA user and add this
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT user to a VLAN for C-VLAN cross-connect

(no) g993-2-8d

(no) g993-2-12a

(no) g993-2-12b

(no) g993-2-17a

(no) g993-2-30a

(no) carrier-data-mode <Xdsl::CarrierDataMode>

(no) admin-status

(no) transfer-mode <Xdsl::TpsTcMode>

2 Configure the xDSL line with the following command:

configure interface port

xdsl-line:<Eqpt::Rack>/<Eqpt::Shelf>/<Eqpt::LtSlot> /<Eqpt::Port>

admin-up

(no) user <Itf::asamIfExtCustomerId>

3 Create an ATM PVC with the following command:

configure atm pvc (port-index)

admin-up

aal5-encap-type llc-snap-routed

4 Create the IPoA L2 inter-working port with the following command:

configure ipoa/e-iw port (interworking-port)

user-ip <Ip::V4AddressHex>

gw-ip <Ip::V4AddressHex>

5 Create a bridge port with the following command:

configure bridge port (port) mac-learn-off

6 Assign a VLAN to the bridge port with the following command:

configure bridge port (port) vlan-id (index)

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 287


DLP 1174 Create an xDSL IPoA user and add this Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
user to a VLAN for C-VLAN cross-connect 100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

7 Set the PVID with the following command:

configure bridge port (port) pvid (vlan-id)

8 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Configuration example (Config#1):

configure xdsl line 1/1/5/7 service-profile 7 spectrum-profile 5 admin-up

configure interface port xdsl-line:1/1/5/7 user “IPoA cross-connect”

configure atm pvc 1/1/5/7:8:35 no admin-down


aal5-encap-type llc-snap-routed

configure ipoa/e-iw port 1/1/5/7:8:35 user-ip 192.168.150.2 gw-ip


192.168.150.1

configure bridge port 1/1/5/7:8:35 mac-learn-off

configure bridge port 1/1/5/7:8:35 vlan-id 298

configure bridge port 1/1/5/7:8:35 pvid 298

288 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD DLP 1187 Configure global VLAN parameters
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

60 DLP 1187 Configure global VLAN


parameters
60.1 Purpose
This procedure provides the steps to specify VLAN parameters which are globally applicable to
VLANs:

• new-broadcast:
This parameter determines if broadcast frames must be switched for each VLAN.
This parameter applies to iBridge VLANs.
• priority-policy:
This parameter specifies how to deal with ethernet priority of the upstream frames.
This parameter applies to iBridge VLANs and cross-connect VLANs.

60.2 Procedure
Proceed as follows to configure the general VLAN parameters:

1 Configure the general VLAN parameters with the following command:

configure vlan (no) new-broadcast priority-policy vlan-specific |


port-default

Note — For GPON LTs, only the value port-default is supported for the
priority-policy parameter.

2 STOP. This procedure is complete.

Configuration example (Config#1):

configure vlan new-broadcast priority-policy port-default

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 289


DLP 1187 Configure global VLAN parameters Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

290 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD DLP 1188 Configure custom PSD points
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

61 DLP 1188 Configure custom PSD


points
61.1 Purpose
Many operators tend to have locations where copper binders have pairs coming from a CO and
pairs coming from a remote cabinet. When the remote cabinet locations get broadband enabled
this often creates spectral compatibility issues in the network: the strong ADSL signal coming from
the remote cabinet creates strong cross talk to the weak signal coming from the CO. This results
in a very unstable line for the one connected to the CO.

To resolve this, a custom Power Spectral Density (PSD) shape is configurable via the xDSL
spectrum profile. A custom defined PSD allows:

• for a better spectrum usage (and better performance as a consequence)


• for protection of the xDSL coming from the CO

Customized PSD values can be configured for:

• ADSL2+
• VDSL
• VDSL2

Up to 20 breakpoints can be configured. When configuring a custom PSD shape, a minimum of 2


PSD points must be configured.

Customized PSD points can be configured while creating a new spectrum profile (see DLP 49) or
by modifying an existing spectrum profile (see DLP 56).

The commands below help the operator to enter the custom PSD shape in a user-friendly way.
Instead of entering octets, the operator can enter numbers corresponding to frequency and PSD.

Warning — When a Custom PSD mask is created, it is up to the


operator to make sure that the provided breakpoints are in accordance
with the PSD slope rules defined in the applicable standard (for example,
G992.5, clause 8.5.1).

A PSD mask configuration violating these rules will not be rejected, but
the DSL chipset will perform a best-effort fit using the PSD shaping rules
of the applicable standard. It is thus possible that the configured PSD
mask may be violated.

If the PSD breakpoints are configured in accordance with the PSD slope
rules defined in the applicable standard then the actual PSD shall always
remain below the configured breakpoints. This means that, for example,
for ADSL2plus it is not possible to have infinite slopes in the PSD mask.

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 291


DLP 1188 Configure custom PSD points Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

See the CLI Command Guide for FD 100/320Gbps NT and FX NT document and also TNG 333
for a full description of all related parameters.

61.2 Procedure
Proceed as follows to configure custom PSD points:

1 For the configuration of:

• custom PSD points for ADSL2+, go to step 2


• custom downstream PSD points for VDSL, go to step 3
• custom upstream PSD points for VDSL, go to step 4
• custom downstream PSD points for VDSL2, go to step 5
• custom upstream Rx PSD points for VDSL2, go to step 6
• custom upstream PSD points for VDSL2, go to step 7

2 Configure the custom PSD points for ADSL2+ as follows:

i Configure a xDSL spectrum profile with the following command:

configure xdsl spectrum-profile (index)

name <AsamProfileName>

version <SignedInteger>

ii Configure the PSD for ADSL2+ as custom PSD with the following command:

configure xdsl spectrum-profile (index) adsl2-plus psd-shape-down


custom-psd-down

iii Configure the PSD values with the following command:

configure xdsl spectrum-profile (index) adsl2-plus cust-psd-pt-down


(psdpt)

frequency <Xdsl::CustFrqAdsl2>

psd <Xdsl::CustomAdsl2Psd>

iv Go to step 8

3 Configure the custom downstream PSD points for VDSL as follows:

i Configure a xDSL spectrum profile with the following command:

configure xdsl spectrum-profile (index)

name <AsamProfileName>

version <SignedInteger>

292 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD DLP 1188 Configure custom PSD points
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

ii Configure the downstream PSD for VDSL as custom PSD with the following command:

configure xdsl spectrum-profile (index) vdsl psd-shape-down


custom-psd-down

iii Configure the downstream PSD scale and type with the following command:

configure xdsl spectrum-profile (index) vdsl

cust-psd-sc-down linear | logarithmic

cust-psd-ty-down mask | template

iv Configure the downstream PSD values with the following command:

configure xdsl spectrum-profile (index) vdsl

cust-psd-pt-down (psdpt)

frequency <Xdsl::CustFreq>

psd <Xdsl::CustPsd>

v Go to step 8

4 Configure the custom upstream PSD points for VDSL as follows:

i Configure a xDSL spectrum profile with the following command:

configure xdsl spectrum-profile (index)

name <AsamProfileName>

version <SignedInteger>

ii Configure the upstream PSD for VDSL as custom PSD with the following command:

configure xdsl spectrum-profile (index) vdsl rx-psd-shape-up


custom-rx-psd-up

iii Configure the upstream PSD scale and type with the following command:

configure xdsl spectrum-profile (index) vdsl

cust-rx-psd-sc-up linear | logarithmic

cust-rx-psd-ty-up mask | template

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 293


DLP 1188 Configure custom PSD points Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

iv Configure the upstream PSD values with the following command:

configure xdsl spectrum-profile (index) vdsl

cust-rx-psd-pt-up (psdpt)

frequency <Xdsl::CustFreq>

psd <Xdsl::CustPsd>

v Go to step 8

5 Configure the custom downstream PSD points for VDSL2 as follows:

i Configure a xDSL spectrum profile with the following command:

configure xdsl spectrum-profile (index)

name <AsamProfileName>

version <SignedInteger>

ii Configure the downstream PSD for VDSL2 as custom PSD with the following
command:

configure xdsl spectrum-profile (index) vdsl2 psd-shape-down


custom-psd-down

iii Configure the downstream PSD scale and type with the following command:

configure xdsl spectrum-profile (index) vdsl2

cust-psd-sc-down linear | logarithmic

cust-psd-ty-down mask | template

iv Configure the downstream PSD values with the following command:

configure xdsl spectrum-profile (index) vdsl2

cust-psd-pt-down (psdpt)

frequency <Xdsl::CustFreq>

psd <Xdsl::CustPsd>

v Go to step 8

6 Configure the upstream Rx PSD points for VDSL2 as follows:

i Configure a xDSL spectrum profile with the following command:

configure xdsl spectrum-profile (index)

name <AsamProfileName>

version <SignedInteger>

294 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA Issue: 14


Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD DLP 1188 Configure custom PSD points
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

ii Configure the upstream Rx PSD for VDSL2 as custom PSD with the following
command:

configure xdsl spectrum-profile (index) vdsl2

rx-psd-shape-up custom-rx-psd-up

iii Configure the upstream Rx PSD scale and type with the following command:

configure xdsl spectrum-profile (index) vdsl2

cust-rx-psd-sc-up linear | logarithmic

cust-rx-psd-ty-up mask | template

iv Configure the upstream Rx PSD values with the following command:

configure xdsl spectrum-profile (index) vdsl2

cust-rx-psd-pt-up (psdpt)

frequency <Xdsl::CustFreq>

psd <Xdsl::CustPsd>

v Go to step 8

7 Configure the upstream PSD points for VDSL2 as follows:

i Configure a xDSL spectrum profile with the following command:

configure xdsl spectrum-profile (index)

name <AsamProfileName>

version <SignedInteger>

ii Configure the upstream PSD for VDSL2 as custom PSD with the following command:

configure xdsl spectrum-profile (index) vdsl2 psd-shape-up


custom-psd-up

Issue: 14 3HH-11975-BAAA-TQZZA 295


DLP 1188 Configure custom PSD points Operations and Maintenance Using CLI for FD
100/320 Gbps NT and FX NT

iii Configure the upstream PSD scale and type with the following command:

configure xdsl spectrum-profile (index) vdsl2

cu